User Manual

User Manual
SRT 1F
Synchronous Radio for Trunk Applications
UMN
911-362/02C0000
Issue 6, January 2010

UMN SRT 1F
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only the product defined in the introduction
of this documentation. This documentation is intended for the use of Nokia Siemens Networks customers only for the purposes
of the agreement under which the document is submitted, and no part of it may be used, reproduced, modified or transmitted in
any form or means without the prior written permission of Nokia Siemens Networks. The documentation has been prepared to
be used by professional and properly trained personnel, and the customer assumes full responsibility when using it. Nokia
Siemens Networks welcomes customer comments as part of the process of continuous development and improvement of the
documentation.
The information or statements given in this documentation concerning the suitability, capacity, or performance of the mentioned
hardware or software products are given as is and all liability arising in connection with such hardware or software products
shall be defined conclusively and finally in a separate agreement between Nokia Siemens Networks and the customer.
However, Nokia Siemens Networks has made all reasonable efforts to ensure that the instructions contained in the document
are adequate and free of material errors and omissions. Nokia Siemens Networks will, if deemed necessary by Nokia Siemens
Networks, explain issues which may not be covered by the document.
Nokia Siemens Networks will correct errors in this documentation as soon as possible. IN NO EVENT WILL NOKIA SIEMENS
NETWORKS BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THIS DOCUMENTATION OR FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR ANY LOSSES,SUCH AS BUT NOT
LIMITED TO LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY OR DATA,THAT MAY
ARISE FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION IN IT.
This documentation and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights and other intellectual property rights
according to the applicable laws.
The wave logo is a trademark of Nokia Siemens Networks Oy. Nokia is a registered trademark of Nokia Corporation. Siemens is
a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respective owners, and they are mentioned for
identification purposes only.
Copyright Nokia Siemens Networks 2010. All rights reserved.
SRT 1F
ii 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN Status of Manual
STATUS OF MANUAL
- Current Issue 6, January 2010
- Previous Issue 5, April 2008
In Issue 6, January 2010, as to the previous issue:

- the Multi-shelf has been removed;
- SV unit TL1/OSI has been removed;
- the BBIU and OPT MSP shelf has been removed;
- the 6U interleaved frequency plan has been added;
- the following new units have been added;
STM 1 BSW optical DTI unit;
Giga Ethernet STI unit;
Giga Ethernet DTI unit;
Multi-Link Giga Ethernet units;
HK CONV unit;
OWBR unit;
RS sub-module for enhanced RST;
RUC V.11 sub-module.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 i
Status of Manual UMN
This page intentionally left blank
SRT 1F
UMN Table of Contents
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION......................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Introduction to the SRT 1F Radio Equipment .......................................... 1-1
1.2 Equipment Features................................................................................. 1-2
1.3 Equipment Details .................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.1 Ordering Guide......................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.2 BRU (Branching Network Unit) .............................................................. 1-16
1.3.3 MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit) ................................................. 1-16
1.3.4 SCSU (Supervisory, Control and Switching Unit) .................................. 1-16
1.4 General Specifications ........................................................................... 1-17
1.4.1 General Information ............................................................................... 1-17
1.4.2 Transmitter (TX) ..................................................................................... 1-18
1.4.3 Receiver (RX)......................................................................................... 1-23
1.4.4 Modulator (MOD) ................................................................................... 1-24
1.4.5 Demodulator (DEM) ............................................................................... 1-24
1.4.6 Digital Processing .................................................................................. 1-25
1.4.7 System Performances............................................................................ 1-26
1.4.8 RF Interference ...................................................................................... 1-31
1.4.9 RF Interface ........................................................................................... 1-32
1.4.10 Countermeasures to Fading................................................................... 1-33
1.4.11 Base Band Signal Interface for STM-1 System...................................... 1-34
1.4.11.1 Base Band for Optical STM-1 Interface ................................................. 1-34
1.4.11.2 Base Band for Electrical STM-1 Interface .............................................. 1-36
1.4.11.3 Jitter ....................................................................................................... 1-36
1.4.11.4 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) ................................................................. 1-36
1.4.12 Gigabit Ethernet Interface ...................................................................... 1-38
1.4.12.1 GE BSW Overview for 1xSTM-1 transmission ....................................... 1-38
1.4.12.2 GE ML Master Overview for NxSTM-1 Transmission (Multi-Link).......... 1-38
1.4.12.3 SFP Module technical data .................................................................... 1-39
1.4.13 Auxiliary Signal Interface........................................................................ 1-40
1.4.13.1 Way Side (WS)....................................................................................... 1-40
1.4.13.2 Engineering Order Wire (EOW) ............................................................. 1-40
1.4.13.3 User Channel (UC)................................................................................. 1-41
1.4.13.4 Radio User Channel (RUC).................................................................... 1-41
1.4.13.5 Rack Alarm Bus (RAB) and Housekeeping (HK) ................................... 1-42
1.4.13.6 HK & 120/75 Impedance Converter (HK CONV).................................... 1-43
1.5 Mechanical Specification........................................................................ 1-44
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 i
Table of Contents UMN
1.5.1 SRT 1F K-shelf....................................................................................... 1-44

1.5.1.1 General .................................................................................................. 1-44
1.5.1.2 K-shelf Rack Construction...................................................................... 1-52
1.5.2 Mixed application with SRT 1F K-shelf and Multi-shelf .......................... 1-53
1.5.3 SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. system ....................................................................... 1-55
1.5.3.1 General .................................................................................................. 1-55
1.5.3.2 1+1 N.E. Rack Construction................................................................... 1-60
1.5.4 Shelf Layout ........................................................................................... 1-61
1.5.4.1 K-shelf .................................................................................................... 1-61
1.5.4.2 1+1 N.E. shelf ........................................................................................ 1-67
1.5.5 Unit Construction.................................................................................... 1-68
1.5.6 Weight .................................................................................................... 1-70
1.6 Environmental and EMC Specification................................................... 1-72
1.6.1 Environmental Conditions ...................................................................... 1-72
1.6.1.1 Operating Conditions ............................................................................. 1-72
1.6.1.2 Transport and Storage ........................................................................... 1-73
1.6.1.3 Corrosion and External Agents .............................................................. 1-73
1.6.1.4 Waste ..................................................................................................... 1-73
1.6.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility Conditions.............................................. 1-74
1.6.2.1 Emission................................................................................................. 1-74
1.6.2.2 Immunity................................................................................................. 1-75
1.6.2.3 Safety ..................................................................................................... 1-76
1.7 Power Supply ......................................................................................... 1-77
1.7.1 General .................................................................................................. 1-77
1.7.2 Power Supply Distribution ...................................................................... 1-77
1.7.3 Secondary Voltages ............................................................................... 1-78
1.7.4 Power Supply Efficiency......................................................................... 1-78
1.8 POWER CONSUMPTION...................................................................... 1-80
1.8.1 Transceiver Unit ..................................................................................... 1-80
1.8.2 Base Band Units .................................................................................... 1-81
1.9 Frequency Plan ...................................................................................... 1-82
1.9.1 General Information ............................................................................... 1-82
1.9.2 Frequency Plan ...................................................................................... 1-82
1.9.2.1 Upper 4 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.382-8) .............................................. 1-82
1.9.2.2 4 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.635-6 Annex 1) ........................................... 1-83
1.9.2.3 5 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.1099-4 Annex 1) ......................................... 1-83
1.9.2.4 Lower 6 GHz (ITU-R Rec. F.383-8) ....................................................... 1-83
SRT 1F
1.9.2.5 Upper 6 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.384-10) ............................................ 1-84

1.9.2.6 Upper 6 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.384-10) (Interleaved) ....................... 1-84
1.9.2.7 Lower 7 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.385-9, 2-6-10-14-18 set).................. 1-84
1.9.2.8 Lower 7 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.385-9, 3-7-11-15-19 set).................. 1-85
1.9.2.9 Upper 7 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 Annex 1) ................................ 1-85
1.9.2.10 Upper 7 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.385-9, 3-7-11-15-19 set).................. 1-85
1.9.2.11 7 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 Annex 3) ........................................... 1-86
1.9.2.12 Lower 8 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.386-8 Annex 6) ................................ 1-86
1.9.2.13 8 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.386-8 Annex 3, OIRT) ................................ 1-86
1.9.2.14 11 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.387-10) ..................................................... 1-87
1.9.2.15 11 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.387-10 Annex 2) ....................................... 1-87
1.9.2.16 13 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.497-7) ....................................................... 1-87
1.10 Antenna System................................................................................... 1-106
1.11 RF Branching Network ......................................................................... 1-107
1.11.1 Loss Equalized RF Branching Network................................................ 1-122
1.11.2 Channel Filter Insertion loss................................................................. 1-124
1.11.3 Branching losses.................................................................................. 1-125
1.11.3.1 Branching losses in K-shelf configuration ............................................ 1-125
1.11.3.2 Branching losses in 1+1 Not Expansible.............................................. 1-126
2 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION..................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 System ..................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Alternated and Co-channel Operation...................................................... 2-3
2.3 Baseband Interface .................................................................................. 2-3
2.3.1 K-shelf ...................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3.2 1+1 N.E. model ........................................................................................ 2-9
2.4 STM-1 Signal Transmission ................................................................... 2-12
2.4.1 STM-1 Signal Interface .......................................................................... 2-12
2.4.2 Gigabit Ethernet Signal Interface ........................................................... 2-12
2.4.3 Main Signal Flow (MSTU Function) ....................................................... 2-13
2.4.4 RX Space Diversity ................................................................................ 2-15
2.4.5 TX+RX Space Diversity.......................................................................... 2-17
2.4.6 MSTU Front Panel ................................................................................. 2-18
2.4.6.1 Top View of MSTU Adapter ................................................................... 2-20
2.4.7 Co-Channel Operation ........................................................................... 2-21
2.4.7.1 Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC).................................. 2-21
2.4.7.2 Receive Local Carrier Oscillator............................................................. 2-21
2.4.7.3 Route ID ................................................................................................. 2-21
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 iii
2.4.7.4 Master/Slave setting............................................................................... 2-21

2.5 Auxiliary Service Channels .................................................................... 2-23
2.5.1 Engineering Orderwire (EOW) ............................................................... 2-23
2.5.1.1 Numbering and dialling .......................................................................... 2-25
2.5.1.2 Orderwire Extension............................................................................... 2-25
2.5.1.3 Digital-Through....................................................................................... 2-25
2.5.1.4 Ring Protection....................................................................................... 2-26
2.5.2 Wayside Traffic (WS) ............................................................................. 2-28
2.5.3 User Channel (UC)................................................................................. 2-29
2.5.4 Radio User Channel (RUC).................................................................... 2-29
2.5.5 Housekeeping (HK)................................................................................ 2-30
2.5.6 Digital Communication Channel (DCC).................................................. 2-30
2.6 OverHead Bit Access for SRT 1F System ............................................. 2-31
2.6.1 MSOH and RSOH .................................................................................. 2-33
2.6.2 RFCOH .................................................................................................. 2-35
2.6.3 Radio Frame Structure........................................................................... 2-36
2.7 Radio Protection Switch System ............................................................ 2-41
2.7.1 Outline of Radio Protection Switching.................................................... 2-41
2.7.2 USW and BSW....................................................................................... 2-43
2.7.3 Switching Priority.................................................................................... 2-45
2.7.4 USW Switching Initiator and Operation Time......................................... 2-46
2.7.5 Occasional Traffic (option) ..................................................................... 2-48
2.8 GE Multi-Link Protection Switching Operation ....................................... 2-49
2.9 Line Protection in BSW STM-1 Optical 1+1 DTI .................................... 2-51
2.9.1 Overview of 1+1 SFP Module Switching ................................................ 2-51
2.9.2 1+1 SFP Module Switching Criteria ....................................................... 2-51
2.9.3 1+1 SFP Module Switching Mode .......................................................... 2-51
2.9.4 1+1 SFP Module Switching Time ........................................................... 2-51
2.10 Line Protection in GE ML 1+1 DTI ......................................................... 2-52
2.11 Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit (SCSU) ...................................... 2-53
2.11.1 Bipolar Switch for STM-1 electrical interface (BSW Electrical) .............. 2-56
2.11.2 Bipolar Switch for STM-1 Optical Interface (BSW OPT) ........................ 2-56
2.11.3 Bipolar Switch for STM-1 Optical Interface (BSW OPT DTI).................. 2-58
2.11.4 Bipolar Switch for Gigabit Ethernet Interface (BSW GE) ....................... 2-61
2.11.5 Giga Ethernet Multi-Link Interface, Master and Slave cards (GE MLM and GE
MLS)....................................................................................................... 2-63
2.11.6 Gigabit Ethernet Multi-Link Adaptors (GE ML ADPT and OCC GE ML ADPT)
............................................................................................................... 2-65
SRT 1F
iv 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.11.7 Occasional Traffic Interface (OCC INTF) ............................................... 2-65

2.11.8 Occasional Traffic Interface (OCC OPT)................................................ 2-65
2.11.9 Occasional Traffic Interface (OCC OPT DTI)......................................... 2-65
2.11.10 Occasional Traffic Interface (OCC GE).................................................. 2-65
2.11.11 Baseband Switch Interface (BSW INTF)................................................ 2-66
2.11.12 Supervisory (SV) .................................................................................... 2-66
2.11.13 Housekeeping (HK) (optional card)........................................................ 2-70
2.11.14 HK & 120/75 Impedance Converter (HK CONV) (optional card)............ 2-72
2.11.15 Embedded Communication Unit for SNMP/IP (ECU SNMP) (optional card)2-75
2.11.16 OWBR Unit (Optional card).................................................................... 2-76
2.11.16.1 Example of use of OWBR card .............................................................. 2-78
2.11.16.2 Electrical Specifications ......................................................................... 2-80
2.11.16.3 Card Layout and HW switches............................................................... 2-81
2.11.16.4 Alarms and LEDs .................................................................................. 2-82
2.11.17 Timing Control Unit (TCU) for MST mode (optional card) ...................... 2-83
2.11.17.1 Synchronization Mode............................................................................ 2-84
2.11.17.2 Clock Mode ............................................................................................ 2-85
2.11.17.3 Quality Level (S1 byte)........................................................................... 2-86
2.11.17.4 Line Clock Priority .................................................................................. 2-86
2.11.18 RST sub-module for enhanced RST mode (optional module to be installed on the
SV unit) .................................................................................................. 2-87
2.11.18.1 Applicability ............................................................................................ 2-87
2.11.18.2 Functional Description of RST mode type 2........................................... 2-87
2.11.18.3 Block Diagram........................................................................................ 2-88
2.11.18.4 Card Layout............................................................................................ 2-89
2.11.19 Rack Alarm Bus Sub-module (RAB, optional modules to be installed on the SV
unit) ........................................................................................................ 2-92
2.11.20 RUC Sub-modules for RFCOH User Channel (RUC VF, RUC G.703, RUC V.11,
optional modules to be installed on the SV unit) .................................... 2-93
3 INSTALLATION ......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Preparations for Installation ..................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1.1 Storage, Unpacking and Inspection ......................................................... 3-2
3.1.1.2 Storage..................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1.3 Preparation............................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.1.4 Unpacking and Inspection........................................................................ 3-3
3.1.1.5 General Unpacking Method ..................................................................... 3-3
3.1.2 Storage of Spare Units............................................................................. 3-4
3.1.3 Accessories.............................................................................................. 3-4
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 v
3.2 Optical Fiber Cables and Jumpers........................................................... 3-5

3.2.1 Warning and General Handling................................................................ 3-5
3.2.1.1 Tools Required......................................................................................... 3-5
3.2.1.2 Warning Messages .................................................................................. 3-5
3.2.1.3 Storage..................................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.1.4 Handling ................................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.2 Connection and Disconnection of Optical Cables .................................... 3-8
3.2.2.1 Tools Required......................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.2.2 Preparation............................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.2.3 Connection Procedure ............................................................................. 3-8
3.2.2.4 Disconnection Procedure ......................................................................... 3-8
3.2.3 Cleaning of Optical Cables and Connectors ............................................ 3-8
3.2.3.1 Tools Required......................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.3.2 Procedure................................................................................................. 3-9
3.2.4 Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors ........................................ 3-10
3.2.4.1 Connector End-face Definitions ............................................................. 3-10
3.2.4.2 End-face Zone Definitions...................................................................... 3-10
3.2.4.3 Defect Definitions ................................................................................... 3-10
3.2.4.4 Scratch and Pit Defects.......................................................................... 3-11
3.2.4.5 Chip Defects........................................................................................... 3-11
3.2.4.6 Crack Defects......................................................................................... 3-12
3.2.4.7 Tools Required....................................................................................... 3-13
3.2.4.8 Procedure............................................................................................... 3-13
3.3 Rack Installation..................................................................................... 3-14
3.3.1 Precautions ............................................................................................ 3-14
3.3.1.1 Suitable Places for Equipment Installation............................................. 3-14
3.3.2 Safety Measures for Equipment Handling.............................................. 3-14
3.3.3 Tools Required....................................................................................... 3-15
3.3.4 Preparation............................................................................................. 3-15
3.3.4.1 Rack Mounting ....................................................................................... 3-15
3.3.4.2 Rack Securing........................................................................................ 3-15
3.3.5 Rack Configuration................................................................................. 3-18
3.4 SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible) installation ...................................... 3-19
3.4.1 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible) rack layout ................................................... 3-19
3.4.2 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible) equipment installation.................................. 3-20
3.4.2.1 RF Port Arrangement ............................................................................. 3-20
3.4.2.2 Shelf Dimensions ................................................................................... 3-21
SRT 1F
vi 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
3.4.2.3 Antenna Port Position ............................................................................ 3-22

3.4.2.4 Rack Mount Material .............................................................................. 3-23
3.4.2.5 Assembly of SRT1F 1+1 N.E. shelf in the rack ...................................... 3-24
3.4.2.6 Connection of Primary Power Lead ....................................................... 3-27
3.4.2.7 Baseband Signal Cable Connection ...................................................... 3-28
3.4.2.8 Interconnection for Co-Channel operation ............................................. 3-30
3.4.2.9 Connectors and Connector Pin Assignment .......................................... 3-31
3.5 SRT 1F K-shelf Installation .................................................................... 3-37
3.5.1 K-shelf rack layout.................................................................................. 3-37
3.5.2 SRT 1F K-shelf equipment installation................................................... 3-38
3.5.2.1 Shelf layout ............................................................................................ 3-38
3.5.2.2 How to Install Shelves & Units ............................................................... 3-39
3.5.2.3 Shelf Connections .................................................................................. 3-76
3.5.3 Connector, Pin Assignment and Cable Connection ............................. 3-107
3.5.3.1 K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC ...................................................................... 3-107
3.5.3.2 K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST ...................................................................... 3-121
3.5.3.3 Expansion K-shelf ST........................................................................... 3-135
3.5.3.4 K-shelf 2x(3+1) DT ............................................................................... 3-141
3.5.3.5 Expansion K-shelf DT .......................................................................... 3-152
3.5.3.6 Inter-shelf connection between K-shelf and Expansion K-shelf ........... 3-158
3.5.3.7 Inter-connection cables between MSTUs for CCDP operation ............ 3-164
3.6 Wiring and Assembly for Connectors................................................... 3-168
3.6.1 Wiring and Assembly for Multi-pin Connectors .................................... 3-168
3.6.1.1 Assembly for the D-sub Connector (15-pin)......................................... 3-168
3.6.2 Wiring and Assembly for Coaxial Connectors...................................... 3-174
3.6.2.1 Assembly for the 1.0/2.3 type Coaxial Connector ................................ 3-174
3.7 Coaxial Cable Installation for EMC Requirement................................. 3-176
3.7.1 Coaxial Cable Wiring Installation ......................................................... 3-176
3.7.2 EMC-control Measure at the Coaxial Cable Inlet ................................. 3-178
3.7.3 Wiring Work of Coaxial Cables ............................................................ 3-179
3.7.4 Precaution for Wiring Work of Coaxial Cables ..................................... 3-181
3.7.5 Metal Plate Installation for EMC Requirement ..................................... 3-182
4 ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP ................................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Acceptance of the SRT 1F Rack.............................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 Perform Overall Visual Inspection............................................................ 4-2
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 vii
4.1.2 Check Incoming Power Supply at SRT 1F Rack...................................... 4-3

4.1.3 Test Equipment Required ........................................................................ 4-3
4.1.3.1 Procedure for shelves using AMP PS connector ..................................... 4-3
4.1.3.2 Procedure for shelves NOT using AMP PS connector............................. 4-4
4.2 Installation of the Slide-in Units................................................................ 4-5
4.2.1 Warning Messages .................................................................................. 4-5
4.2.1.1 Laser Warning.......................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.1.2 Electrostatic Discharge Warning .............................................................. 4-6
4.2.2 Slide-In Installation Procedures ............................................................... 4-7
4.2.3 Insertion and Removal of Slide-in Units ................................................... 4-7
4.2.3.1 Inserting a Slide-In Unit............................................................................ 4-8
4.2.3.2 Removing a Slide-In Unit ......................................................................... 4-9
4.2.3.3 Removing an Optical Unit ...................................................................... 4-10
4.3 Card Settings ......................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.1 MSTU Setting......................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.1.1 MSTU Front Panel ................................................................................. 4-12
4.3.1.2 DADE Setting for SD.............................................................................. 4-15
4.3.2 SV SNMP/IP unit Setting........................................................................ 4-19
4.3.3 TCU Unit Setting .................................................................................... 4-21
4.3.4 BSW STM-1 Electrical Unit Setting ........................................................ 4-22
4.3.5 OCC INTF STM-1 Elecrical Unit Setting ................................................ 4-23
4.3.6 STM-1 BSW Optical / OCC Optical Setting............................................ 4-24
4.3.6.1 Hardware Setting BSW STM-1 Optical .................................................. 4-24
4.3.6.2 Hardware Setting OCC STM-1 Optical .................................................. 4-25
4.3.6.3 Switches Settings................................................................................... 4-26
4.3.7 OPT BSW DTI / OPT OCC DTI Setting.................................................. 4-27
4.3.7.1 Hardware Setting ................................................................................... 4-27
4.3.7.2 Switches Settings................................................................................... 4-28
4.3.8 GE BSW / GE OCC Setting ................................................................... 4-30
4.3.8.1 Hardware Setting ................................................................................... 4-30
4.3.9 GE MLS Setting ..................................................................................... 4-31
5 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE ............................................................................... 5-1
5.1 LED Indications on SV and other units (except HK) ................................ 5-1
5.2 Web LCT for SNMP/IP SV ....................................................................... 5-5
5.2.1 System ..................................................................................................... 5-5
5.3 Radio Protection Switch for SV SNMP/IP ................................................ 5-7
5.3.1 Automatic Switching and Status Indications ............................................ 5-9
SRT 1F
viii 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
5.3.2 Manual Controls ....................................................................................... 5-9

5.3.3 SW PM Data .......................................................................................... 5-10
5.3.4 Notice for RPS Operations..................................................................... 5-10
5.3.4.1 Power off of SCSU ................................................................................. 5-10
5.3.4.2 Lockout................................................................................................... 5-10
5.3.4.3 Power off for MSTU................................................................................ 5-11
5.4 Other Functions of SV SNMP/IP ............................................................ 5-12
5.4.1 Loop Back .............................................................................................. 5-12
5.4.2 TCU unit Protection (MST mode only) ................................................... 5-13
5.4.3 Synch Switch (MST mode only) ............................................................. 5-13
5.5 Unit Replacement................................................................................... 5-14
5.5.1 Fan Replacement................................................................................... 5-16
5.5.2 MSTU and Other Units........................................................................... 5-18
5.5.3 SV SNMP/IP unit Replacement.............................................................. 5-19
5.5.4 Returning Replaced Unit ........................................................................ 5-22
A APPENDIX .................................................................................................................... 1
A.1 Abbreviation of Terms ................................................................................. 1
A.2 Unit part numbers...................................................................................... 12
A.3 Installation material part numbers ............................................................. 18
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 ix
UMN 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction to the SRT 1F Radio Equipment

The SRT 1F series radio equipment is a high capacity (155 Mb/s STM-1)
system designed for trunk line transmission applications.
The SRT 1F series operates in the 4/5/U6/11 GHz radio frequency bands
with 40 MHz frequency spacing, and in the U4/L6/7/L8/13 GHz radio
frequency bands with 28.00, 29.00 and 29.65 MHz frequency spacing.
The equipment is fully solid state and is designed to meet ITU-T and ITU-
R Recommendations for long haul and high capacity digital microwave
radio systems. The modulation scheme used is 64/128 QAM Multi-Level
Coded Modulation (MLCM) with forward error correction.
The SRT 1F can be used in various types of SDH networks such as ring,
media diversity or linear configurations, and over various communication
routes, i.e., waterways, mountains, inter or intra-city routes.
The SRT 1F is conceived to work in ACAP (Adjacent Channel Alternate
Pattern), ACCP (Adjacent Channel Co-Polar) and CCDP (Co-Channel
Double Polarization, with XPIC) operational modes.
The system accepts one synchronous 155 Mb/s (STM-1) signal per RF
frequency for alternated operation, or two synchronous 155 Mb/s (STM-1)
signals per RF frequency for co-channel operation.
The SRT1F radio equipment is available in 2 versions:
SRT 1F K-shelf configuration, up to 16 transceiver units can be
housed in one rack
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E., compact solution for max 1+1/2+0 configuration
1+1 N.E. solution is required in the following case:
no more than 500 mm rack occupancy and no request of future
expansion to more than 2 TRs per terminal.
Several auxiliary functions are provided, such as 2 Mb/s wayside
channels, 64 kbps digital service channels and EOW channels, carried by
RFCOH and SOH, all protected by the N+1 Radio Protection System
(RPS).
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-1
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION UMN
1.2 Equipment Features

The main features of the SRT 1F radio equipment are:
Completely solid-state
Fully SDH (Synchronous Digital Hierarchy) compatible digital radio.
Section overhead (SOH) bits insertion/extraction at both terminal and
repeater stations, in compliance with SDH optical fibre transmission
systems.
Interoperable with third party vendor SDH transmission equipment.
(Further study might be necessary for undefined overhead bytes,
etc.).
MCF/Controller card with SNMP/IP.
Synchronization:
MST Mode available via optional Timing Control Unit.
RST Mode 1 (no optional units is needed)
RST Mode 2 (enhanced): available with the RS sub-module to be
installed on the Controller unit
SDH STM-1 electrical interface is standard configuration. STM-1
optical interface with/without double tributary interface (DTI) and/or
Gigabit Ethernet (GE) interface is available as an option.
Unit mixture of STM-1 electrical, STM-1 optical with/without DTI and
GE electrical/optical interface is available in the same rack.
Two (2) types of Gigabit Ethernet (GE) interface available (1)
Baseband Switch for GE interface (1+0 SFP) using 1xSTM-1 mapping
(2) Multi-link operation for GE interface (1+1 SFP) using NxSTM-1
mapping
Super high density packaging:
Up to sixteen (16) complete SDH radio system including Synchronous
Equipment Management Function (SEMF) are mounted in one ETSI
rack (2200600300 mm) for 2x(7+1) single-rack operation.
Double Terminal 2x(7+1) East/West configuration in one ETSI rack
available.
High power amplifier using GaAs Field Effect Transistor (GaAs FET)
with +29 dBm (NP, Normal Power version) and +32 dBm (HP, High
Power version) output power (+29 dBm for 11 GHz band and +27
dBm for 13 GHz band, no HP transceivers are available at 11 and
13GHz).
Low power consumption of the RF High Power Amplifier using IF pre-
distortion linearity compensation.
Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) is available as standard
configuration.
Low noise amplifier using High Electron Mobility Transistor (HEMT)
with a noise figure of 1.5 dB (typical) for 4-8 GHz band.
SRT 1F
1-2 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
High spectral efficiency of 8.5 bits/sec/Hz using 64 QAM Multi-Level

Coded Modulation (64 QAM MLCM) and 11.4 bits/sec/Hz using 128
QAM Multi-Level Coded Modulation (128 QAM MLCM) for co-channel
operation.
High efficiency error correction using Multi-Level Coded Modulation
(MLCM).
Space diversity reception is available as a standard function (enabled
by software setting). In-Phase (IP) combiner is implemented, working
at IF level.
Transmit space diversity is also available as standard function (via
proper branching composition) for very severe propagation conditions.
Adaptive Time Domain Equalizer (ATDE) with 11-taps fully digital
linear TransVersal Equalizer (TVE) and 10-taps Decision Feedback
Equalizer (DFE).
Adaptive Frequency Domain Equalizer (AFDE) with Slope Equalizer
working at IF.
Errorless hitless protection switching with early warning detection.
2x 2 Mb/s wayside traffic channels using SOH and RFCOH are
available per each STM-1 as a standard feature.
1x 64 kb/s user channel using F1 SOH byte is available per each
STM-1 as a standard feature.
2x 64 kb/s EOW Voice Channels using E1 and E2 SOH bytes are
available as a standard feature for omnibus and express respectively.
Radio user channel (RUC) of maximum 2 channels using RFCOH.
Interfaces are available for VF, 64 kbit/s and V11 64 kbit/s signals.
64 kb/s signal interface is in accordance with ITU-T recommendation
G.703 co-directional or contra-directional interface and V.11 64 kbit/s
signal interface is in accordance with ITU-T recommendation V.11
contra-directional interface.
Up to 8 DI (Digital Inputs) and 4 DO (Digital Outputs) can be managed
by the system as housekeeping alarms/telecontrols as a standard
feature. Housekeeping facility may be increased by adding up to two
Housekeeping optional units. Each Housekeeping unit increases the
housekeeping facility by 32 DI and 16 DO more (maximum 72 DI and
36 DO per terminal).
Event management facility:
Alarms and status of the equipment is reported by the SEMF
(Synchronous Equipment Management Function) using the Data
Communication Channel (DCC)
Performance management facility:
Traffic performance of each hop and of each end-to-end can be
monitored on each RF channel.
Monitoring items are BBE (Background Block Error), BBER
(Background Block Error Ratio), ES (Errored Seconds), ESR (Errored
Second Ratio), SES (Severely Error Seconds), SESR (Severely Error
Second Ratio), UAS (UnAvailable Seconds) and OFS (Out of Frame
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-3
Second), number of pointer change and number of MSP and RPS

switching.
Configuration management facility:
NE configuration is retrieved by the network management terminal
and items such as NE ID, and alarm thresholds can be set as
provisioning.
Resource management facility:
Physical inventory such as unit name can be read by the SEMF.
Security management:
Several maintenance levels are provided to avoid malfunction.
Software download (SWDL) facility:
Firmware used for SRT 1F operation can be remotely downloaded
from the network management terminal.
Local Craft Terminal available for network element (NE) management
facilities via Windows-based GUI (Graphical User Interface).
Full integration inside Nokia Siemens Networks NetViewer EMS.
SNMP Agent and HTTP web server embedded in SNMP/IP
MCF/Controller for integration inside third party vendor EMS.
Compatible with European Unions Directives RoHS and WEEE.
SDH MUX SDH MUX SDH Radio SDH Radio SDH MUX
LTE ADM 1+N 1+N LTE
MS Mode MS Mode
Tributary Tributary Tributary
MS MS MS MS
Note: MS : Multiplex Section LTE : Line Terminal Equipment

RS : Regenerator Section ADM : Add Drop Multiplexer
Network feature: Multiplex Section Protection (MSP) with Section Adaption (SA).
Figure 1-1 - Linear Configuration
SRT 1F
1-4 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
SDH MUX SDH MUX SDH MUX

LTE ADM LTE
SDH Radio SDH Radio
1+N or 0+N 1+N or 0+N
Tributary Tributary RS Mode RS Mode Tributary
MS RS RS RS
Network feature: Network protection switching with media diversity
Figure 1-2 - Media Diversity Configuration
MS MS
Tributary
SDH MUX
ADM
SDH MUX SDH MUX

ADM ADM
Tributary Tributary
SDH Radio SDH Radio
1+N or 0+N 1+N or 0+N
RS/MS Mode RS/MS Mode
RS or MS RS or MS RS or MS
Network feature: Network protection switching with ring operation
Figure 1-3 - Standard Ring Configuration
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-5
1.3 Equipment Details
1.3.1 Ordering Guide
Assembling an SRT 1F terminal means to select the proper equipment

from the ordering guide. Please contact Nokia Siemens Networks Sales
and Marketing dept. for the current ordering guide.
The available configurations can be grouped into 7 classes. The following
diagram shows such classification. The drawings in next pages show
ordering guide for each class. All the configurations are available at all
bands, with or without Space Diversity, with HP (High Power) or NP
(Normal Power) transceivers (where applicable).
The configurations N+0 and 2x(N+0) can be considered as particular
cases of the N+1 and 2x(N+1) reported below.
Table 1.1 - Classification of available configurations for SRT 1F

Version Interface
STM-1 Optical
STM-1 Optical
GigaEth El. /
GigaEth El. /
Opt. (DTI)
Opt (STI)
Electrical
1+1 N.E.
Ref. Configuration Description
K-shelf
STM-1
(DTI)
(STI)
(STI)
Figure 1-4
56 N+1 Terminal (N < 8) x x x x x x
Figure 1-5
56 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 4) on one rack x x x x x x
Figure 1-6
56 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (3 < N < 8) on one x x x x x x
rack
Figure 1-7
56 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 8) on two racks x x x x x x
Figure 1-9
56 2x(N+1) Double Terminal (N < 4) on one rack x x x x x x
Figure 1-10 2x(N+1) Double Terminal (3 < N < 8) on one x x x x x x
rack
Figure 1-11
56 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible) x x x
SRT 1F
1-6 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
All K-shelf configurations with space diversity are available with just RX
space diversity, or with TX+RX space diversity. In case of RX SD, the SD
circulator is a simple RF adaptor (ADPT). In case of TX+RX SD, the SD
circulator is a 3-poles RF low-loss duplexer (DUP), same as TX/RX
circulator. The following table clarifies the use of ADPT and DUP
depending on branching configurations:
Branching configuration No. of DUP No. of ADPT

Single polarization without SD 1 0
Single polarization with RX SD 1 1
Single polarization with RX+TX SD 2 0
Double polarization without SD 2 0
Double polarization with RX SD 2 2
Double polarization with RX+TX SD 4 0
Note that for each direction of the Double Terminal on one rack, Space
Diversity configuration is not applicable if dual polarization is requested,
due to limitations on maximum number of waveguides run applicable per
each rack, which is limited to four (4).
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-7
Figure 1-4 shows the configuration of SRT 1F (N+1) terminal equipment.

56
SRT 1F radio
: ETSI Rack and shelfing x 1
N+1 Terminal
Available with K-shelf up to 7+1
(N < 8)
: RF Branching Network Unit Block :

BRU
RF Branching Network Circuit: 1 set (RF channel allocation dependent)
TX/RX circulator: x 2 max (depends on single or double polarization)
SD circulator: x 2 max (depends on with/without space diversity)
MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit Block :

Main Signal Transmission Unit: x (N+1), N < 8
SCSU : BaseBand Interface, Supervisory/Control & Switching Unit Block :
SV : MCF/controller
Supervisory UnitUnit
x 1for single RPS: x 1 (SNMP/IP)
BSW : BaseBand Switch Unit: x N, N < 8 (STM-1 Electrical or

Optical/Giga Eth. Electrical or Optical)
TCU : Timing Control Unit: x 1 ( + 1 max as option)
HK : Housekeeping Unit (option): x 2 max
OWBR : Order Wire Branching (option): x 2 max
OCC : Occasional Traffic Interface Unit (option): x 1 max (STM-1

Electrical or Optical/Giga Eth. Electrical or Optical)
VF : VF module for RUC on SV unit (option): x 2 max
RUC
G.703 : G.703 64 kb/s module for RUC on SV unit (option): x 2 max
RUC
V.11 : V.11 64 kb/s module for RUC on SV unit (option): x 2 max
RAB : sub-module for RAB on SV unit (option): x 1 max
RST : sub-module for RST enhanced synchronization mode (option):

x 1 max
TCU is optional.
Sum of VF and RUC modules shall be max 2 per SV card.
Figure 1-4 - SRT 1F N+1 (N < 8) Terminal Radio Equipment
SRT 1F
1-8 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 1-5 shows the configuration of SRT 1F 2(N+1) Single Terminal

56
on one rack equipment (N < 4).
SRT 1F radio
2x(N+1) Single Terminal
Available with K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST
on one rack (N < 4)

BRU RF Branching Network Circuit: 1 set (RF channel allocation dependent)
TX/RX circulator: x 2

Main Signal Transmission Unit: x 2*(N+1), N < 4
SV :: Supervisory UnitUnit
MCF/controller x 1for double RPS: x 1 (SNMP/IP)
BSW : BaseBand Switch Unit: x 2*N, N < 4 (STM-1 Electrical or

BSW INTF : BaseBand Switch Interface Unit: x 1
ECU : Embedded Communication Unit (option): x 1 max


RUC
RUC

x 1 max
TCU is optional.
Figure 1-5 - SRT 1F 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 4) on one rack Radio Equipment
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-9

56
on one rack equipment (3 < N < 8).
SRT 1F radio
Available with K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST and Expansion K-shelf ST
on one rack (3 < N < 8)

BRU RF Branching Network Circuit: 1 set (RF channel allocation dependent)

SV Supervisory UnitUnit
:: MCF/controller x 1for double RPS: x 1 (SNMP/IP)


RUC
RUC

x 1 max
TCU is optional.
Figure 1-6 - SRT 1F 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (3 < N < 8) on one rack Radio Equipment
SRT 1F
1-10 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010

56
on two racks equipment (N < 8).
SRT 1F radio
Available with K-shelf up to 7+1
on two racks (N < 8)

BRU

MCF/controller x 1for double RPS: x 1 (SNMP/IP)


RUC
RUC

x 1 max
TCU is optional.
Figure 1-7 - SRT 1F 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 8) on two racks Radio Equipment
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-11
Figure 1-8 shows typical 2(N+1) Double Terminal applications for

56
repeater configuration. A single rack is used for both East side and West
side circuits for floor space saving. The system can be assumed as an
integrated couple of network element NE-A and NE-B installed together in
the same rack. Of course, just one of the two parts between NE-A and
NE-B can be equipped, the other part remaining unequipped for future
adjacent hop expansion.
The following applications are also possible with 2x(N+1) DoubleTerminal
system:
2x(N+1) E/W cross-band repeater (different band in each
direction).
2x(N+1) dual-band operation (different bands, same direction).
(2+1) (2+1)
NE-A NE-B
W1
W2
W1
W2
W1
W2
W1
W2
P
P
P
Double Terminal
Back to Back Repeater
(3+1) (1+1)
NE-A NE-B
W1
W1
W2
W3
W1
W2
W3
W1
P
P
Double Terminal
East West
ADM
Figure 1-8 - Examples of Back to Back and Add/Drop (Repeater) applications
SRT 1F
1-12 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 1-9 shows the configuration of SRT 1F 2x(N+1) Double Terminal

56
on one rack equipment for repeater use (N < 4) with K-shelf.
SRT 1F radio
2x(N+1) Double Terminal
with K-shelf 2x(3+1) DT
on one rack (N < 4)

BRU

MCF/controller x 1for single RPS: x 2 (SNMP/IP)

TCU : Timing Control Unit: x 2 max

RUC
RUC

x 2 max
Figure 1-9 - SRT 1F 2x(N+1) Double Terminal (N < 4) on one rack Radio Equipment with K-
shelf version
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-13
Figure 1-10 shows the configuration of SRT 1F 2x(N+1) Double Terminal

on one rack equipment for repeater use (3 < N < 8) with K-shelf.
SRT 1F radio
2x(N+1) Double Terminal
with K-shelf 2x(3+1) DT and Expansion K-shelf DT
on one rack (3 < N < 8)
BRU : RF Branching Network Unit Block :


BSW : BaseBand Switch Unit: x 2*N, N < 8 (STM-1


RUC
RUC

x 2 max
Figure 1-10 - SRT 1F 2x(N+1) Double Terminal (3 < N < 8) on one rack Radio Equipment with
K-shelf version
SRT 1F
1-14 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 1-11 shows the configuration of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible)
56
terminal radio equipment working in 1+1 ACAP or ACCP protected. Also

1+1 CCDP operation is possible. Of course also 2+0 configuration is
allowed, by simply equipping Occasional Traffic card and disabling the
RPS. Further, the SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. can be partially equipped with just
one transceiver to build a 1+0 terminal expansible to 1+1.
SRT 1F radio
: ETSI rack is optional item for 1+1 N.E.
1+1 N.E.
Terminal
Shelf : 1+1 N.E. shelf: x 1
BRU : RF Branching Network Circuit: 1 set (RF channel allocation dependent)
MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit: x 2
BSW : BaseBand Switch Unit: x 1 (Electrical)
OPT CONV : Opt/El. Converter for Optical Interface (option): x 1 max
OCC : Occasional Traffic Interface Unit (option): x 1 max (El. or Opt.)
DIG : 64 kb/s module for RUC on SV unit (option): x 2 max
MOUNT KIT : Installation Kit for stand-alone, wall or rack mounting (option): x 1 max
TCU is optional.
Sum of VF and DIG modules shall be max 2 per SV card.
Figure 1-11 - SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Terminal Radio Equipment
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-15
Note : 1+1 N.E. System consists of one shelf only. The following units are
dedicated units of 1+1 N.E. system. All the other units are common to K-
shelf version:
OPT CONV (Optical Interface Converter) is an optional card exclusively

designed for SRT 1F 1+1 NOT-EXPANSIBLE model that translates the
STM-1 signal interface between Electrical interface and Optical interface.
This card is a simple media converter without MSP function.
OPT OCC (Optical Occasional) is an optional card exclusively designed for

SRT 1F 1+1 NOT-EXPANSIBLE model that provides an optical interface
for occasional traffic. This card is a simple media converter without MSP
function.
1.3.2 BRU (Branching Network Unit)
Detail requirements for BRU:

i) Operating frequency band
ii) Assigned RF channel number and frequency
iii) System configuration (1+0, 1+1, 2+1,........., 7+1)
iv) Operation mode: single-feed, alternated or CCDP operation
v) With RX SD, or TX+RX SD, or without SD (Space Diversity).
1.3.3 MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit)
Detail requirements for MSTU:

i) Operating frequency band and RF channel sub-band.
ii) Standard power output or high power output for 4 to L8 GHz band
iii) Operation mode: single-feed, alternated or CCDP operation
Note: SD receiver circuit is equipped as standard and be enabled by
software as provisioning setting.
1.3.4 SCSU (Supervisory, Control and Switching Unit)
Detail requirements for SCSU:

i) RPS system configuration: Number of operating RF channels
ii) Operation mode: single-feed, alternated or CCDP operation
iii) STM-1 electrical or optical interface
iv) Required optional unit name such as HK, ECU, TCU, OCC card
(electrical or optical) and relevant quantity
v) Sub-module of SV unit for RUC (VF or Digital or both or none).
SRT 1F
1-16 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.4 General Specifications
1.4.1 General Information
Table 1.2 - General Specifications

Description
Modulation 64 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi Level Coded
Modulation type FEC (64 QAM MLCM) for 4/5/U6/11 GHz band
128 state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi Level Coded
Modulation type FEC (128 QAM MLCM) for U4/L6/7/L8/13 GHz band
Capacity ACAP and ACCP operation
One (1) STM-1 (155.52 Mbit/s) signal per RF frequency
CCDP operation
Two (2) STM-1 (155.52 Mbit/s) signal per RF frequency
Auxiliary signal
(1) Wayside traffic (2.048 Mb/s)
Two (2) channels per STM-1 by using RFCOH and SOH as standard:
Maximum 2N channels for N+1 operation or
Maximum 2 x 2N channels for 2 x (N+1) operation.
(2) User Channel (SOH, 64 kb/s)
One (1) channel per STM-1 using SOH as standard:
Maximum N channels for N+1 operation or
Maximum 2N channels for 2 x (N+1) operation.
(3) Radio User Channel (RFCOH, 64 kb/s)
Maximum 2 channels per system using RFCOH available as option:
Maximum 2 channels for N+1 operation or
Maximum 2 x 2 channels for 2 x (N+1) operation.
Repeating Method Regenerative (back to back terminal connection)
Overhead Byte Same insertion/extraction method as for SDH fibre optic transmission
Access system for terminal and repeater station
RS Section
A1, A2, C1, B1, E1, F1, D1D3 byte
MS Section
B2, E2, K1, K2, D4D12, M1 and S1 byte.
Hypothetical In accordance with the latest ITU-R recommendation

Reference Digital
Path (HRDP)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-17
1.4.2 Transmitter (TX)
Table 1.3 - Transmitter section

Description
Output power +29 dBm (NP) or +32 dBm (HP) 1 dB for 4-L8GHz band
+29 dBm 1 dB for 11GHz band
+27 dBm 1 dB for 13GHz band
measured at MSTU unit output (point A of Figure 1-12)
56
Linearity Linearizer circuit is employed to maintain optimum linearity

compensation
Local carrier RF band oscillation With PLL
Synthesizer type, frequency pre-settable
Coverage of upper or lower half of the corresponding band
(quarter band for 11 and 13GHz).
Local Frequency Within 10 ppm
stability
Spurious emission For unmodulated carrier measured at duplexer output
< 60 dBm in the frequency range 30.0 MHz to 21.2 GHz
< 30 dBm in the frequency range 21.2 GHz to 40.0 GHz
IF 1st IF: 70 MHz
2nd IF: 844 MHz
IF input Signal level: 10 dBm nominal
(Test In) Variation: 1 dB
Impedance: 75 ohm unbalanced
Return loss: > 20 dB/ 70 MHz 13 MHz for 64 QAM
> 20 dB/ 70 MHz 11 MHz for 128 QAM
RF filter Chebycheff type

3 dB bandwidth: 40 MHz for 64 QAM
30 MHz for 128 QAM
ATPC Automatic transmit power control (ATPC) is standard. Power control
level: 10 dB
Response time: 100 ms
Control initiation: Received signal threshold detection SW settable:
RSL = -45 dBm or -55 dBm or -65 dBm
Transmitted output In accordance with ETSI EN 302 217-2-1 V1.2.1 (2007-06).
spectrum (point B)
64 MLCM, 40 MHz spacing: Figure 1-13
56
128 MLCM, 29/29.65 MHz spacing: Figure 1-14

56
128 MLCM, 28MHz spacing: Figure 1-15

56
SRT 1F
1-18 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Z E A B C D
Modulator Transmitter Transmit Branching
Feeder
RF Filter (*)
Diversity Receiver Path

ED AD BD CD DD
Receiver Branching
Demodulator Receiver Feeder
RF Filter (*)
(**) (**)
Main Receiver Path
Z E A Receiver B Branching C D
Demodulator Receiver Feeder
RF Filter (*)
(*) no filtering included

(**) connection at RF, IF or baseband
Figure 1-12 - Radio Building Blocks (ETSI standard)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-19
Figure 1-13 - Transmitter output spectrum (64 QAM system, 40 MHz spacing)
SRT 1F
1-20 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 1-14 - Transmitter output spectrum (128 QAM system, 29/29.65 MHz spacing)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-21
Figure 1-15 - Transmitter output spectrum (128 QAM system, 28 MHz spacing)
SRT 1F
1-22 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.4.3 Receiver (RX)
Table 1.4 - Receiver section

Description
Noise figure 1.5 dB typical (for 4 ~ 8 GHz band)
2.0 dB guaranteed (for 4 ~ 8 GHz band
2.5 dB typical (for 11 GHz band)
3.0 dB guaranteed (for 11 GHz band)
4.0 dB typical (for 13 GHz band)
4.5 dB guaranteed (for 13 GHz band)
Note: Noise figure is measured at the MSTU unit input (point A) on both the
main and SD receiver, independently, at maximum IF amplifier gain.
Local carrier RF band oscillation with PLL
Synthesizer type, frequency pre-settable
Coverage of upper or lower half of the corresponding band
(quarter band for 11 and 13GHz).
Spurious emission For unmodulated carrier measured at duplexer output
< 60 dBm in the frequency range 30.0 MHz to 21.2 GHz
< 30 dBm in the frequency range 21.2 GHz to 40.0 GHz
Local Frequency stability Within 10 ppm
Image rejection In accordance with ETSI EN 302 217-2-1 V1.2.1 (2007-06), measured at the
MSTU output (point A) when the image and main signal levels are equal, and
with unmodulated carrier.
Normal received power 32 to 55 dBm
AGC dynamic range 17 to 77 dBm measured at MSTU input (point A)
IF 1st IF: 70MHz
2nd IF: 844MHz
IF output (70 MHz) Signal level: 10 dBm nominal, +1 dB/2 dB variation for 17 to 77 dBm
(Test Out) modulated RX input
Impedance : 75 ohm unbalanced
Return loss : > 20 dB/ 70 MHz 13 MHz for 64 QAM
11 MHz for 128 QAM
Measured at the MSTU unit monitoring point.
RF filter Chebycheff type
3 dB bandwidth: 40 MHz for 64 QAM
30 MHz for 128 QAM
IF filter Butterworth type
3 dB bandwidth: 40 MHz
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-23
1.4.4 Modulator (MOD)
Table 1.5 - Modulation

Description
Modulation For 40 MHz Channel spacing:
64-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi-Level Coded
Modulation type FEC (64 QAM MLCM)
For 28/29/29.65 MHz Channel spacing:
128-state Quadrature Amplitude Modulation with Multi-Level Coded
Modulation type FEC (128 QAM MLCM)
Spectrum shaping 35 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 64 QAM MLCM
18% raised cosine roll-off factor for 128 QAM MLCM(7/13GHz)
25% raised cosine roll-off factor for 128QAM MLCM(U4/L6/L8GHz)
Spectrum shaping is root Nyquist distribution.
Local carrier Crystal oscillator (XO)
Local frequency Within 15 ppm
stability
IF 70 MHz
1.4.5 Demodulator (DEM)
Table 1.6 - Demodulation

Description
Demodulation Coherent detection/instantaneous decision
Spectrum shaping 35 % raised cosine roll-off factor for 64 QAM MLCM
18% raised cosine roll-off factor for 128 QAM MLCM(7/13GHz)
25% raised cosine roll-off factor for 128QAM MLCM(U4/L6/L8GHz)
Spectrum shaping is root Nyquist distribution.
IF 70 MHz
Adaptive Time 11-tap linear transversal equalizer (TVE) and
Domain Equalizer 10-tap decision feedback equalizer (DFE)
in baseband
Adaptive Frequency Slope Equalizer
Domain Equalizer
in IF
SRT 1F
1-24 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.4.6 Digital Processing
Table 1.7 - Digital Processing

Description
BSW Electrical CMI to CMI
BSW Optical Optical to Electrical (CMI) conversion
Electrical (CMI) to Optical conversion
MSTU (SDH Frame) CMI to Unipolar conversion
Unipolar to CMI conversion
Frame synchronization to STM-1 frame
Section Adaptation (change the pointer)
Scrambler/descrambler
Addition/drop of section Overhead bit
(1) Framing bit (A1, A2)
(2) Regenerator section parity (B1)
(3) Network management for regenerator section (D1 to D3)
(4) Regenerator section orderwire (E1)
(5) User channel (F1)
(6) Multiplex section parity (B2)
(7) Network management for multiplex section (D4 to D12)
(8) Multiplex section orderwire (E2)
(9) AIS, FERF (K1, K2)
(10) Section trace (J0)
(11) Far End Block Error (M1)
(12) Synchronization status byte (S1)
MSTU (Radio Frame) SDH frame to Radio frame conversion
Radio frame complementary Overhead (RFCOH) insertion and detection
(1) Frame alignment
(2) Redundancy bit for MLCM
(3) Digital service channel
(4) RPS control signal
(5) Route identification
(6) Way side traffic
(7) Transfer bit for 1 bit error
(8) Transfer bit for frequency measurement
(9) ATPC Control signal
Scrambling 2151 patterns
Interleaving At bit level for pointer protection
Route ID 16 addresses pre-settable
FERF = Far End Receive Failure

ATPC = Automatic Transmit Power Control
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-25
1.4.7 System Performances
Table 1.8 - System Performances
Description
Up-fade BER BER = 103 at RSL of 17 dBm measured at point A.
BER = 1010 at RSL of 21 dBm measured at point A.
Down-fade BER In accordance with ETSI EN 302 217-2-2 V1.1.3 (2004-12).
For 64 QAM MLCM:
BER = 103 at RSL of 76.5 dBm typical
Measured at point A.
For 128 QAM MLCM:
Measured at point A.
Note 1 : Space Diversity improves RSL by 2 dB.
Note 2 : RSL is 1.0 dB higher for 11 GHz and 2.5 dB higher for 13
GHz.
Note 3 : Down-fade BER curves at point B are reported as follows.
64QAM 4/5/U6 GHz Typical Figure 1-16
56
64QAM 11 GHz Typical Figure 1-17

56
128QAM U4/L6/7/L8 GHz Typical Figure 1-18

56
128QAM 13 GHz Typical Figure 1-19

56
Residual BER BER < 1013 /hop/day at normal receiving condition
RSL = Receive Signal Level
SRT 1F
1-26 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
64 MLCM 4/5/U6G Bands Typical BER curves
1.E-02 Point A
Point B 4G
Point B 5G
Point B U6G
1.E-03 ETSI
1.E-04
1.E-05
BER
1.E-06
1.E-07
1.E-08
1.E-09
1.E-10
-80.0 -78.0 -76.0 -74.0 -72.0 -70.0 -68.0 -66.0 -64.0 -62.0 -60.0
RSL (dBm)
Figure 1-16 - BER vs RSL Typical down fade (64 MLCM 4/5/U6G system)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-27
64 MLCM 11G Band Typical BER curves
1.E-02
Point A
Point B 11G
1.E-03
ETSI
1.E-04
1.E-05
BER
1.E-06
1.E-07
1.E-08
1.E-09
1.E-10
-80.0 -78.0 -76.0 -74.0 -72.0 -70.0 -68.0 -66.0 -64.0 -62.0 -60.0
RSL (dBm)
Figure 1-17 - BER vs RSL Typical down fade (64 MLCM 11G system)
SRT 1F
1-28 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
128 MLCM U4/L6/7/L8G Bands Typical BER curves
Point A
1.E-02 Point B U4G
Point B L6G
Point B 7G
Point B L8G
1.E-03 ETSI
1.E-04
1.E-05
BER
1.E-06
1.E-07
1.E-08
1.E-09
1.E-10
-80.0 -78.0 -76.0 -74.0 -72.0 -70.0 -68.0 -66.0 -64.0 -62.0 -60.0
RSL (dBm)
Figure 1-18 - BER vs RSL Typical down fade (128 MLCM U4/L6/7/L8G system)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-29
128 MLCM 13G Band Typical BER curves
1.E-02
Point A
Point B 13G
1.E-03
ETSI
1.E-04
1.E-05
BER
1.E-06
1.E-07
1.E-08
1.E-09
1.E-10
-76.0 -74.0 -72.0 -70.0 -68.0 -66.0 -64.0 -62.0 -60.0 -58.0 -56.0
RSL (dBm)
Figure 1-19 - BER vs RSL Typical down fade (128 MLCM 13G system)
SRT 1F
1-30 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.4.8 RF Interference
Table 1.9 - RF Interference

Description
Co-channel < External >
In accordance with ETSI EN 302 217-2-2 V1.1.3 (2004-12).
64QAM system:
RSL degradation < 1 dB at BER = 106:
C/I = 31 dB (typical), 33 dB (ETSI limit)
128QAM system:
< Internal >
In accordance with ETSI EN 302 217-2-1 V1.2.1 (2007-06).
64QAM and 128QAM system:
Adjacent channel In accordance with ETSI EN 302 217-2-2 V1.1.3 (2004-12).
64QAM system:
C/I = -27 dB (typical), -4 dB (ETSI limit)
128QAM system:
Innermost channel C/N degradation at BER = 103 : < 1 dB
measured at duplexer input and Inter-Port Isolation (IPI) of 40 dB
XPIC Improvement factor using XPIC for co-channel operation > 18 dB
measured at BER = 103 interference curve
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-31
1.4.9 RF Interface
The following is the RF waveguide interface to/from the antenna system.
Table 1.10 - RF Interface
Frequency band Flange (IEC standard)

4 GHz band UDR 40
U4 GHz band UDR 40
5 GHz band UDR 48
L6 GHz band UDR 70
U6 GHz band UDR 70
7 GHz band UDR 70
L8 GHz band UDR 84
11 GHz band UDR 100
13 GHz band UDR 120
SRT 1F
1-32 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.4.10 Countermeasures to Fading
Table 1.11 - Countermeasures to Fading

Description
RX SD In Phase combiner in IF stage LO endless phase shifter
TX SD A subset of RF channels are transmitted by SD antenna
SD DADE Method Two types are available;
Compensation with RF feeder length (equivalent to 25 m), or
Compensation with delay adjuster at IF (equivalent to 120 ns).
SD DADE is adjusted through the delay line on the MSTU unit.
Adaptive Equalizer Adaptive time domain equalizer in baseband full digital type
(a) 11-tap transversal equalizer (TVE)
(b) 10-tap decision feedback equalizer (DFE)
Adaptive frequency domain equalizer in IF
(a) Slope equalizer (SLP EQL)
Radio protection Single protection RPS1 in N+1 configuration
system Double protection RPS1 and RPS2 in 2x(N+1) ST configuration
Unipolar switch (USW) in unipolar stage
Errorless protection switching with early warning detection for fade
Uni-directional switching
Bipolar switch (BSW) in bipolar stage
Hit switch for equipment failure
Bi-directional switching
XPIC Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC) inside Demodulator
module for Co-channel operation
Demodulator without XPIC can be upgraded with XPIC at factory by
new hardware/software installation.
FEC Multi-Level Coded Modulation(MLCM)
Coding gain for 64QAM MLCM: 2.0 dB at BER=103
3.5 dB at BER=106
Coding gain for 128QAM MLCM: 2.0 dB at BER=103
3.7 dB at BER=106
ATPC ATPC range: 10 dB
Control speed: 100 dB/sec
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-33
1.4.11 Base Band Signal Interface for STM-1 System
The Base Band Signal interface is in accordance with ITU-T G.957 and
G.703 Recs.
1.4.11.1 Base Band for Optical STM-1 Interface

In BSW Optical unit the optical transceiver function is demanded to SFP
module. The type of SFP module defines the particular ITU-T G.957
application (S-1.1, L-1.1, other) concerned.
Table 1.12 - STM-1 Optical Interface (SFP module on BSW Optical unit)
Bit Rate SDH level 1: 155.52 Mbit/s 20 ppm
Unit Name SFP S-1.1 SFP L-1.1
Application code (ITU-T G.957) (S-1.1) (L-1.1)
Typical hop 0-15 Km 15-40 Km
Operation wavelength range (nm) 1260-1360 1280-1335
Transmitter at reference point S:
Source Type SLM SLM
Mean Launched Power: Maximum (dBm) 8 0
Mean Launched Power: Minimum (dBm) 15 5
Minimum Bit Rate Extinction Ratio (dB) 8.2 10
Maximum RMS width (nm) 7.7 3
Receiver at reference point R:
Minimum Sensitivity (dBm) 28 34
Minimum Overload (dBm) 8 10
Maximum Optical Path Penalty (including chirp penalty 1 1
and dispersion penalty) (dB)
Connector Used LC Duplex
SRT 1F
1-34 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
(1) SFP Module Used

The Small Form Pluggable (SFP) module is located on optical interface
unit.
Figure 1-20 - OPT BSW/OPT OCC Overview
Figure 1-21 - OPT BSW DTI / OPT OCC DTI Overview

In case of 1+1 protection (but can work also as 1+0 non-protected)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-35
1.4.11.2 Base Band for Electrical STM-1 Interface
Table 1.13 - STM-1 Electrical Interface (BSW Electrical unit)

Bit rate 155.52 Mbit/s 20 ppm
Code format Coded Mark Inversion (CMI)
Pulse mask In accordance with ITU-T Rec. G.703
Impedance 75-ohm nominal, unbalanced
Return loss > 15 dB / 8~240 MHz, measured at base band input port
Input cable length The attenuation of the coaxial cable pair should be assumed to follow an
approximately root f law and to have a maximum insertion loss of 12.7 dB at
a frequency of 78 MHz.
Coaxial cable TCE2H2HH2 1 (0.4-1.9)/M or equivalent
Connector Used 1.0/2.3 microsiemens connector.
1.4.11.3 Jitter
Jitter tolerance
The SRT 1F radio equipment tolerates the input jitter applied according to
ITU-T Rec. G.958 with Type A specified on Table 2.
Jitter transfer
The SRT 1F radio equipment meets the jitter transfer specification given
in ITU-T Rec. G.958 Figure 6.2 with the jitter transfer parameter specified
for Type B in Table 1/G.958 when sinusoidal jitter up to the mask level in
Figure 6.3/G.958 with the jitter tolerance parameter specified for Type A
in Table 2/G.958 is applied at the STM-1 input.
1.4.11.4 Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)
Terminal
When the Base Band signal (optical/electrical) or radio signal from the
optical equipment or radio equipment is lost, the SRT1F generates AU-
AIS (MS mode) or MS-AIS (RS mode) to the next equipment. When the
AU-AIS is detected from Base Band or radio signal, the SRT1F transfers
the AU-AIS to the next equipment after SOH processing. When MS-AIS is
detected from Base Band or radio signal, the SRT1F transfers MS-AIS to
the next equipment after RSOH processing in case of RS operation, and
transfers AU-AIS to the next equipment after RSOH and MSOH
processing in case of MS operation.
SRT 1F
1-36 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Repeater
When frame or signal loss is detected, SRT1F generates MS-AIS to the
next equipment.
AIS initiator
Loss of Signal (LOS)
Loss of Frame (LOF)
Loss of Pointer (LOP)
B2-ERR
MS-AIS, AU-AIS revealed
Section Trace ID Mismatch
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-37
1.4.12 Gigabit Ethernet Interface
1.4.12.1 GE BSW Overview for 1xSTM-1 transmission
1.4.12.2 GE ML Master Overview for NxSTM-1 Transmission (Multi-Link)
In case of 1+1 protection (but can work also as 1+0 non-protected)
SRT 1F
1-38 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.4.12.3 SFP Module technical data
Reference Recommendation: IEEE 802.3 Gigabit Ethernet

(1.25GBd)
GE interface mechanics: Hot-pluggable SFP module
GigaEthernet Optical 1000Base-SX 1000Base-LX

Reference Standard IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3z
Bit Rate 1.25 Gb/s 1.25 Gb/s
Operating wavelength range 830-860 1270-1335
Transmitter source MLM SLM
Max RMS spectral width 0.85 nm 4.0 nm
Mean launched power (point S):
- Maximum -3 dBm -3 dBm
- Minimum -9.5 dBm -9.5 dBm
Minimum extinction ratio 9 dB 9 dB
Minimum sensitivity (point R) -21 dBm -19 dBm
Minimum overload 0 dBm -3 dBm
Connector type (hot-swap SFP) LC (duplex) LC (duplex)
GigaEthernet Electrical 1000Base-T

Reference Standard IEEE 802.3ab
Bit Rate 1.25 Gb/s
Cable type Shielded or unshielded twisted
pair cat. 5
Connector type (hot-swap SFP) RJ45 with autocrossover
Mode of operation Half Duplex / Full Duplex
(autonegotiation)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-39
1.4.13 Auxiliary Signal Interface
1.4.13.1 Way Side (WS)
Table 1.14 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (WS)

Capacity 2048 kbit/s x 2 per STM-1
Transmission Bit insertion/separation to/from RFCOH and/or SOH bits
One wayside traffic is transferred through RFCOH bits, the other is through
undefined bytes in SOH
Digital interface In accordance with ITU-T G.703 Rec.
Connector Multi-pin connector for 120 balanced
used Coaxial connector, 1.0/2.3 microsiemens for 75 unbalanced
1.4.13.2 Engineering Order Wire (EOW)
Table 1.15 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (EOW)

Transmission Bit insertion/separation to/from E1 and E2 of SOH.
Bit rate 64 kbit/s x 2 (equivalent to 2 CH telephony)
Express/selective orderwire and omnibus orderwire
Interface 2-W for internal telephone set and external use
4-W for branching connector
Interface level 2W Interface:
Input level: 0.0 dBr nominal
Output level : 2.0 dBr nominal
Voice maximum level: 3 dBmo
4W Interface:
Input level: 4 dBr nominal (16 to 0.5 dBr, 0.5 step)
Output level : 4 dBr nominal (8.5 to +7 dBr, 0.5 step)
Selective call DTMF (Dual Tone Multiple Frequency) for both E1 and E2 independently.
Four (4) calling digits are used:
Two (2) digits for group number: (G1,G2)
Two (2) digits for station number: (G3,G4)
When calling, (#,G1,G2,G3,G4) is dialled by push-phone TEL.
Two (2) dialling methods are available:
Individual station calling: (#,G1,G2,G3,G4)
Broadcasting calling: (#, G1,G2,*,*)
4W cascade Up to 20 NEs for E1 and E2 independently, due to voice frequency (VF)
connection degradation caused by D/A, A/D conversion in PCM CODEC
Simultaneous Up to 6 NEs for E1 and E2 independently, due to leakage of voice

communication frequency (VF) signals in 2W interface
SRT 1F
1-40 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.4.13.3 User Channel (UC)
Table 1.16 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (User Channel)

Transmission Bit insertion/separation to/from F1 byte of SOH.
Bit rate 64 kbit/s x 1 (equivalent to 1 CH telephony) per STM-1
Interface 120 Ohm Co-directional or contra directional
Pulse mask In accordance with ITU-T G.703
Output jitter In accordance with ITU-T G.823 (applicable for co-directional only)
Jitter Tolerance In accordance with ITU-T G.823 (applicable for co-directional only)
Connector used Multi-pin connector
1.4.13.4 Radio User Channel (RUC)
Table 1.17 - Auxiliary Signal Interface (RUC)

Transmission - Bit insertion/separation to/from RFCOH bits
Bit rate 64 kbit/s x 2 (equivalent to 2 CH telephony) per system
Interface Combination of VF and 64 kbit/s available by mounting optional sub-PCB
module on the SV units.
VF interface Input level : 16 dBr nominal (16 to 0.5 dBr, 0.5 step)
Output level: +7 dBr nominal (8.5 to +7 dBr, 0.5 step)
No. of CH Maximum 2 CH
Amplitude response: In accordance with ITU-T G.712
Signal-to-distortion: In accordance with ITU-T G.712
Impedance 600 ohm balanced
DGTL 64 kbit/s Interface: Co-directional or contra-directional

digital Interface In accordance with ITU-T G.703
V-11 64 kbit/s Interface: Contra-directional
Digital Interface In accordance with ITU-T V.11
Connector used Multi-pin connector
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-41
1.4.13.5 Rack Alarm Bus (RAB) and Housekeeping (HK)

The system allows as standard up to 8 DI (Digital Inputs) for collection of
external station alarms plus 4 DO (Digital Outputs) for remote telecontrol
of station devices (HK function). The number of housekeeping DI/DO
ports may be increased by equipping up to two optional HK units. Each
HK unit adds 32 DI and 16 DO to housekeeping facility.
The system provides also audible and visible alarm outputs to monitor NE
status from external equipment (RAB function).
Table 1.18 - Housekeeping Signal Interface (HK)

Unit to be equipped HK input (DI) HK output (DO)
Available as standard 8 4
equipping 1 HK optional card 40 20
equipping 2 HK optional cards 72 36
NOTE: Maximum 1 HK unit per direction can be equipped in 2x(N+1) single rack double terminal.
No HK unit can be equipped in 1+1 N.E. system.
The alarms forwarded have the following logic:

OPEN = normal
CLOSE = alarm
SRT1F equipment Other equipment

HK input (DI) of HK connector
ACO (Alarm Cutoff) input (DI) of RAB connector
6.4 k L
Photo 0.3 mA to 11.3 mA

coupler

HK output (DO) of HK connector

NE alarm output (DO) of RAB connector
Max. I = 100 mA
Relay
Max. V = DC 110 V
L
Figure 1-22 - Housekeeping Electrical Characteristics
SRT 1F
1-42 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.4.13.6 HK & 120/75 Impedance Converter (HK CONV)
Table 1.19 - HK & 120/75 Impedance Converter (HK CONV)

Supervisory/ Remote Control Same as HK unit
Impedance converter 120-ohm Wayside Traffic to 75-ohm Wayside Traffic
Connector Used for WSS/WSR 1.0/2.3 type coaxial connector for 75-ohm interface
Dsub 9-pin multi-pin connector for 120-ohm interface
No. of Connectors for WSS & WSR Four (4) for WSS and WSR input/output
One (1) Dsub 9-pin multi-connector
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-43
1.5 Mechanical Specification

housed in one rack
The available configurations are summarized in Table 1.1.
56
1+1 N.E. solution is required in the following case:

no more than 500 mm rack occupancy and no request of future
expansion to more than 2 TRs per terminal.
1.5.1 SRT 1F K-shelf
1.5.1.1 General
The SRT 1F ETSI rack for K-shelf has the following dimensions:
2200 mm height
600 mm width
300 mm depth
Figure 1-23 shows ETSI rack layout in the case of equipping K-shelf and
56
Expansion K-shelf in the same rack.
SRT 1F
1-44 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 1-23 - ETSI rack layout for SRT 1F K-shelf system

Six (6) types of system configuration are available as follows:
N+1 Terminal (N < 8) using K-shelf up to 7+1 (see Figure 1-24);
56
2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 4) on one rack using K-shelf up to

2x(3+1) ST (see Figure 1-25);
6
2x(N+1) Single Terminal (3 < N < 8) on one rack using K-shelf up to

2x(3+1) ST and Expansion K-shelf ST in the same rack (see Figure 6
1-26);
2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 8) on two racks using K-shelf up to 7+1
(see Figure 1-27);
6
2x(N+1) Double Terminal (N < 4) on one rack using K-shelf up to

2x(3+1) DT (see Figure 1-28);
6
2x(N+1) Double Terminal (3 < N < 8) on one rack using K-shelf up to

2x(3+1) DT and Expansion K-shelf DT in the same rack (see Figure
1-29)
The N+0/2x(N+0) configurations can be considered as particular cases of
the system configurations above.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-45
Figure 1-24 - Typical Rack Configuration for N+1 Terminal (N < 8) using
SRT 1F K-shelf up to 7+1
SRT 1F
1-46 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
ECU/OWBR
OWBR
Figure 1-25 - Typical Rack Configuration for 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 4) on one rack
using SRT 1F K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-47
ECU/OWBR
OWBR
Figure 1-26 - Typical Rack Configuration for 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (3 < N < 8) on one rack
using SRT 1F K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST and Expansion K-shelf ST in the same rack
Inter-shelf cabling and connections between K-shelf and Expansion K-

shelf ST are needed.
SRT 1F
1-48 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 1-27 - Typical Rack Configuration for 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 8) on two racks
using SRT 1F K-shelf up to 7+1 in two separate racks
Inter-rack cabling and connections are required to the PCB backplane

between main and slave rack.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-49
Figure 1-28 - Typical Rack Configuration for 2x(N+1) Double Terminal (N < 4) on one rack
using SRT 1F K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT
SRT 1F
1-50 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 1-29 - Typical Rack Configuration for 2x(N+1) Double Terminal (3 <N < 8) on one rack
using SRT 1F K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT and Expansion K-shelf DT
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-51
1.5.1.2 K-shelf Rack Construction

The equipment construction is as follows:
ETSI standard Rack
2,200 (H) x 600 (W) x 345 (D) mm with shelf bonnet cover
K-shelf with PCB backplane and bonnet cover
Expansion K-shelf with PCB backplane and bonnet cover
RF branching network
Slide-in-units(SIU)
The following connectors and power supply terminals are on the PCB
backplane:
Multi-pin and coaxial connectors for data
Multi-pin connectors for alarm and status output for housekeeping bits
Power supply terminal from power supply system and non-fuse
breaker
K-shelf and Expansion K-shelf comprise the RF branching network unit
(BRU) section, main signal transmission unit (MSTU) section, baseband
interface and supervisory/control & switching unit (SCSU) section and
user interface area (UIA) section.
A multi-layer PCB backplane is used for plug-in units. Multi-pin
connectors on the backplane are high-reliability type and have protection
facilities against mis-insertion.
The RF branching network is housed above the MSTU section. The RF
branching network consists of RF band pass filters and circulators for RF
channel separation.
Connection between the RF branching network and the MSTU units are
made by semi-rigid coaxial cables with SMA connectors via an MSTU
adapter.
All units are plug-in type and no wiring is required during installation and
maintenance. Units have card-pullers for easy card extraction and unit
locking. All units can be accessed from the front of the rack.
SRT 1F
1-52 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.5.2 Mixed application with SRT 1F K-shelf and Multi-shelf
This paragraph treats a particular case where K-shelf is used to expand

an existing Multi-shelf from N+1 CC single-polarized to 2x(N+1) CC. The
configuration in this case is
2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 8) on two racks using Multi-shelf and K-
shelf up to 7+1 (see Figure 1-30)
6
The 2x(N+0) configuration can be considered as particular case of the

system configuration above.
Also in this case the SRT 1F ETSI rack has the following dimensions:
2200 mm height
600 mm width
300 mm depth
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-53
Figure 1-30 - Typical Rack Configuration for 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 8) on two racks
using SRT 1F Multi-shelf in the main rack and SRT 1F K-shelf up to 7+1 in the slave rack
Inter-rack cabling and connections are required to the PCB backplane

between main and slave rack.
SRT 1F
1-54 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.5.3 SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. system
1.5.3.1 General
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. system can be installed according to stand-alone, wall
mounting and ETSI rack mode.
In case of rack mounting, standard ETSI rack may be used:
2200 mm height
600 mm width
300 mm depth
Figure 1-31 shows ETSI rack layout in the case of equipping one system
6
1+1 N.E. Up to two systems 1+1 N.E. can be equipped in the same ETSI
rack for double terminal application (see Figure 1-32).
6
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-55
Figure 1-31 - ETSI rack layout for SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. (1 system)
SRT 1F
1-56 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 1-32 - ETSI rack layout for SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. (2 systems)
The configuration available with 1+1 N.E. assembly is the following:

1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible) AP/CC Terminal (see Figure 1-33)
6
1+0 and 2+0 configurations can be considered as particular cases of the

system configuration above.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-57
Figure 1-33 - Typical Rack Configuration for 1+1 Not Expansible AP/CC Terminal using
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Assembly in ETSI rack mounting mode
SRT 1F
1-58 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
The equipment of the cards inside the 1+1 N.E. shelf can be made
according to the following set of configuration, depending on the
requirements of the interface and the need for occasional traffic.
1+0 configuration, STM-1e interface 1+1 configuration, STM-1e interface 1+1 OCC configuration, STM-1e interface
M M M M M
S S S S S
T T T T T T T T O
C C C C
U U
U U U
U U U C
S S E S
W P W P W
V V V
B B B
S S S
W W W
1+0 configuration, STM-1o interface 1+1 configuration, STM-1o interface 1+1 OCC configuration, STM-1o interface
M M M M M
S S S S S
T T T T T T T T O
C C C C
U U
U U U
U U U C
S S O S
W P W P W
V V V
B O B O B O
S P S P S P
W T W T W T
Figure 1-34 - Equipment Configurations for 1+1 N.E. Terminal
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-59
1.5.3.2 1+1 N.E. Rack Construction

The equipment construction is as follows:
Rack is optional item (stand-alone or wall mounting are available)
One or Two 1+1 N.E. assemblies.
The following connectors and power supply terminals are on the PCB
backplane:
Multi-pin and co-axial connectors for data
Multi-pin connectors for alarm and status output for housekeeping bits
Power supply terminal from power supply system.
The 1+1 N.E. assembly comprise the main signal transmission unit
(MSTU), supervisory control, switching unit and RF branching network
unit (BRU).
A multi-layer PCB backplane is used for plug-in units. Multi-pin
connectors on the backplane have high-reliability features and are
provided with facilities which prevent wrong insertion.
The RF branching network is housed above and behind the shelf. The RF
branching network consists of RF band pass filters and,
All units are of the plug-in type hence needing no wiring during the
installation and maintenance works. Units have card-pullers for easy card
extraction and unit locking. All units can be accessed through front panel.
SRT 1F
1-60 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.5.4 Shelf Layout
1.5.4.1 K-shelf
Figure 1-35 shows the layout of the K-shelf up to 7+1.
6
Figure 1-36 shows the layout of the K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST.

6
Figure 1-37 shows the layout of the K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST and

6
Expansion K-shelf for up to 2x(7+1) ST.

Figure 1-38 shows the layout of the K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT.
6
Figure 1-39 shows the layout of the K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT and

Expansion K-shelf for up to 2x(7+1) DT.
Figure 1-40 shows the K-shelf front and side views.
6
490 mm
W/C W/C W/C W/C
BPF BPF BPF BPF SD BRU

BPF BPF BPF BPF RX
BPF BPF BPF BPF TX
MSTU
MSTU(PRT)
MSTU(M1)
MSTU(M2)
MSTU(M3)
MSTU(M4)
MSTU(M5)
MSTU(M6)
MSTU(M7)
1,155 mm
BSW INTF
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
SCSU
SV
ECU1
ECU/OWBR
ECU2
OWBR NFB
Connectors TERM UIA
Figure 1-35 - Layout of K-shelf up to 7+1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-61
490 mm
W/C W/C W/C W/C

BPF BPF BPF BPF RX
BPF BPF BPF BPF TX
MSTU(PRT, RPS1)
MSTU(PRT, RPS2)
MSTU(M1, RPS1)
MSTU(M2, RPS1)
MSTU(M3, RPS1)
MSTU(M1, RPS2)
MSTU(M2, RPS2)
MSTU(M3, RPS2)
MSTU
1,155 mm
BSW INTF
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
SCSU
SV
ECU1
ECU/OWBR
ECU2
OWBR NFB
Connectors TERM UIA
Figure 1-36 - Layout of K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST
SRT 1F
1-62 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1-63
Figure 1-37 - Layout of K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST and Expansion K-shelf ST
MSTU
MSTU
SCSU
SCSU
BRU
BRU
UIA
UIA
RX
SD
TX
RX
SD
TX
TERM
TERM
NFB
MSTU(M3, RPS2) MSTU(M7, RPS2)
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
W/C
MSTU(M2, RPS2) BSW INTF

MSTU(M6, RPS2)
EXP ADPT OCC INTF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BSW(M3) BSW(M7)
BPF
BPF
BPF
W/C
BSW(M2) BSW(M6)
490 mm
MSTU(PRT, RPS2) MSTU(M4, RPS2)
ECU/OWBR
Connectors
Connectors
BSW(M1) BSW(M5)
HK2 BSW(M4)
OWBR
ECU1
ECU2
SV
BPF
BPF
BPF
HK1 EXP ADPT
BPF
BPF
BPF
W/C
TCU-Y OCC INTF

911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010

TCU-X BSW(M7)
EXP ADPT BSW(M6)
BPF
BPF
BPF
BSW(M3) BSW(M5)
BPF
BPF
BPF
W/C
BSW(M2) BSW(M4)
MSTU(PRT, RPS1) BSW(M1)
MSTU(M4, RPS1) EXP ADPT
1,155 mm 930 mm
SRT 1F
UMN
Figure 1-38 - Layout of K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT
SRT 1F
1-64 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 1-39 - Layout of K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT and Expansion K-shelf DT
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-65
Figure 1-40 - K-shelf front and side view
SRT 1F
1-66 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.5.4.2 1+1 N.E. shelf

Figure 1-41 shows the layout of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. assembly. Up to two (2)
6
MSTU units can be equipped, one TCU card, one SV card, one BSW
card and the following optional items:
Up to one OPT card, optical converter for BSW interface
Up to one OCC card, occasional traffic interface, which can be
electrical or optical
Figure 1-42 Shows SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. shelf front and side views.
6
Figure 1-41 - Layout of 1+1 N.E. assembly

(85)
588
(503)
(294) (298)
359 (mm)
Figure 1-42 - 1+1 N.E. shelf front and side views
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-67
1.5.5 Unit Construction
Table 1.20 shows a list of the units/blocks equipped in SRT 1F system. A

6
User Interface Access block is available on SCS section including

backplane connectors, DC Power terminal and non-fuse breakers area.
Table 1.20 - Unit Construction

Item Slide-in-Unit Name/ module Abbreviation/Block Remarks
1 Radio Frequency Branching Network BRU BRU
2 Main Signal Transmission Unit MSTU MSTU +29 dBm/+32 dBm for 4-L8 GHz
+29 dBm for 11 GHz
+27 dBm for 13 GHz
3 Supervisory Unit SV SCSU SV for RPS1 or
SV for RPS1 and RPS2
having 8-item DI and 4-item DO
4 Baseband Switch Unit BSW For STM-1 electrical interface
5 Baseband Switch Unit for optical OPT BSW S-1.1 or L-1.1
6 Baseband Switch Unit for optical DTI OPT BSW DTI S-1.1 or L-1.1 with DTI
7 Baseband Switch Unit for GE GE BSW 1000BASE-T
1000BASE-SX
1000BASE-LX
8 GE Multi-link Master unit GE MLM 1000BASE-T
1000BASE-SX
1000BASE-LX
9 GE Multi-link Slave Unit GE MLS
10 GE Adaptor Unit GE ADPT GE ADPT
11 GE Adaptor Unit OCC GE ADPT GE ADPT for OCC slot
OCC
12 Embedded Communication Unit ECU GP-2 DCC extension (option)
13 Occasional Traffic Unit OCC INTF STM-1 electrical
14 Occasional Traffic Unit for optical OPT OCC S-1.1 or L-1.1
15 Occasional Traffic Unit for optical DTI OPT OCC DTI S-1.1 or L-1.1 with DTI
16 Occasional Traffic Unit for GE GE OCC 1000BASE-T
1000BASE-SX
1000BASE-LX
17 Timing Control Unit TCU Only for MS mode
18 Housekeeping HK
19 Housekeeping & 120/75 Converter HK CONV Including 120/75 impedance
converter with HK unit
20 Order Wire Branching Unit OWBR Allows branching of up to 5
EOW extension
21 Baseband Switch Interface BSW INTF Only for CCDP operation
SV Sub-module for enhanced
22 RAB Sub-unit for SNMP/IP SV RAB
RAB function (optional)
SRT 1F
1-68 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
SV Sub-module for voice

23 Voice Frequency RUC Sub-unit RUC VF
channel RUC (optional)
SV Sub-module for 64kb/s
24 G.703 64 kbit/s RUC Sub-unit RUC G.703
G.703 digital RUC (optional)
25 V.11 64 kbit/s RUC Sub-unit RUC V.11 SV Sub-module for 64kb/s V.11
digital RUC (optional)
26 RST Sub-unit RST SV Sub-module for enhanced
RST mode
27 Inter-shelf cable adaptor CCC ADPT I On K-shelf for connection to
expansion K-shelf
28 Inter-shelf cable adaptor CCC ADPT E On expansion K-shelf
29 Power Supply Redundancy PSR For 1+1 protection of PS of OPT
BSW DTI unit
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-69
1.5.6 Weight
Table 1.21 shows the weight of the units/shelves of SRT 1F.

6
Table 1.21 - Weight of Each Unit and Equipment

ITEM Weight
Racks:
ETSI Rack 2200mm for K-shelf 36 kg
Shelves:
K-shelf 30 kg (included front cover)
Expansion K-shelf 28 kg (included front cover)
1+1 N.E. shelf 18 kg (included front cover)
Units:
Transceiver Unit 7.0 kg (included MSTU adaptor)
MCF/Controller single RPS 1.5 kg
MCF/Controller double RPS 1.5 kg
BSW STM-1 Electrical 0.4 kg
BSW STM-1 Optical 1+0 STI 0.5 kg (included SFP module)
BSW STM-1 Optical 1+1 DTI 0.5 kg (included SFP module)
BSW GE 1+0 STI 0.5 kg (included SFP module)
GE ML 1+1 DTI - Master 0.5 kg (included SFP module)
GE ML 1+1 DTI - Slave 0.5 kg
GE ML 1+1 DTI Adapter 0.3 kg
BSW INTF for RPS2 in 2x(N+1) CC 0.4 kg
TSU (optional unit) 0.4 kg
HK (optional unit) 0.4 kg
HK CONV (optional unit) 0.4 kg
ECU (optional unit) 0.9 kg
OWBR (optional unit) 0.9 kg
AUX/LAN (optional unit) 1.0 kg
RUC digital G.703 sub-module (optional unit) 0.1 kg
RUC digital V.11 sub-module (optional unit) 0.1 kg
RUC analog VF sub-module (optional unit) 0.1 kg
RAB sub-module (optional unit) 0.1 kg
RST sub-module (optional unit) 0.1 kg
OCC STM-1 Electrical (optional unit) 0.3 kg
OCC STM-1 Optical 1+0 STI (optional unit) 0.5 kg (included SFP module)
OCC STM-1 Optical 1+1 DTI (optional unit) 0.5 kg (included SFP module)
SRT 1F
1-70 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
OCC GE 1+0 STI (optional unit) 0.4 kg (included SFP module)

GE ML 1+1 DTI Adapter for OCC (optional) 0.3 kg
OPT INTF 1+1N.E. (optional unit) 0.3 kg
OPT OCC 1+1N.E. (optional unit) 0.3 kg
Branching Circulator 0.6 kg
Branching Filter 0.7 kg
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-71
1.6 Environmental and EMC Specification
1.6.1 Environmental Conditions
1.6.1.1 Operating Conditions
Normal conditions: ETSI 300-019-1-3 Class 3.2

Temperature limits: -5 to 45 C
Humidity limits: 5% to 95%
Maximum temperature limit: up to 50 C
Altitude: Up to 4500 metres
Climatogram:
50
Absolute Air Humidity [g/m3]

40
Air Temperature
30
29
20
10
-10
1
-20
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Relative Air Humidity []
Figure 1-43 - Climatogram for class 3.2: Partly temperature-controlled locations
SRT 1F
1-72 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.6.1.2 Transport and Storage
Transport The equipment meets the environmental conditions

standardized in ETSI 300-019-1-2 Class 2.3
Storage The equipment meets the environmental conditions

standardized in ETSI 300-019-1-1 Class 1.3
Climatogram:
50
40
30
25
Absolute Air Humidity [g/m3]

20
Air Temperature []
10
-10
-20
-30
0.26
-40
-50
-60
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Relative Air Humidity []
Figure 1-44 - Climatogram for class 1.3: Not weather-protected storage locations
1.6.1.3 Corrosion and External Agents
Corrosion: The equipment meets the environmental conditions

standardized in ETSI 300-019-1 Class 3.2
External Agents: The equipment meets the environmental conditions

standardized in IEC 60529 / EN 60529.
1.6.1.4 Waste
The system is compliant with European Unions RoHS and WEEE
directives.
RoHS: Restriction of the use of certain Hazardous Substances

in electrical and electronic equipment (EC 95)
WEEE: Waste from Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EC 175)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-73
1.6.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility Conditions
EMC parameters are in accordance with ETSI EN 301 489-1 V1.7.1 and
EN 301 489-4 V1.3.1.
1.6.2.1 Emission
Emission is in accordance with ETSI EN 55022:
Radiated Emission 1
Reference Document CISPR22
Limits Class A
Frequency range (MHz) Quasi-peak limits dB (V/m)
30 230 40
230 1000 47
Limits valid at a measuring distance of 10 m.
Conducted Emissions
- DC lines 2
Reference Document CISPR22
Limits Class A
Frequency range Quasi-peak limits dB Average limits dB (

(MHz) (V/m) V/m)
0.15 0.5 79 66
0.5 30 73 60
- AC lines Not Applicable

- Signal lines Not Applicable
1 It defines the radio equipment capability to limit any spurious radiation

from the enclosure.
2 It defines the radio equipment capability to limit internal noise from the
DC power input ports.
SRT 1F
1-74 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.6.2.2 Immunity
RF electromagnetic field (80 1000 MHz and 1400-2700 MHz)
Definition of the radio equipment capability to operate with specified

performance conditions in presence of a radio frequency electromagnetic
field disturbance vs. the enclosure.
Reference Document EN 61000-4-3

Test Level 3 V/m
Performance No Error
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

performance conditions in the event of an electrostatic discharge.

Test Level
- contact discharge Level 2 ( 4kV)
- Air discharge Level 3 ( 8kV)
Fast transients common mode (burst)

performance conditions in case of fast transients on one of the input /
output ports.
- DC lines

Test Level Level 1 (0.5 kV)
- AC lines Not applicable
- Signal and Control Lines

Test Level Level 1 (0.5 kV)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-75
Radio frequency common mode (0.15 - 80 MHz )

performance conditions in presence of a RF electromagnetic disturbance
on the input / output ports.
- DC lines

Test Level Clamp injection method level 2 (3Vrms)
- AC lines Not applicable
- Signal and Control Lines

Test Level Clamp injection method level 2 (3Vrms)
1.6.2.3 Safety
The equipment complies with EN 60950-1 second edition (2005-12).
SRT 1F
1-76 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.7 Power Supply
1.7.1 General
Nominal Voltage (V) -48 V

Feeding Voltage Tolerance (V) 20% (-36 to -72 V)
Power supply circuits of all the equipment have the provisioning as

follows:
Over current protection (Secondary)
Over voltage protection (Secondary)
Surge protection (Primary) : Vp = 2 kV
Rise and fall time (Vp/2) : tr = 1.2 sec, tf = 50 sec.
Power supply terminal for dual-feed 1:1 protected DC power supply
(system-X and system-Y) is located on SCS section (UIA block) and non-
fuse power breakers are located on each MSTU unit and in SCS section
(UIA block) for SV unit, TCU-X and TCU-Y units.
1.7.2 Power Supply Distribution
The system accepts the external supply coming from the batteries,
generating the required secondary voltages.
One Non-fuse power breaker per each MSTU Transceiver unit is
equipped.
One Non-fuse power breaker for SV MCF/Controller unit is equipped.
One Non-fuse power breaker per each TCU unit (TCU-X and TCU-Y) is
equipped.
A reference scheme is reported in Figure 1-45 for K-shelf configuration.
6
In K-shelf configuration, all the system is fed with 1:1 redundancy through
2x10mmq bipolar shielded type cable and M8 lugs on PDU interface in
SCS section.
In 1+1 N.E. shelf, the system is fed with 1:1 redundancy through
2x1.5mmq bipolar shielded type cable and AMP type connectors in SCS
section.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-77
1.7.3 Secondary Voltages
+5V for BSW Electrical from Transceiver section.

+3.3V for BSW Optical and BSW GE and GE ML from Transceiver
section.
+5V for AUX/LAN card from MCF/Controller card.
+3.3V for ECU and HK and OWBR from MCF/Controller card.
All bipolar switch circuits and OCC cards and BSW INTF card are
powered by transceiver unit on protection slot, so that the switching is
inhibited in case of failure of the transceiver unit on the protection slot.
1.7.4 Power Supply Efficiency
Electrical efficiency 80%
SRT 1F
1-78 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
-48V -48V
Protection Main1 Main 7
...
D/ D/ D/
D D D
SCS
+5/3.3V
MCF/
BSW-Wn
BSW-W1
... Controller
ECU/OWBR
OWBR
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK2
HK1
D/
D
+5/3.3V
Figure 1-45 - Power Supply distribution scheme for K-shelf configuration
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-79
1.8 POWER CONSUMPTION
1.8.1 Transceiver Unit
The MSTU Transceiver Unit includes BB, MODEM, TX/RX and RX SD.
The power consumption of Transceiver Unit depends on the ATPC
setting.
ATPC can work in accordance with three modes:

ATPC off: the TX power is fixed to nominal power
ATPC low: the TX power is fixed to nominal power minus 10dB
ATPC on: the TX power is linearly varying between nominal power
and nominal power minus 10dB
Nominal power is +29dBm for 4-8GHz NP, +32dBm for 4-8GHz HP,
+29dBm for 11GHz, +27dBm for 13GHz.
Typical and guaranteed values for Transceiver Unit power consumption

are reported in Table 1.22 for minimum and maximum consumption cases
6
relevant to ATPC low and ATPC off modes, respectively:
Table 1.22 - MSTU Power Consumption

Typical (W) Guaranteed (W)
Band HP/NP XPIC ATPC low ATPC off ATPC low ATPC off
NP N 73 98 90 110
(+29 dBm) Y 78 103 95 115
4-8 GHz
HP N 83 108 115 135
(+32 dBm) Y 88 113 120 140
N 83 108 115 135
11/13 GHz NP
Y 88 113 120 140
SRT 1F
1-80 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.8.2 Base Band Units
All the values reported in the Table 1.23 have a tolerance of 10%.
6
Table 1.23 - BaseBand Units Power Consumption
Unit Watt
MCF/controller single RPS 16 W
MCF/controller double RPS 16 W
BSW STM-1 Electrical 2/9 3 W
BSW STM-1 Optical 1+0 STI 7/143 W
BSW STM-1 Optical 1+1 DTI 11/183 W
BSW GE 1+0 STI 8/153 W
GE ML 1+1 DTI - Master 17 W
GE ML 1+1 DTI - Slave 13 W
GE ML 1+1 DTI Adapter 1W
BSW INTF for RPS2 in K-shelf 2x(N+1) ST 2W
TCU (optional unit) 10 W
HK (optional unit) 5W
ECU (optional unit) 6W
OWBR (optional unit) 2W
AUX/LAN (optional unit) 5W
RUC digital G.703 sub-module (optional unit) 1W
RUC digital V.11 sub-module (optional unit) 1W
RUC analog VF sub-module (optional unit) 1W
RAB sub-module (optional unit) 1W
RST sub-module (optional unit) 1W
OCC STM-1 Electrical (optional unit) 1W
OCC STM-1 Optical 1+0 STI (optional unit) 6W
OCC STM-1 Optical 1+1 DTI (optional unit) 10 W
OCC GE 1+0 STI (optional unit) 7W
GE ML 1+1 DTI Adapter for OCC channel (optional unit) 1W
OPT INTF 1+1N.E. (optional unit) 3W
OPT OCC 1+1N.E. (optional unit) 3W
3 Under working of protection channel
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-81
1.9 Frequency Plan
1.9.1 General Information
Table 1.24 shows the ITU-R recommendations for the radio frequency
6
plan.
Table 1.24 - ITU-R Recommendations

Band Radio Frequency (MHz) Recommendation
U4 GHz band 3,803.5 4,203.5 ITU-R Recommendation F.382-8
4 GHz band 3,600 4,200 ITU-R Recommendation F.635-6 Annex 1
L6 GHz band 5,925 6,175 ITU-R Recommendation F.383-8
U6 GHz band 6,430 7,110 ITU-R Recommendation F.384-10
U6 GHz band 6,430 7,110 ITU-R Recommendation F.384-10 (Interleaved)
L7 GHz band 7,125 7,425 ITU-R Recommendation F.385-9, 2-6-10-14-18 set
L7 GHz band 7,125 7,425 ITU-R Recommendation F.385-9, 3-7-11-15-19 set
U7 GHz band 7,425 7,725 ITU-R Recommendation F.385-9 Annex 1
U7 GHz band 7,425 7,725 ITU-R Recommendation F.385-9, 3-7-11-15-19 set
W7 GHz band 7,110 7,750 ITU-R Recommendation F.385-9 Annex 3
L8 GHz band 7,725 8,275 ITU-R Recommendation F.386-8 Annex 6
8 GHz band 7,900 8,400 ITU-R Recommendation F.386-8 Annex 3, OIRT
11 GHz band 10,700 11,700 ITU-R Recommendation F.387-10
13 GHz band 12,750 13,250 ITU-R Recommendation F.497-7
1.9.2 Frequency Plan
1.9.2.1 Upper 4 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.382-8)

3803.5 to 4203.5 MHz
Guard band 21 MHz (Lower band and Upper band)
Center gap 68 MHz
29 MHz frequency spacing (ACCP/CCDP operation)
58 MHz frequency spacing (ACAP operation)
213 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing
5+1 protection system for ACAP/ACCP operation
2x(5+1) protection system for CCDP operation
Specified RF frequency is shown in Figure 1-46.
6
SRT 1F
1-82 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.9.2.2 4 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.635-6 Annex 1)

3600 to 4200 MHz
Center gap 80 MHz
6

4400 to 5000 MHz
Center gap 60 MHz
6
1.9.2.4 Lower 6 GHz (ITU-R Rec. F.383-8)

5925 to 6425 MHz
Guard band 20.2 MHz (Lower band) and 20.21 MHz (Upper band)
Center gap 44.49 MHz
29.65 MHz frequency spacing (ACCP/CCDP operation)
59.30 MHz frequency spacing (ACAP operation)
252.04 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing
6
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-83
1.9.2.5 Upper 6 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.384-10)

6430 to 7110 MHz
Center gap 60 MHz
6
1.9.2.6 Upper 6 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.384-10) (Interleaved)

6430 to 7110 MHz
Guard band 10 MHz Lower band and 50 MHz Upper band
Center gap 60 MHz
6
1.9.2.7 Lower 7 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.385-9, 2-6-10-14-18 set)

7125 to 7425 MHz
Guard band 10 MHz (Lower band) and 17 MHz (Upper band)
Center gap 49 MHz
6
SRT 1F
1-84 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.9.2.8 Lower 7 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.385-9, 3-7-11-15-19 set)

7125 to 7425 MHz
Center gap 49 MHz
1.9.2.9 Upper 7 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.385-9 Annex 1)

7425 to 7725 MHz
Center gap 42 MHz
6
1.9.2.10 Upper 7 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.385-9, 3-7-11-15-19 set)

7425 to 7725 MHz
Guard band 17 MHz (Lower band) and 10 GHz (Upper band)
Center gap 49 MHz
6
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-85

7110 to 7750 MHz.
Guard band (lower part): 11 MHz.
Guard band (upper part): 13 MHz.
Center gap (lower part): 84 MHz.
Center gap (upper part): 56 MHz.
28 MHz frequency spacing (ACCP/CCDP operation).
56 MHz frequency spacing (ACAP operation).
196 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing (lower part).
168 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing (upper part).
7+1 protection system for ACAP/ACCP operation.
2x(7+1) protection system for CCDP operation.
6
1.9.2.12 Lower 8 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.386-8 Annex 6)

7725 to 8275 MHz
Guard band 22.7 MHz (Lower band) and 8.43 MHz (Upper band)
Center gap 103.77 MHz
29.65 MHz frequency spacing (ACCP/CCDP operation)
59.30 MHz frequency spacing (ACAP operation)
311.32 MHz transmit-receive frequency spacing
6
1.9.2.13 8 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.386-8 Annex 3, OIRT)

7900 to 8400 MHz
Center gap 70 MHz
6
SRT 1F
1-86 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.9.2.14 11 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.387-10)

10700 to 11700 MHz
Center gap 90 MHz
6

10700 to 11700 MHz
Center gap 50 MHz
6
1.9.2.16 13 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.497-7)

12750 to 13250 MHz
Center gap 70 MHz
6
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-87
Figure 1-46 - U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.382-8)
Table 1.25 - U4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.382-8)

RF CH RF FREQUENCY(MHz) LO FREQUENCY(MHz)
1 3824.5 2980.5
2 3853.5 3009.5
3 3882.5 3038.5
4 3911.5 3067.5
5 3940.5 3096.5
6 3969.5 3125.5
1' 4037.5 3193.5
2' 4066.5 3222.5
3' 4095.5 3251.5
4' 4124.5 3280.5
5' 4153.5 3309.5
6' 4182.5 3338.5
SRT 1F
1-88 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Alternated operation
600 MHz
320 MHz
20 MHz 80 MHz 20 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
V(H)
H(V)
80 MHz
40 MHz
Co-channel operation
600 MHz
320 MHz
20 MHz 80MHz 20 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x
40 MHz
80 MHz
Figure 1-47 - 4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 635-6)
Table 1.26 - 4 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 635-6)

1 3620.0 2776.0
2 3660.0 2816.0
3 3700.0 2856.0
4 3740.0 2896.0
5 3780.0 2936.0
6 3820.0 2976.0
7 3860.0 3016.0
1 3940.0 3096.0
2 3980.0 3136.0
3 4020.0 3176.0
4 4060.0 3216.0
5 4100.0 3256.0
6 4140.0 3296.0
7 4180.0 3336.0
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-89
Figure 1-48 - 5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099-4 Annex 1)

Table 1.27 - 5 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.1099-4 Annex 1)
1 4430.0 3586.0
2 4470.0 3626.0
3 4510.0 3666.0
4 4550.0 3706.0
5 4590.0 3746.0
6 4630.0 3786.0
7 4670.0 3826.0
1 4730.0 3886.0
2 4770.0 3926.0
3 4810.0 3966.0
4 4850.0 4006.0
5 4890.0 4046.0
6 4930.0 4086.0
7 4970.0 4126.0
SRT 1F
1-90 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
500 MHz
252.04 MHz
20.2 MHz 59.3 MHz 20.21 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 8
V(H)
H(V)
44.49 MHz
29.65 MHz
500 MHz
252.04 MHz
20.2 MHz 59.3 MHz 20.21 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 8
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x
8 8
29.65 MHz
44.49 MHz
Figure 1-49 - L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.383-8)

Table 1.28 - L6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.383-8)
RF CH RF FREQUENCY (MHz) LO FREQUENCY (MHz)
1 5945.20 5101.20
2 5974.85 5130.85
3 6004.50 5160.50
4 6034.15 5190.15
5 6063.80 5219.80
6 6093.45 5249.45
7 6123.10 5279.10
8 6152.75 5308.75
1 6197.24 5353.24
2 6226.89 5382.89
3 6256.54 5412.54
4 6286.19 5442.19
5 6315.84 5471.84
6 6345.49 5501.49
7 6375.14 5531.14
8 6404.79 5560.79
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-91
680 MHz
340 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 8
V(H)
H(V)
60 MHz
40 MHz
680 MHz
340 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 8
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x
8 8
40 MHz
60 MHz
Figure 1-50 - U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.384-10)
Table 1.29 - U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.384-10)

RF CH RF Frequency (MHz) LO Frequency MHz)
1 6460.0 5616.0
2 6500.0 5656.0
3 6540.0 5696.0
4 6580.0 5736.0
5 6620.0 5776.0
6 6660.0 5816.0
7 6700.0 5856.0
8 6740.0 5896.0
1 6800.0 5956.0
2 6840.0 5996.0
3 6880.0 6036.0
4 6920.0 6076.0
5 6960.0 6116.0
6 7000.0 6156.0
7 7040.0 6196.0
8 7080.0 6236.0
SRT 1F
1-92 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 1-51 - U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.384-10) (Interleaved)
Table 1.30 - U6 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.384-10) (Interleaved)

RF CH RF Frequency (MHz) LO Frequency MHz)
1 6,440 5,596
2 6,480 5,636
3 6,520 5,676
4 6,560 5,716
5 6,600 5,756
6 6,640 5,796
7 6,680 5,836
8 6,720 5,876
1 6,780 5,936
2 6,820 5,976
3 6,860 6,016
4 6,900 6,056
5 6,940 6,096
6 6,980 6,136
7 7,020 6,176
8 7,060 6,216
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-93
300 MHz
161 MHz
10 MHz 56 MHz 17MHz
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
V(H)
H(V)
49 MHz
28 MHz
300 MHz
161 MHz
10 MHz 56 MHz 17MHz
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 49 MHz 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x
28 MHz
Figure 1-52 - L7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.385-9, 2-6-10-14-18 set)
Table 1.31 - L7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.385-9, 2-6-10-14-18 set)
1 7135 6291
2 7163 6319
3 7191 6347
4 7219 6375
5 7247 6403
1 7296 6452
2 7324 6480
3 7352 6508
4 7380 6536
5 7408 6564
SRT 1F
1-94 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
300 MHz
161 MHz
17
10 MHz
MHz 56 MHz 10 MHz
17MHz
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
V(H)
H(V)
49 MHz
28 MHz
300 MHz
161 MHz
17
10MHz
MHz 56 MHz 10 MHz
17MHz
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 49 MHz 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x
28 MHz
Figure 1-53 - L7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.385-9, 3-7-11-15-19 set)
Table 1.32 - L7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.385-9, 3-7-11-15-19 set)
1 7142 6298
2 7170 6326
3 7198 6354
4 7226 6382
5 7254 6410
1' 7303 6459
2' 7331 6487
3' 7359 6515
4' 7387 6543
5' 7415 6571
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-95
300 MHz
154 MHz
17 MHz 56 MHz 17MHz
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
V(H)
H(V)
42 MHz
28 MHz
300 MHz
154 MHz
17 MHz 56 MHz 17MHz
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x
42 MHz
28 MHz
Figure 1-54 - U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.385-9 Annex 1)

Table 1.33 - U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.385-9 Annex 1)
1 7442 6598
2 7470 6626
3 7498 6654
4 7526 6682
5 7554 6710
1 7596 6752
2 7624 6780
3 7652 6808
4 7680 6836
5 7708 6864
SRT 1F
1-96 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
300 MHz
161 MHz
154 MHz
17MHz
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
V(H)
H(V)
49
42MHz
MHz
28 MHz
300 MHz
161
154 MHz
MHz
17MHz
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x
49
42MHz
MHz
28 MHz
Figure 1-55 - U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.385-9, 3-7-11-15-19 set)
Table 1.34 - U7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.385-9, 3-7-11-15-19 set)
1 7442 6598
2 7470 6626
3 7498 6654
4 7526 6682
5 7554 6710
1' 7603 6759
2' 7631 6787
3' 7659 6815
4' 7687 6843
5' 7715 6871
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-97
640 MHz
196 MHz 168 MHz
1l 2l 3l 4l 5l 1l 2l 3l 4l 5l 1h 2h 3h 4h 5h 1h 2h 3h 4h 5h
V(H)
H(V)
84 MHz 56 MHz
28 MHz 28 MHz
640 MHz
196 MHz 168 MHz
1l 2l 3l 4l 5l 1l 2l 3l 4l 5l 1h 2h 3h 4h 5h 1h 2h 3h 4h 5h
V(H)
H(V)
1lx 2lx 3lx 4lx 5lx 1lx 2lx 3lx 4lx 5lx 1hx 2hx 3hx 4hx 5hx 1hx 2hx 3hx 4hx 5hx
84 MHz 56 MHz
28 MHz 28 MHz
LOWER UPPER UPPER LOWER
Figure 1-56 - W7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.385-9 Annex 3)
Table 1.35 - W7 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.385-9 Annex 3)
RF RF LO RF RF LO
CH FREQUENCY FREQUENCY CH FREQUENCY FREQUENCY
(MHz) (MHz) (MHz) (MHz)
1l 7121 6277 1h 7457 6613
2l 7149 6305 2h 7485 6641
3l 7177 6333 3h 7513 6669
4l 7205 6361 4h 7541 6697
5l 7233 6389 5h 7569 6725
1l 7317 6473 1h 7625 6781
2l 7345 6501 2h 7653 6809
3l 7373 6529 3h 7681 6837
4l 7401 6557 4h 7709 6865
5l 7429 6585 5h 7737 6893
SRT 1F
1-98 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 1-57 - L8 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.386-8 Annex 6)

Table 1.36 - L8 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.386-8 Annex 6)
1 7747.70 6903.70
2 7777.35 6933.35
3 7807.00 6963.00
4 7836.65 6992.65
5 7866.30 7022.30
6 7895.95 7051.95
7 7925.60 7081.60
8 7955.25 7111.25
1 8059.02 7215.02
2 8088.67 7244.67
3 8118.32 7274.32
4 8147.97 7303.97
5 8177.62 7333.62
6 8207.27 7363.27
7 8236.92 7392.92
8 8266.57 7422.57
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-99
500 MHz
266 MHz
70 MHz
28 MHz
500 MHz
266 MHz
28 MHz
70 MHz
Figure 1-58 8 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.386-8 Annex 3, OIRT)
Table 1.37 8 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.386-8 Annex 3, OIRT)
1 7926 7082
2 7954 7110
3 7982 7138
4 8010 7166
5 8038 7194
6 8066 7222
7 8094 7250
8 8122 7278
1' 8192 7348
2' 8220 7376
3' 8248 7404
4' 8276 7432
5' 8304 7460
6' 8332 7488
7' 8360 7516
8' 8388 7544
SRT 1F
1-100 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1000 MHz
530 MHz
15 MHz 80 MHz 15MHz
1 2 3 4 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 10 11 12
V(H)
H(V)
90 MHz
40 MHz
1000 MHz
530 MHz
15 MHz 80 MHz 15MHz
1 2 3 4 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 10 11 12
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 10x 11x 12x 1x 2x 3x 4x 10x 11x 12x
40 MHz
90 MHz
Figure 1-59 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-10)

Table 1.38 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-10)
1 10715.0 9871.0
2 10755.0 9911.0
3 10795.0 9951.0
4 10835.0 9991.0
5 10875.0 10031.0
6 10915.0 10071.0
7 10955.0 10111.0
8 10995.0 10151.0
9 11035.0 10191.0
10 11075.0 10231.0
11 11115.0 10271.0
12 11155.0 10311.0
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-101
Table 1.38- 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-10) (Continued)

6
1 11245.0 10401.0
2 11285.0 10441.0
3 11325.0 10481.0
4 11365.0 10521.0
5 11405.0 10561.0
6 11445.0 10601.0
7 11485.0 10641.0
8 11525.0 10681.0
9 11565.0 10721.0
10 11605.0 10761.0
11 11645.0 10801.0
12 11685.0 10841.0
SRT 1F
1-102 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1000 MHz
490 MHz
35 MHz 80 MHz 35MHz
1 2 3 4 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 10 11 12
V(H)
H(V)
50 MHz
40 MHz
1000 MHz
490 MHz
35 MHz 80 MHz 35MHz
1 2 3 4 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 10 11 12
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 10x 11x 12x 1x 2x 3x 4x 10x 11x 12x
40 MHz
50 MHz
Figure 1-60 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-10 Annex 2)

Table 1.39 - 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-10 Annex 2)
1 10735.0 9891.0
2 10775.0 9931.0
3 10815.0 9971.0
4 10855.0 10011.0
5 10895.0 10051.0
6 10935.0 10091.0
7 10975.0 10131.0
8 11015.0 10171.0
9 11055.0 10211.0
10 11095.0 10251.0
11 11135.0 10291.0
12 11175.0 10331.0
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-103
Table 1.39- 11 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F. 387-10 Annex 2) (Continued)
6
RF CH RF LO
FREQUENCY(MHz) FREQUENCY(MHz)
1 11225.0 10381.0
2 11265.0 10421.0
3 11305.0 10461.0
4 11345.0 10501.0
5 11385.0 10541.0
6 11425.0 10581.0
7 11465.0 10621.0
8 11505.0 10661.0
9 11545.0 10701.0
10 11585.0 10741.0
11 11625.0 10781.0
12 11665.0 10821.0
SRT 1F
1-104 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
500MHz
266 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V(H)
H(V)
70 MHz
28 MHz
500MHz
266 MHz
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
V(H)
H(V)
1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 8x 1x 2x 3x 4x 5x 6x 7x 8x
70 MHz
28 MHz
Figure 1-61 - 13 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.497-7)

Table 1.40 - 13 GHz Band Frequency Allocation (ITU-R F.497-7)
1 12765 11921
2 12793 11949
3 12821 11977
4 12849 12005
5 12877 12033
6 12905 12061
7 12933 12089
8 12961 12117
1 13031 12187
2 13059 12215
3 13087 12243
4 13115 12271
5 13143 12299
6 13171 12327
7 13199 12355
8 13227 12383
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-105
1.10 Antenna System

A common antenna system is used to transmit and receive. In this case
two (2) antennas per hop are used without space diversity and four (4)
antennas per hop are used with space diversity.
Single-feed antenna is used in case of single-polarized channelling is
adopted and expansibility to use of both polarizations is not required. In
this case, one RF waveguide feeder per antenna is required.
Dual-feed antenna is used for both vertical (V) and horizontal (H)
polarization in case of operation at both polarizations. Dual-feed antenna
may be used also in the case where single-polarized channelling is
adopted, but expansibility to double polarization operation is required.
Two feeders are needed per antenna for the use of V and H polarization.
SRT 1F
1-106 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.11 RF Branching Network

The typical arrangement of loss-equalized RF branching network used by
SRT1F K-shelf for N+1 single-feed operation, N+1 alternate operation
and 2x(N+1) co-channel operation are shown in Figure 1-62 to Figure
6 6
1-67.
As shown in the RF Branching Network pictures, Band Elimination Filter
(BEF) may be required in order to guarantee necessary TX/RX separation
between innermost channels, in case they are used inside the same
antenna branching.
Table 1.41 shows the cases for which the use of BEF is recommended by
6
Nokia Siemens Networks in order to match ETSI requirements about

innermost channels separation. Different use of BEF is recommended
depending on the fact that the innermost channels are used at the same
polarization, or the innermost channels are cross-polarized. It is due to
better separation provided by H/V isolation of double polarization antenna
(assumed 35 dB), with respect of TX/RX separation provided by main
antenna circulator (TX/RX DUP) in case of co-polar innermost channels
(25 dB). Insertion loss of each BEF filter is typically 0.7 dB.
Table 1.41 - Use of BEF for Innermost Channels Separation
Nr. of BEF Nr. of BEF

Innermost innermost innermost Innermost
RF Band co-polar cross-polar
RF spacing channels
RX TX RX TX
U4 GHz F.382-8 68 MHz 1 1 0 0 CH6-CH1'
4 GHz F.635-6 Annex 1 80 MHz 0 0 0 0 CH7-CH1'
5 GHz F.1099-4 Annex 1 60 MHz 1 2 1 2 CH7-CH1'
L6 GHz F.383-8 44.49 MHz 1 2 0 2 CH8-CH1'
U6 GHz F.384-10 60 MHz 1 2 0 2 CH8-CH1'
L7 GHz F.385-9, 2-6-10-14-18 set 49 MHz 1 2 1 2 CH5-CH1'
L7 GHz F.385-9, 3-7-11-15-19 set 49 MHz 1 2 1 2 CH5-CH1'
L7 GHz F.385-9 Annex 3 84 MHz 0 0 0 0 CH5l-CH1'l
U7 GHz F.385-9, 3-7-11-15-19 set 49 MHz 1 2 1 2 CH5-CH1'
U7 GHz F.385-9 Annex 1 42 MHz 1 2 1 2 CH5-CH1'
U7 GHz F.385-9 Annex 3 56 MHz 1 1 1 1 CH5h-CH1'h
L8 GHz F.386-8 Annex 6 103.77 MHz 0 0 0 0 CH8-CH1'
8 GHz F.386-8 Annex 3 - OIRT 70 MHz 1 1 0 0 CH8-CH1'
11 GHz F.387-10 90 MHz 0 0 0 0 CH12-CH1'
11 GHz F.387-10Annex 2 50 MHz 1 2 1 2 CH12-CH1'
13 GHz F.497-7 70 MHz 0 0 0 0 CH8-CH1'
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-107
V(H)
C/W Main
Antenna
CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR
BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP
TX/RX DUP
BEF CH4 CH2 CH3 CH1 CH8 CH6 CH7 CH5

BEF
Receive side
Transmit side
CH8 CH6 CH7 CH5 CH4 CH2 CH3 CH1
Transmit side Receive side
Notes: BP: Band Pass Filter

BEF: Band Elimination Filter
C/W: Coaxial/Waveguide adapter
CIR: Circulator
DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-62 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Single-feed Operation (Main Antenna Part)
SRT 1F
1-108 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
V(H)
CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR C/W SD
Antenna
BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP
RX SD ADPT
CH5 CH7 CH6 CH8

BEF
SD Receive side
CH1 CH3 CH2 CH4
SD Receive side

CIR: Circulator
ADPT: Adapter
Figure 1-63 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Single-feed Operation (Space Diversity Antenna Part)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-109
H(V)
C/W Main
Antenna
V(H)
CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR
BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP
TX/RX DUP
BEF
C/W
CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR
BP BP BP BP TX/RX DUP BP BP BP BP
CH7 CH5 CH3 CH1 Notes: BP: Band Pass Filter BEF
Transmit side BEF: Band Elimination Filter

C/W: Coaxial/Waveguide adapter CH7 CH5 CH3 CH1
CIR: Circulator Receive side

DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-64 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Alternated Operation (Main Antenna Part)
SRT 1F
1-110 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
H(V)
CIR CIR CIR C/W SD
Antenna
V(H)
BP BP BP BP RX SD ADPT
CH2 CH4 CH6 CH8
SD Receive side
CIR CIR CIR C/W
BP BP BP BP RX SD ADPT
BEF Notes: BP: Band Pass Filter

CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7
CIR: Circulator
SD Receive side ADPT: Adaptor
Figure 1-65 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Alternated Operation (Space Diversity Antenna Part)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-111
H(V)
C/W Main
Antenna
V(H)
TX/RX DUP
BEF CH4 CH2 CH3 CH1 CH8 CH6 CH7 CH5

BEF
Receive side
Transmit side
C/W
TX/RX DUP
BEF CH4x CH2x CH3x CH1x CH8x CH6x CH7x CH5x

BEF

CH8 CH6x CH7x CH5x CH4x CH2x CH3x CH1x
x Notes: BP: Band Pass Filter
CIR: Circulator
DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-66 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for 2x(N+1) Co-Channel Operation (Main Antenna Part)
SRT 1F
1-112 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
H(V)
CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR C/W SD
Antenna
V(H)
BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP RX SD ADPT
BEF
SD Receive side SD Receive side
CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR C/W
BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP RX SD ADPT

BEF
CH1x CH3x CH2x CH4x CH5x CH7x CH6x CH8x
CIR: Circulator
SD Receive side SD Receive side ADPT: Adaptor
Figure 1-67 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for 2x(N+1) Co-Channel Operation (Space Diversity Antenna Part)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-113
V(H)
C/W Antenna
#1
CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR CIR
BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP BP
TX/RX DUP

BEF
Receive side
Transmit side
CH4 CH2 CH3 CH1
Receive side

CIR: Circulator
DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-68 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Single-feed Operation with TX+RX SD (Antenna #1 Part)
SRT 1F
1-114 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
V(H)
C/W Antenna
#2
TX/RX DUP
CH8 CH6 CH4 CH2 CH8 CH6 CH7 CH5 BEF
SD Receive side
Transmit side
CH4 CH2 CH3 CH1
SD Receive side

CIR: Circulator
DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-69 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Single-feed Operation with TX+RX SD (Antenna #2 Part)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-115
H(V)
C/W Antenna
#1
V(H)
CIR CIR CIR CIR
BP BP BP BP BP BP
TX/RX DUP
CH4 CH2 CH8 CH6 CH4 CH2
C/W
CIR CIR CIR CIR
BP BP TX/RX DUP BP BP BP BP
CH3 CH1 Notes: BP: Band Pass Filter BEF

CIR: Circulator Receive side

DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-70 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Alternated Operation with TX+RX SD (Antenna #1 Part)
SRT 1F
1-116 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
H(V)
C/W Antenna
#2
V(H)
CIR CIR CIR CIR
BP BP BP BP BP BP
TX/RX DUP
CH8 CH6 CH8 CH6 CH4 CH2
Transmit side SD Receive side
C/W
CIR CIR CIR CIR
BP BP TX/RX DUP BP BP BP BP
CH7 CH5 Notes: BP: Band Pass Filter BEF

CIR: Circulator SD Receive side

DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-71 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for N+1 Alternated Operation with TX+RX SD (Antenna #2 Part)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-117
H(V)
C/W Antenna
#1
V(H)
TX/RX DUP

BEF
Receive side
Transmit side
CH4 CH2 CH3 CH1
Receive side
C/W
TX/RX DUP
CH7x CH5x CH3x CH1x CH8x CH6x CH7x CH5x

BEF

CH4x CH2x CH3x CH1x
Receive side
CIR: Circulator
DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-72 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for 2x(N+1) Co-Channel Operation with TX+RX SD (Antenna #1
Part)
SRT 1F
1-118 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
H(V)
C/W Antenna
#2
V(H)
TX/RX DUP
BEF CH8 CH6 CH7 CH5

BEF
SD Receive side
C/W
TX/RX DUP
BEF CH8x CH6x CH7x CH5x

BEF
SD Receive side
CH8 CH6x CH4x CH2x CH4x CH2x CH3x CH1x
x Notes: BP: Band Pass Filter
CIR: Circulator
DUP: Duplexer
Figure 1-73 - Typical Loss Equalized RF Branching Network Configuration for 2x(N+1) Co-Channel Operation with TX+RX SD (Antenna #2
Part)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-119
A different discussion shall be made for SRT1F 1+1 N.E. model. From
physical restriction, basically, the compact shelf for 1+1 N.E. can equip
maximum three (3) filter bodies, each one including a pair of two
frequency channels. Figure 1-74 shows BRU configuration in case of AP
6
single-polarized channels. In this case the branching philosophy is the

same as K-shelf model. Figure 1-75 and Figure 1-76 show BRU
6 6
configuration in case of dual-polarized channels, AP or CC. In this case,

the branching philosophy is different, since TX and RX side of the same
channel are coupled in the same filter before being forwarded to the
antenna port.
Assumed: Prot = CH1 (V) / M1 = CH3 (V)

Non-SD model SD model
R T DUP TRD SD R T DUP
(V) (V) (V)
1 1 1 1 1
(V) (V) (V) (V) (V)
C C C C C
3 3 3 3 3
(V) (V) (V) (V) (V)
R T SD R T
Figure 1-74 - 1+1 N.E. AP Single Polarization
Assumed: Prot = CH1 (V) / M1 = CH3 (H)

DUP T T DUP DUP SD T T DUP
(H) (V) (H) (V)
3
3 1 (H) 3 1
(H) (V) (H) (V)
C
C C C C
C
3 1 3 1
(H) (V) 1 (H) (V)
TRD (V) TRD
(H) (V)
R R SD R R
Figure 1-75 - 1+1 N.E. AP Double Polarization
SRT 1F
1-120 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Assumed: Prot = CH1 (V) / M1 = CH1 (H)

DUP T T DUP DUP SD T T DUP
(H) (V) (H) (V)
1
1 1 (H) 1 1
(H) (V) (H) (V)
C
C C C C
C
1 1 1 1
(H) (V) 1 (H) (V)
TRD (V) TRD
(H) (V)
R R SD R R
Figure 1-76 - 1+1 N.E. CC Double Polarization
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-121
1.11.1 Loss Equalized RF Branching Network
Insertion loss of RF branching network is specified using loss equalized

RF branching network configuration model as defined by Radio Building
Blocks (ETSI standard).
Please refer to Figure 1-77 and Figure 1-78 for equalized loss branching
6 6
block diagram of the system for configurations 1+1 and 3+1, respectively.
Equalized loss branching block diagrams for other configurations follow
same criterion. Besides the ETSI standard points A/A, B/B and C/C,
even points / and / have been indicated for reference.
Antenna Port
ref. C/C
DUP
ref. ' ref.

DL CIR DL CIR
ref. B' ref. B
BPF BPF BPF BPF
ref. 2' ref. 2
ref. 1' adpt adpt adpt adpt ref. 1
ref. A' ref. A
MSTU MSTU MSTU MSTU
M1 PROT PROT M1
Transmit Side Receive Side
MSTU: Transceiver Unit

adpt: MSTU adaptor
BPF: Band Pass Filter
CIR: channel circulator
DUP: TX/RX antenna circulator
DL: Dummy load (termination)
Figure 1-77 - Loss equalized RF branching network for 1+1 protection system
SRT 1F
1-122 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Antenna Port
ref. C/C
DUP
ref. ' ref.

CIR CIR CIR CIR
DL DL ref. B
ref. B'
BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF BPF
ref. 2' ref. 2
ref. 1' adpt adpt adpt adpt adpt adpt adpt adpt ref. 1
ref. A' ref. A
MSTU MSTU MSTU MSTU MSTU MSTU MSTU MSTU
M3 M2 M1 PROT PROT M1 M2 M3
Transmit Side Receive Side
MSTU: Transceiver Unit

adpt: MSTU adaptor
BPF: Band Pass Filter
CIR: channel circulator
DUP: TX/RX antenna circulator
DL: Dummy load (termination)
Figure 1-78 - Loss equalized RF branching network for 3+1 protection system
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-123
1.11.2 Channel Filter Insertion loss
This paragraph provides insertion loss information in order to calculate

system performances parameters at point B-B starting from system
performances parameters at point A-A.
The following table shows the calculation of TX loss between points A
and B, obtained as sum between the MSTU adapter loss (TX side) and
filter insertion loss.
4 U4 5 L6 U6 L7 U7 L8 11 13
MSTU adaptor TX loss (A-1) 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.45 0.50 0.55 0.60 0.65 0.70 0.80
Cable loss (12) 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.50 0.60
BPF Filter Insertion loss (2-B) 0.60 0.80 0.90 0.85 0.90 1.25 1.20 1.15 1.20 1.50
TX Loss (A-B) 1.2 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 2.2 2.2 2.2 2.4 2.9
The following table shows the calculation of RX loss between points A

and B, obtained as sum between the MSTU adapter loss (RX side) and
filter insertion loss.
4 U4 5 L6 U6 L7 U7 L8 11 13
MSTU adaptor RX loss (A-1) 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.55 0.70 0.65 0.70 0.85 0.80 1.00
Cable loss (12) 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.40 0.40 0.40 0.50 0.60
BPF Filter Insertion loss (2-B) 0.60 0.80 0.90 0.85 0.90 1.25 1.20 1.15 1.20 1.50
RX Loss (A-B) 1.3 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.9 2.3 2.3 2.4 2.5 3.1
The following table shows CIR channel circulator loss, useful to calculate
the power level at point B/B starting from monitoring point /.
4 U4 5 L6 U6 L7 U7 L8 11 13
CIR channel circulator loss (B-) 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
CIR channel circulator loss (B-) 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6
SRT 1F
1-124 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
1.11.3 Branching losses
This paragraph provides information about total branching loss (Tx + Rx)
calculated from points A and A including antenna circulators.
Total Branching Loss =
= Transmit side loss (Reference A - Reference B - Reference C) +
+ Receive side loss (Reference B - Reference A - Reference C)
Branching loss calculation is based on the loss equalized RF branching
network model in accordance with Figure 1-77 and Figure 1-78. In case
6 6
that not loss equalized RF branching network or not Nokia Siemens

Networks recommended RF channel allocation rule is applied, insertion
loss should be calculated individually.
In case of use of innermost RF channels, BEF should be added for the
innermost RF channels, according to Table 1.41. In this case, the
6
insertion loss for the innermost RF channels shall be increased by BEF

loss (0.7 dB per each BEF filter).
1.11.3.1 Branching losses in K-shelf configuration

K-shelf branching losses depend on the maximum number of channels in
the same polarization. In Table 1.42 Np is the maximum number of
67
channels in the same polarization.
Table 1.42 - K-shelf Branching Losses
Np 4 U4 5 L6 U6 L7 U7 L8 11 13
1 4.3 4.7 5.0 5.4 5.6 6.7 6.8 6.8 7.6 8.9
2 4.3 4.7 5.0 5.4 5.6 6.7 6.8 6.8 7.6 8.9
3 5.5 5.9 6.1 6.5 6.8 7.9 7.9 8.0 8.8 10.1
4 5.5 5.9 6.1 6.5 6.8 7.9 7.9 8.0 8.8 10.1
5 6.2 6.6 6.9 7.2 7.5 8.7 8.5 8.8 9.8 10.9
6 6.2 7.4 6.9 7.2 7.5 - - 8.8 9.8 10.9
7 7.2 - 7.6 8.2 8.5 - - 9.8 10.5 11.8
8 - - - 8.2 8.5 - - 9.8 10.5 11.8
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 1-125
1.11.3.2 Branching losses in 1+1 Not Expansible

Table 1.43 shows the branching losses in case of 1+1 N.E. model.
67
Table 1.43 -1+1 N.E. Branching Losses
4 U4 5 L6 U6 L7 U7 L8 11 13
1+0
1+1 4.2 4.2 4.5 4.8 4.9 6.0 6.0 6.5 6.8 8.4
2+0
SRT 1F
1-126 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
2 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION
2.1 System
The SRT 1F radio equipment is designed to transmit STM-1
(155.520 Mb/s) signals. The SRT is equipped with N+1 Radio Protection
System (RPS).
housed in one rack
The available configurations can be grouped into 7 classes. The following
diagram shows such classification. All the configurations are available at
all bands, with or without Space Diversity, with HP (High Power) or NP
(Normal Power) transceivers (where applicable).
All the below configurations are available as ACAP, ACCP and CCDP.
The configurations N+0 and 2x(N+0) can be considered as particular
cases of the N+1 and 2x(N+1) reported below.
Table 2.1 - Classification of available configurations for SRT 1F

Version Interface
Electrical (STI)
STM-1 Optical
STM-1 Optical
GigaEth El. /
GigaEth El. /
Opt. (DTI)
Opt. (STI)
Ref. Configuration Description
1+1 N.E.
K-shelf
STM-1
(DTI)
(STI)
Figure 1-4
57 N+1 Terminal (N < 8) x x x x x x
Figure 1-5
57 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 4) on one rack x x x x x x
Figure 1-6
57 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (3 < N < 8) on one x x x x x x
rack
Figure 1-7
57 2x(N+1) Single Terminal (N < 8) on two x x x x x x
racks
2x(N+1) Double Terminal (N < 4) on one
Figure 1-9 x x x x x x
rack
57
Figure 1-10 2x(N+1) Double Terminal (3 < N < 8) on one x x x x x x

rack
Figure 1-11
57 1+1 N.E. (Not Expandible) x x x
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-1
2. EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION UMN
SRT 1F K-shelf model is composed by the following parts/shelves:

K-shelf up to 7+1: Includes RF Branching Network, MSTU section,
SCS section, User Interface Area (UIA) in a single compact shelf,
1155mm high. It can be used in conjunction with MCF/Controller card
for single RPS protection, for N+1 terminal in one rack, N<8. Or in
conjunction with MCF/Controller card for double RPS protection, for
2x(N+1) single terminal in two racks, N<8.
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST: Includes RF Branching Network, MSTU
section, SCS section, User Interface Area (UIA) in a single compact
shelf, 1155mm high. It can be used in conjunction with MCF/Controller
card for double RPS protection, for 2x(N+1) single terminal in one
rack, N<4.
Expansion K-shelf ST: Includes RF Branching Network, MSTU
shelf, 930mm high. It can be used in conjunction with K-shelf up to
2x(3+1) ST, for 2x(N+1) single terminal in one rack, 3<N<8.
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT: Includes RF Branching Network, MSTU
shelf, 1155mm high. It can be used in conjunction with up to two
MCF/Controller cards for single RPS protection, for 2x(N+1) double
terminal in one rack, N<4.
Expansion K-shelf DT: Includes RF Branching Network, MSTU
shelf, 930mm high. It can be used in conjunction with K-shelf up to
2x(3+1) DT, for 2x(N+1) double terminal in one rack, 3<N<8.
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model is composed by the following parts:
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. shelf: includes all the functional blocks installed in a
single shelf, 503mm high (588mm including BRU C/W adapters).
Please refer to Chapter 1 for standard equipment rack and shelf layout of
SRT 1F system.
SRT 1F
2-2 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.2 Alternated and Co-channel Operation

The SRT 1F can provide frequency allocation as follows:
Alternated operation:
An STM-1 signal is transmitted by an RF frequency using an only
polarization. Even channels and odd channels shall use opposite
polarization
Co-channel operation:
Up to two STM-1 signals can be transmitted simultaneously by an RF
frequency using dual polarization (CCDP), thus doubling the spectrum
efficiency. The transmission capacity of Way side and User channel
will be doubled through CCDP operation.
2.3 Baseband Interface
2.3.1 K-shelf
The following types of baseband interface are available for SRT 1F K-

shelf:
STM-1 BSW Electrical with STI (Single Tributary Interface): STM-1
Electrical Interface by means of BSW Electrical is the standard
interface for SRT 1F system. Figure 2-1 shows the block diagram.
67
STM-1 BSW Optical with STI (Single Tributary Interface): STM-1

Optical Interface can be provided by equipping BSW Optical with
proper SFP module (S-1.1 or L-1.1) in alternative to BSW Electrical.
Also mixed equipping of BSW Electrical and BSW Optical in the same
terminal is possible. Figure 2-1 shows the block diagram.
67
STM-1 BSW Optical with DTI (Double Tributary Interface): STM-1

Optical Interface with 1+1 DTI line protection can be provided by
equipping BSW Optical 1+1 DTI with proper SFP module (S-1.1 or L-
1.1). Also mixed equipping of BSW Electrical and BSW Optical (STI
and/or DTI) in the same terminal is possible. Figure 2-2 shows the
67
block diagram.
Gigabit Ethernet BSW with STI (Single Tributary Interface):
GigaEthernet interface with 1xSTM-1 EoS (Ethernet over SDH)
proprietary mapping can be provided by equipping BSW GE with
proper SFP module (1000Base-T or 1000Base-SX or 1000Base-LX).
Also mixed equipping of STM-1 BSW (Electrical and/or Optical) and
BSW GigaEthernet in the same terminal is possible. Figure 2-3 shows
the block diagram.
Gigabit Ethernet Multi-Link Operation with DTI (Double Tributary
Interface): GigaEthernet interface with NxSTM-1 Multi-Link EoS
(Ethernet over SDH) proprietary mapping can be provided by
equipping GE ML set with proper SFP module (1000Base-T or
1000Base-SX or 1000Base-LX). Also mixed equipping of BSW (STM-
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-3
1 Electrical and/or STM-1 Optical and/or GigaEthernet) and GE ML in

the same terminal is possible. Figure 2-4 shows the block diagram.
The following optional cards are available for Occasional Traffic interface:
Occasional Interface STM-1 Electrical STI (OCC)
Occasional Interface STM-1 Optical STI (OPT OCC STI)
Occasional Interface STM-1 Optical DTI (OPT OCC DTI)
Occasional Interface Gigabit Ethernet STI (GE OCC STI)
Occasional Interface for Gigabit Ethernet Multi-Link DTI (GE ML
ADPT OCC)
SRT 1F
2-4 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
DUP
TDP USW MOD TX BPF

STM-1
Prot CH CMI
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
STM-1
Electrical MSTU
or
Optical
Main 1 STM-1 BSW TDP USW MOD TX BPF
Electrical
or
Optical RDP USW DEM RX BPF
WS R,S
UC(F1) MSTU

Electrical
or
WS R,S
UC(F1) MSTU

Electrical
or
WS R,S
UC(F1) MSTU
BRU
WS R,S
to/from Main N STM-1 Unipolar

STM-1 CMI
RUC 1,2
EOW 2W (E1,E2)
EOW 4W (E1,E2) NOTE :
Q interface
Housekeeping DI BRU : Branching Network Unit
DO
MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit
SCSU : Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit
WST : 75 ohm or 120 ohm
LCT
EXT CLK OUT
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK MON
SCSU
Figure 2-1 - Block Diagram of SRT 1F Terminal without SD in case of

STM-1 Interface Electrical or Optical (STI)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-5
DUP
TDP USW MOD TX BPF

STM-1
Prot CH CMI
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
STM-1
MSTU
Optical
Optical
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
WS R,S MSTU
Optical
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
WS R,S MSTU
Optical
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
WS R,S MSTU
BRU
WS R,S

STM-1 CMI
RUC 1,2
EOW 2W (E1,E2)
Q interface
DO
WST : 120 ohm.
For the 75 ohm install the HK Conv. unit
LCT
EXT CLK OUT
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK MON
SCSU

STM-1 Interface Optical (DTI)
SRT 1F
2-6 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
DUP
TDP USW MOD TX BPF

STM-1
Prot CH CMI
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
GigaEthernet
Electrical
MSTU
or
Optical
Giga
Main 1 TDP USW MOD TX BPF
Ethernet BSW
GE
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
WS R,S
MSTU
Giga
Ethernet BSW
GE
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
WS R,S MSTU
Giga
Ethernet BSW
GE
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
WS R,S
MSTU
BRU
WS R,S
RUC 1,2
EOW 2W (E1,E2)
Q interface
DO
WST : 120 ohm.
LCT
EXT CLK OUT
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK MON
SCSU

GigaEthernet Interface Electrical or Optical (STI)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-7
DUP
TDP USW MOD TX BPF

GE ML
ADPT RDP USW DEM RX BPF
OCC
MSTU
Main 1
TDP USW MOD TX BPF
Giga GE MLM
Ethernet RDP USW DEM RX BPF
WS R,S
MSTU
TDP USW MOD TX BPF
GE MLS
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
MSTU
TDP USW MOD TX BPF
GE ML
ADPT RDP USW DEM RX BPF
to/from
Other GE ML ADPT
MSTU
BRU
Unipolar Data
RUC 1,2 No use
EOW 2W (E1,E2)
EOW 4W (E1,E2)
Q interface
Housekeeping DI NOTE:
DO BRU : Branching Network Unit
WST : 120 ohm. Not protected.
LCT
EXT CLK OUT
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK MON
SCSU

GigaEthernet Multi-Link operation (DTI)
SRT 1F
2-8 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.3.2 1+1 N.E. model
Two types of baseband interface are available for SRT 1F 1+1 N.E.:
SE INTF (BSW Electrical): STM-1 Electrical Interface by means of
BSW Electrical is the standard interface for SRT 1F system. The BSW
Electrical is the same card as K-shelf model. Figure 2-5 shows the
67
block diagram.
OPT INTF without MSP (OPT CONV, Optical Interface Converter):
STM-1 Optical Interface without optical line protection (MSP) can be
provided by equipping proper OPT CONV card in conjunction with
BSW Electrical. OPT CONV is an optional card dedicated for use with
1+1 N.E. model which acts as a media converter of the STM-1 signal
interface from Electrical to Optical and vice-versa. Figure 2-6 shows
67
the block diagram.

The following optional cards are available for Occasional Traffic interface:
Occasional Interface Electrical (OCC), same card as K-shelf system
Occasional Interface Optical for 1+1 N.E. (OCC O), card dedicated
for use with 1+1 N.E. model
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-9
DUP
TDP USW MOD TX BPF DUP
Prot STM-1 CMI

CH RDP USW DEM RX BPF
STM-1
Electrical MSTU

STM-1 BSW
CMI Electrical RDP USW DEM RX BPF
WS R,S
UC(F1) MSTU
BRU
RUC 1,2 NOTE :

EOW 2W (E1,E2)
BRU : Branching Network Unit
EOW 4W (E1,E2)
Q interface MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit
Housekeeping DI
DO
LCT
EXT CLK OUT
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK MON
Figure 2-5 - Block Diagram of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Terminal single polarization without SD in
case of STM-1 Electrical Interface
SRT 1F
2-10 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
DUP
TDP USW MOD TX BPF
Prot STM-1 CMI MOD

STM-1 CH RDP USW DEM RX BPF
Optical DEM
MSTU
STM-1
OPT CMI BSW
MOD
CONV Electrical
RDP USW DEM RX BPF
WS R,S DEM BPF

UC(F1) BSW MSTU
BRU
RUC 1,2 NOTE :

EOW 2W (E1,E2) BRU : Branching Network Unit
EOW 4W (E1,E2)
Q interface MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit
Housekeeping DI
DO
LCT
EXT CLK OUT
EXT CLK IN
EQPT CLK MON
Figure 2-6 - Block Diagram of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Terminal single polarization without SD in
case of STM-1 Optical Interface
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-11
2.4 STM-1 Signal Transmission

Reference shall be made to block diagrams from Figure 2-1 to Figure 2-6.
67 67
2.4.1 STM-1 Signal Interface
SCSU
In case of BSW (Bipolar Switch) STM-1 Electrical unit, the STM-1
Electrical signal input/output terminals are located on the front panel of
the BSW unit on the SCSU (Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit). The
BSW STM-1 Electrical card forwards the STM-1 CMI electrical signal to
the relevant MSTU.
In case of BSW (Bipolar Switch) STM-1 Optical unit (STI or DTI), the
STM-1 Optical signal input/output terminals are located on the dedicated
SFP module equipped on the front panel of the BSW unit on the SCSU
(Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit). The BSW STM-1 Optical
converts the STM-1 optical signal into STM-1 CMI electrical signal and
forwards it to the relevant MSTU.
2.4.2 Gigabit Ethernet Signal Interface
In case of BSW (Bipolar Switch) GigaEthernet unit equipped in SRT1F,

the GigaEthernet (Electrical or Optical) signal input/output terminals are
located on the dedicated SFP module on the front panel of the BSW GE
on the SCSU (Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit). The BSW GE card
converts the GigaEthernet signal into 1xSTM-1 CMI stream which is
forwarded to the relevant MSTU.
In case of GigaEthernet ML (Multi-Link) set equipped in SRT1F, the
GigaEthernet (Electrical or Optical) signal input/output terminals are
located on the dedicated SFP module on the front panel of the GE MLM
(Master) on the SCSU (Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit). The GE
ML set converts the GigaEthernet signal into NxSTM-1 CMI streams
which are forwarded to the relevant MSTUs set.
SRT 1F
2-12 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.4.3 Main Signal Flow (MSTU Function)
The MSTU (Main Signal Transmission Unit) is composed of Transmitter

(TX), Receiver (RX), Modulator (MOD), Demodulator (DEM) and STM-1
Electrical interface (SE INTF) functions. The Unipolar Switch (USW) for
the Radio Protection System (RPS) is also a part of the MSTU.
SE INTF
The STM-1 CMI signal inputs from the SCSU. The incoming STM-1 CMI
signal is converted into eight (8) streams of unipolar 19.440Mbps data,
which are applied to the Transmit Data Processing (TDP) circuit.
TDP
The TDP circuit processes drop/insert the Multiplex Section Overhead
(MSOH) and Regenerator Section Overhead (RSOH) to be terminated
from the STM-1 data. The AU-Pointer is also re-written. A Unipolar Switch
(USW) provides hitless switching for the Radio Protection System. After
the USW, the Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) is
applied to the incoming STM-1 signal to compose the Radio Frame. The
RFCOH is composed of Radio Frame Alignment, Wayside, Radio User
Channel, RPS Control, Redundancy bit for MLCM and other signals.
Multi-Level Coded Modulation (MLCM) is provided to perform forward
error correction on the data to transmit across the radio section.
QAM MOD Module

The Radio Frame inputs the QAM Modulator Module (QAM MOD
Module). The QAM MOD Module is composed of a spectrum shaping
device and a Modulator controller (MOD), the Digital to Analog converter
(D/A) and the Quadrature Amplitude Modulator (QAM) to generate the
QAM signal. The QAM MOD Module output is applied to the Transmit IF
(TIF) circuit.
TIF
The incoming QAM signal is converted to the 1st IF (70MHz) signal. The
1st IF signal is amplified by the AGC amplifier, then applied to the
Linearizer (LNZ). The LNZ works to compensate the distortion which is
caused by the non-linearity of the RF transmit circuit. The 1st IF signal is
converted to the 2nd IF (844MHz) signal, then applied to the Transmit RF
Module (TRF Module).
TRF Module
The TRF accepts the 2nd IF and converts it to the Radio Frequency (RF)
by mixing it with the signal coming from the Local Oscillator Module (LO
Module). The RF signal is amplified through RF amplifiers. The MSTU
output level is +29 dBm (+ 27 dBm for 13 GHz). It is controlled by the
Automatic Level Control (ALC) which keeps it constant against input
signal level, amplifier gain and other ambient factor variations. High
power version transmitting +32dBm is available from 4 GHz to 8 GHz.
Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) can automatically control the
MSTU output power between PtxMAX and PtxMIN = PtxMAX 10 dB based
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-13
on the propagation loss across the radio section. The ATPC automatically
changes the MSTU output level back to HIGH when the RX receiving
level becomes lower than the specified level. ATPC is an option setting
through the LCT. This function is provided to save the power drained by
the MSTU and improve possible interference on adjacent frequency
channels and opposite polarization. ATPC function may be disabled. In
this case, the output power may be fixed to PtxMAX (ATPC OFF) or to
PtxMIN (ATPC LOW) without taking care of the propagation conditions.
The MSTU output is applied to the Branching Network Unit (BRU), then to
the antenna. The spurious emission of the transmitter is suppressed by
the BRUs Band-Pass Filter (BPF) and by the Band Elimination Filter
(BEF) for Innermost channels separation, if required.
LO Module
The LO Module is a phase-locked loop oscillator circuit supplying the RF
Local signals to the Transmitter and Receiver. The oscillation frequency
setting is based on MSTU operation frequency.
RRF Module
The Receive RF Module (RRF Module) accepts the received RF signal
from the antenna through BRU. Receiver selectivity is determined by the
BRUs BPF and by BEF, if required.
The received RF signal (standard level : - 35 dBm, AGC dynamic range:
- 17 dBm to - 70s dBm) is amplified by a Low Noise Amplifier (LNA), then
converted to the 2nd IF (844MHz). The 2nd IF signal is amplified and
applied to the Receive IF (RIF) circuit.
RIF
The 2nd IF signal is amplified by the AGC amplifier, then converted to the
1st IF (70MHz). The 1st IF signal is applied to the DEM circuit. The Rx
amplifiers are Automatically Gain Controlled (AGC) to maintain the 1st IF
output level constant against large variations of the RF Rx level at the
MSTU input.
AGC current of Main 1 channel can be monitored through proper
connector on the backplane of SCSU section for testing and maintenance
service.
The Mixer (MIX) converts the 1st IF signal down to the QAM signal and
applies it to the QAM Demodulator Modulate (QAM DEM Module).
QAM DEM Module

The QAM DEM Module is composed of the QAM demodulator, the Analog
to Digital converter (A/D), the Demodulator controller (DEM), the
spectrum shaping device and the Transversal Equalizer (TVE) with
Decision Feedback Equalizer (DFE).
The spectrum shaping device shares spectrum shaping function with the
QAM MOD Module of the transmitter side.
The TVE with DFE equalizes waveform distortion caused by multi-path
fading in the baseband time domain. The radio frame baseband clock
signal is recovered from the received IF signal by the QAM DEM Module.
SRT 1F
2-14 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
The output of QAM DEM Module, the radio frame baseband signal and
the clock signal, are sent to the Receive Data Processing (RDP) circuit.
RDP
The first stage of the RDP is the MLCM decoder. Forward error correction
consists in checking redundancy bits contained in the radio frame. Radio
parity (RP) bits before error correction, part of the MLCM redundancy bits,
are detected to monitor the error performance across the radio section
from the modulator to the demodulator.
RP Bit Error Ratio deterioration (BER-ALM) is one of the automatic USW
operation factors. Another automatic USW operation factor is frame
synchronization loss (LOF) on the radio frame.
The RFCOH is extracted to regenerate the STM-1 signal.
The RPS function at the receiver end is performed by the USW. The
USW can hitless switch in case of manual operation and most of the
automatic operation caused by ordinary fading.
MSOH and RSOH drop/insert and AU-Pointer rewriting are carried out
and the eight (8) unipolar streams are converted intto an STM-1 CMI
signal, which is forwarded to the BSW unit of the SCSU.
The BSW provides hitless switch towards the protection channel in case
of hardware failure. Further, it isolates the channel to be tested during
maintenance service.
2.4.4 RX Space Diversity
As a counter measure to severe propagation path conditions, Space

Diversity (SD) reception is provided as standard function, provided that
the Branching network section is equipped with the necessary adaptors
and filters for Space Diversity part. Also in field upgrade from without SD
to with SD is possible without any HW change, just equipping the
missing items in the Branching network section. Enable or disable the SD
function is to be set through the LCT.
Figure 2-7 shows the block diagram of RF/IF section of MSTU and BRU
67
applied for SD reception.

The MSTU is equipped with two sets of receiver. One receiver (Main
receiver) is connected to the Main antenna (upper) and the other one (SD
receiver) is connected to the SD antenna (lower).
Two receiver outputs are combined together after phase synchronization.
Phase synchronization is achieved by controlling the 2nd IF local carrier to
SD receiver through the Endless Phase Shifter (EPS). The combining
ratio of two receiver outputs is controlled through algorithms to optimize
transmission performance.
The SD system can improve the Carrier to Noise Ratio (C/N) up to 3 dB
during the stable propagation condition period, and remarkably reduce
the possibility of outage due to multi-path fading.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-15
to/from From
Main Antenna SD Antenna
DUP
MOD MIX IFA LNZ MIX FIL MIX AMP BPF
BPF
st nd TXPL
1 IF 2 IF RF
LOC LOC LOC
EPS RXPL
DEM MIX DELA HYB MIX AMP MIX LNA BPF

Y EQL
MIX AMP MIX LNA BPF

IF
MSTU
DADE
Prot
MOD MIX IFA LNZ MIX FIL MIX AMP
st nd TXPL
1 IF 2 IF RF
LOC LOC LOC
EPS RXPL
BPF
DEM MIX DELA HYB MIX AMP MIX LNA
Y EQL
BPF
MIX AMP MIX LNA
IF
MSTU
DADE
Main 1 BRU
MOD : Modulator LNA : Low Noise Amplifier

IFA : IF Amplifier HYB : Hybrid as IF Combiner
LNZ : Linearizer IF DADE : Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer (adjustable)
MIX : Mixer as Freq. Converter DELAY EQL : Delay Equalizer (adjustable)
FIL : Filter DEM : Demodulator
AMP : RF Amplifier LOC : Local Oscillator
EPS : Endless Phase Shifter TX/RX PLO : Phase Locked Loop Oscillator
Figure 2-7 - Block Diagram of Space Diversity Reception
SRT 1F
2-16 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.4.5 TX+RX Space Diversity
As a further counter measure to severe propagation path conditions, even

transmit diversity is possible, meaning that some TX channels are
transmitted by the diversity antenna by proper branching arrangement
(see Figure 2-8).
67
Figure 2-8 - Concept of RX and TX+RX Space Diversity
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-17
2.4.6 MSTU Front Panel
Figure 2-9 shows the front panel of MSTU unit.

67
Table 2.2 shows the functions of MSTU front panel.

67
Table 2.2 - Functions of MSTU Front Panel

No. Item Function
(1) FAN 4 cooling fans for transmitter.
(2) FAN PWR Power cable connector for cooling fans
(3) POWER ON/OFF DC power supply switch for MSTU unit
(4) TX LO MON Monitor terminal for TX local frequency
(5) 70M IN 70 MHz test input terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement
(6) REF I/O In/out terminal for RX local reference signal of Co-channel operation
OUT (master) or IN (slave) selection is made through the LCT.
(7) 70M OUT MN 70 MHz test output terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement of Main/SD
70M OUT SD antenna reception
(8) DADE DADE for Main/SD antenna waveguide length difference
(9) D-EQL Delay equalizer for branching network
(10) XPIC OUT XPIC output terminal for Co-channel operation
(master) Combined IF signal of Main/SD is available at this terminal
(11) XPIC IN (slave) XPIC input terminal for Co-channel operation
(12) INCR Analog level setting of MSTU (Factory use only)
DECR
Keep ITEM No. = 0, and use a LCT terminal for maintenance
ITEM No.
(13) LED indicator Alarm/status indicator :
UNIT/RCI Normal = green(*), Unit failure = red on, RCI = red blinking
LINE Normal = green(*), Line failure = red on
* : Green for mode 2 or Yellow for mode 1 is selectable via the LCT.
SRT 1F
2-18 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
(1) FAN
70M IN (5)
(2) FAN PWR
REF I/O (6)
70M OUT MN
ON (7)
70M OUT SD
(3) POWER ON/OFF
OFF
DADE (8)
D-EQL (9)
(4) TX F MON
XPIC OUT (10)

XPIC IN (11)
INCR
DECR (12) Factory use only.
ITEM No. must be 0
ITEM No.
for normal operation.
UNIT/RCI (13)
LINE
Figure 2-9 - Front Panel of MSTU unit
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-19
2.4.6.1 Top View of MSTU Adapter

In K-shelf version, the RF output/input connectors from/to MSTU unit are
located at the top of each MSTU unit and are mounted on the MSTU
plug-in adapter, which acts as an intermediate device between MSTU and
RF channel filter.
Figure 2-10 shows the upper view of MSTU adapter used in K-shelf.
67
SMA Connector
TX RX SD
TX port: Transmitter output

RX port: Main RX input
SD port: SD RX input
Figure 2-10 - Upper View of MSTU Adapter in K-shelf
SRT 1F
2-20 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.4.7 Co-Channel Operation
The Co-channel frequency operation system can transmit two STM-1

signals per RF simultaneously by using same RF frequency carrier both
V- and H- polarization. This operation is able to double the spectrum
efficiency.
For Co-channel operation, SRT 1F has following features:
Powerful XPIC (Cross Polarization Interference Canceller) function
XPIC equalizer is mounted inside the MSTU. MSTU is available in
both versions with and without XPIC. In case of need to upgrade an
MSTU without XPIC into MSTU with XPIC by adding XPIC function,
this operation can be done at factory.
Receiver RF local oscillator synchronization
Synchronization between H- and V-polarization for each RF channel
2.4.7.1 Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC)

The XPIC is provided to improve the interference distortion caused by
antenna Cross Polarization Interference (XPD) between V-polarization
and H-polarization.
For Co-channel operation, high Cross Polarization Discrimination (XPD)
antennas are generally used. However, cross polarization interference
cannot be compensated only by high XPD antenna because XPD
degradation due to propagation path at the presence of multi-path fading
is also considered.
Therefore in addition to high XPD antenna use, Cross Polarization
Interference Canceller is essentially required.
The XPIC of SRT 1F system is an adaptive interference cancellation
circuit using 11-tap transversal equalizer. Two (2) receivers of same radio
frequency receive the mixture of desired and undesired (interference)
signal components and extract their interfered signals each other and
subtracts from the received signal after automatic adaptive
amplitude/phase adjustment.
Figure 2-11 shows the functional diagram of XPIC and Figure 2-12 shows
67 67
the cross cable connection of MSTUs.
2.4.7.2 Receive Local Carrier Oscillator

Two (2) receivers of same frequency shall be supplied with local carrier
signals synchronized each other. A cable connection to/from REF I/O of
two MSTUs is required and the baseband clock signals are synchronized
each other by software setting.
2.4.7.3 Route ID
Different route Identification (Route ID) for radio section shall be set for
securing the signal identification between V-polarization and H-
polarization.
2.4.7.4 Master/Slave setting

Master/Slave setting of MSTU is carried out through the LCT.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-21
Desired signal
Transmitter X LOC Receiver X LOC
REF I/O XPIC OUT IF LOC

70 MHz
XPIC
Interference RF LOC XPIC IN
XPIC
XPIC OUT
REF I/O 70 MHz IF LOC
Desired signal
Transmitter Y LOC Receiver Y LOC
Figure 2-11 - XPIC Block Diagram
REF I/O (RF

LOC)
XPIC IN (70 MHz)

XPIC OUT (70 MHz)
Figure 2-12 - Cable inter-connections for co-channel MSTUs
SRT 1F
2-22 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.5 Auxiliary Service Channels

In addition to the main signal (STM-1 signal), the SRT 1F system can also
transmit several auxiliary service signals.
Some signals are accessible for users utilization through the connectors
in the connection area on the SCSU. Some signals are exclusively used
by the SRT 1F to control the SRT 1F system itself.
The following auxiliary service signals for users utilization are available:
Transmitted by STM-1 SOH (Section Overhead)

Two Engineering Orderwires per system (available as standard)
One Wayside Traffic per STM-1 (available as standard) 4
One User Channel per STM-1 (available as standard) 5
Transmitted by RFCOH (Radio Frame Complementary Overhead)

One Wayside Traffic per STM-1 (available as standard) 4
Up to two Radio User Channels per system (available as option)
Further, housekeeping function is available as standard and upgradeable
in a scalable way as option. DCC use is also available for SEMF signal
transmission.
2.5.1 Engineering Orderwire (EOW)
The SRT 1F provides two engineering orderwires as a standard feature.

One is transmitted by E1 byte of RSOH (Regenerator Section OH). The
other one is transmitted by E2 byte of MSOH (Multiplex Section OH).
Generally, the EOW from E1 is used as omnibus, and the EOW from E2
as express. Voice frequency signals of E1 and E2 are independent and
have no mutual communication. The EOW interfacing circuit is the SV
unit in the SCSU. The SV unit has two sets of orderwire interface for E1
and E2: 2-wire VF modular socket for telephone set connection and 4-
wire VF circuit for the connection to/from other equipment. The SV unit
has a common circuit for Dual Tone Multi Frequency (DTMF) function and
LED/Buzzer for station calling. The buzzer functionality can be
enabled/disabled via proper HW dip switch on the front panel. The RF
channel to transmit orderwires is M1 (Main 1) for SNMP/IP SV.
Orderwires are RPS parallel path duplication protected. Figure 2-13
67
shows block diagram of EOW circuit inside the SV card. Figure 2-14 67
shows the flow diagram of E1 and E2 signals.
4 Not applicable to GE MLS, GE ML ADPT and to Occasional cards.

5 Not applicable to BSW OPT DTI, BSW GE, GE MLM, GE MLS, GE ML ADPT and to Occasional cards.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-23
Order wire connection can be applicable between any network elements

connected. However, voice quality degradation must to be considered
because there are stations linked with 4W analogue voice frequency band
cascaded connection. Thus, maximum number of cascaded voice
frequency inter-connections is 20 NEs per network due to PCM CODEC
executions.
In addition, considering the leakage of voice frequency signals in 2W
interfaces, the number of NEs that can communicate simultaneously (the
number of TEL SETs simultaneously in off-hook status) is restricted to 6
for E1 and E2 each per network.
To other units
4W
interface
Analog voice addition for E1

LINE side LED, buzzer
RPS1-M1 DTM call
E1 byte (R-
RPS1-PRT Detection
SOH)
Voice addition Ring back

RADIO RPS1-M1 Ringer
side E1
RPS1-PRT 2W INTF
byte (R-
SOH) External
(2W)
Analog voice addition for E2
DTM call
LINE side Detection
RPS1-M1
E2 byte (M-
SOH) RPS1-PRT
Ring back
Voice addition
External
Ringer (2W)
RADIO RPS1-M1 2W INTF
side E2
byte (M- RPS1-PRT
SOH) 4W
interface
PCM To other units
Figure 2-13 - Block Diagram of EOW Circuit inside SV card

MSTU
Prot
E1
VF(E1) MSTU
Telephone To/from
2W Main 1
set
E2 Other
VF(E2) SV unit
MSTU Station
In SCSU Main 2
VF(E1)
To/from MSTU
Other 4W
Main N
Equipment
VF(E2)
Figure 2-14 - EOW Signal Flow
SRT 1F
2-24 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.5.1.1 Numbering and dialling

To use an orderwire, connect an ordinary 2-wire telephone set to E1-2W
or E2-2W modular jack. The station is selectively called through the
telephone key-pad by DTMF method.
Four calling digits are used as follows:
Two (2) digits for group number (G1, G2)
Two (2) digits for station number (G3, G4)
When calling, (#,G1,G2,G3,G4) shall be dialled on the key-pad.
Two types of dialling method are available:
Selective station calling: (#,G1,G2,G3,G4)
Omnibus broadcast calling: (#,G1,G2, * , * )
2.5.1.2 Orderwire Extension

SRT 1F provides two RJ-11 modular jacks for orderwire telephone
connection of E1 and E2. In addition, one extension 4-wire type for E1
and E2 is provided on the backplane for connection to external equipment
(e.g. other SRT1F terminal). The number of 4-wire extension can be
optionally increased by equipping one or two OWBR (Order Wire
Branching) units in the available slots adjacent to the SV controller card.
Signal 4-wire Voice Frequency
Input Level Standard -4.0 dBr

-16.0 to -0.5 dBr variable at 0.5 dB step
Output Level Standard -4.0 dBr

-8.5 to +7.0 dBr variable at 0.5 dB step
Maximum Output Level +3.17 dBm0 for -law

+3.14 dBm0 for A-law
The signal level attenuation can be regulated via proper HW dip switches
(ATT A, ATT B, ATT C, ATT D) located on the SNMP/IP SV controller
card.
2.5.1.3 Digital-Through
At repeater stations and back to back stations, orderwires can be
forwarded as digital signal level when telephone sets are on-hook or not
connected. When one of the telephone sets (E1 or E2) is off-hooked, both
the E1 and E2 line are terminated and converted to the voice frequency
level.
Digital through function is provided to minimize the degradation of
orderwires due to analog/digital conversion and noise/distortion intrusion
at the analog signal level.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-25
2.5.1.4 Ring Protection

In case of ring network configuration, the orderwire lines establish a loop
circuit. This loop circuit may cause the orderwire signal to self oscillate
(hauling). To prevent hauling, a port of the orderwire circuit shall be
disconnected at the master station.
If any section of the loop was interrupted by line failure, the orderwire ring
protection automatically reconnects the loop in order to recover the
orderwire communication.
Figure 2-15 shows the function of Orderwire Ring Protection.
67
SRT 1F
2-26 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Master station Master station
These ports are

disconnected to
stop hauling.
VF circuit VF circuit
Without Ring Protection With Ring Protection
Line failure
VF circuit
Master station
In case of Line Failure

With Ring Protection
These ports are
reconnected to recover
the orderwire circuit.
Figure 2-15 - EOW Ring Protection
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-27
2.5.2 Wayside Traffic (WS)
The SRT 1F system is provided to transmit two Wayside Traffics (WS,

2.048 Mb/s each) per each STM-1 for local E1 traffic transportation as a
standard feature, with the exception of the STM-1 streams correspondent
to GE MLS, GE ML ADPT and to Occasional cards.
One of two Wayside traffics (WS SOH) is transmitted by the undefined
national usage byte of SOH. Another Wayside traffic (WS RFCOH) is
transmitted by the Radio Frame Complementary Overhead.
The interface circuit of Wayside traffics (WS SOH and WS RFCOH) is the
BSW (Bipolar Switch) unit on the SCSU. For BSW STM-1 Electrical and
Optical STI cards, the WS channels connectors are available directly on
the front panel of the BSW card as 75Ohm impedance, and on the
backplane as 120Ohm impedance. Instead, for BSW Optical DTI and for
GigaEthernet cards, the WS channels are available only as 120Ohm
interface on the backplane (in this case, 75Ohm can be obtained by
equipping HK CONV card, which provides 120-to-75 Ohm converter in
addition to the usual HK functions). Figure 2-16 shows the signal flow of
67
the Wayside channels.

Interface conditions of input/output port are set by software setting.
Wayside signals are RPS (USW and BSW) protected, with the only
exception of the GE MLM card, for which the provided wayside channels
are unprotected.
MSTU
Prot Prot
WS (SOH)
MSTU
Main 1 BSW Main 1 Main 1
WS (RFCOH)
To/from
Other
Station
WS (SOH)
MSTU
Main 2 BSW Main 2
Main 2
WS (RFCOH)
WS (SOH)
MSTU
Main N BSW Main N Main N
WS (RFCOH)
Figure 2-16 - Wayside Traffic Signal Flow
SRT 1F
2-28 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.5.3 User Channel (UC)
A 64 kb/s User Channel (UC) per RF channel is available as a standard

function for users data communication, for every BSW STM-1 Electrical
or Optical STI unit (not applicable to BSW Optical DTI, to GigaEthernet
cards and to Occasional cards). This user channel is transmitted through
byte F1 of the RSOH. User Channel can be co-directional or contra-
directional. The user channel interfacing circuit is the multi-pin connector
in the connection area of SCSU. Figure 2-17 shows the user channels
67
signal flow.
User Channels are RPS (USW and BSW) protected.
MSTU
Prot
64 kb/s
In/Out port Prot
BSW units Main 1 MSTU

Main 1 Main 1 To/from
in
Main 2 Other
SCSU
Main 2 Main 1 Stations
Main N
Main N Main 2
Main N
Figure 2-17 - Signal Flow of User Channel (F1)
2.5.4 Radio User Channel (RUC)
Up to two Radio User Channels (RUC) per system can be provided as

optional feature to transmit voice frequency signals (VF) or 64 kb/s
(G.703 or V.11) digital data for users utilization. The RUCs are
transferred by the Radio Frame Complementary OH. The two RUC can
be chosen both digital, both VF, or one VF and one digital. Each RUC is
added by equipping of proper sub-module on SV unit in SCSU section
(max two sub-modules per SV).
RUC channels are transmitted by the Main 1 and Protection channel in
parallel for duplication and RPS protection. At the receive side, one of the
RUC sets is selected. Figure 2-18 shows the RUC signal flow.
67
RUC
In/out port
RUC #1, #2
MSTU
VF/64 kb/s #1 Prot
Prot
SV unit
in To/from
SCSU Other
VF/64 kb/s #2
Station
MSTU
Main 1 Main 1
RUC #1, #2
Figure 2-18 - Radio User Channel (RUC) Signal Flow
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-29
2.5.5 Housekeeping (HK)
The system allows as standard up to 8 DI (Digital Inputs) for collection of

external station alarms plus 4 DO (Digital Outputs) for remote telecontrol
of station devices (housekeeping function). Housekeeping bits are RPS
parallel path duplication protected.
The number of housekeeping DI/DO ports may be increased by equipping
up to two optional HK units. Each HK unit adds 32 DI and 16 DO to
housekeeping facility.
2.5.6 Digital Communication Channel (DCC)
Digital Communication Channels (DCCs) are provided for the

Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF) signal
transmission.
SRT 1F
2-30 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.6 OverHead Bit Access for SRT 1F System

The SRT 1F system uses three kinds of overhead bit to transfer the
signals for system supervise/control and users utilization.
In addition to the Multiplex Section Overhead (MSOH) and Regenerator
Section Overhead (RSOH) of STM-1 frame, the Radio Frame
Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) is provided inside the overall radio
frame.
With MCF/Controller type SNMP/IP, the operational mode can be set as
MS mode or RS mode via LCT.
Figure 2-19 shows access points of MSOH, RSOH and RFCOH in case
67
of MS mode.
Figure 2-20 shows access points of MSOH, RSOH and RFCOH in case
67
of RS mode.
SDH Radio System
Terminal Repeater Terminal
Radio Frame Radio Frame
MS MS

RFCOH RFCOH RFCOH

RSOH RSOH RSOH
MSOH MSOH MSOH
MS : Multiplex Section
RFCOH : Radio Frame Complementary Overhead
RSOH : Regenerator Section Overhead of STM-1
MSOH : Multiplex Section Overhead of STM-1
Figure 2-19 - SDH Radio Overhead Bit Access MS mode
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-31
SDH Radio System
Terminal Repeater Terminal
Radio Frame Radio Frame
MS

RS RS

RFCOH RFCOH RFCOH

RSOH RSOH RSOH
MSOH MSOH
MS : Multiplex Section
RS : Regenerator Section
RFCOH : Radio Frame Complementary Overhead
RSOH : Regenerator Section Overhead of STM-1
MSOH : Multiplex Section Overhead of STM-1
Figure 2-20 - SDH Radio Overhead Bit Access RS mode
SRT 1F
2-32 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.6.1 MSOH and RSOH
The Multiplex Section Overhead (MSOH) and Regenerator Section

Overhead (RSOH) are compatible with SDH optical fibre systems in
accordance with ITU-T G. 707.
The MSOH are drop/inserted at the terminal stations of the multiplex
section.
The RSOH are drop/inserted at the terminal stations of the
multiplex/regenerator section.
Figure 2-21 shows the STM-1 frame format and overhead bit assignment.
67
Table 2.3 shows the function of MSOH, RSOH, Pointer and Path
67
Overhead (POH).
Figure 2-21 - STM-1 Frame Format Construction
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-33
Table 2.3 - Main Function of Section Overhead (ITU-T G.707)

Byte
Overhead Usage Function
Abbr.
SOH A1, A2 Framing 6 bytes are used for STM-1 frame synchronization.
The pattern is A1A1A1A2A2A2 to each STM-1 frame,
A1 = 11110110, A2 = 00101000
D1 to Data Communication 12 bytes are used for Telecommunication Management
D12 Channels Network (TMN).
D1 to D3 are communication for Regenerator Section.
D4 to D12 are communication for Multiplex Section.
J0 Regenerator Section One byte is unique number assigned to an STM-1 signal for
Trace identification in aggregated STM-N level.
E1, E2 Orderwire Two bytes are used for voice frequency transmission as
engineering orderwire.
E1 are communication for Regenerator Section.
E2 are communication for Multiplex Section.
F1 User channel One byte is reserved for user purposes.
A User Channel (SOH) is to be transmitted.
B1 BIP-8 Bit Interleaved Parity 8
One byte is used to monitor the error performance of the
Regenerator Section.
B2 BIP-24 Bit Interleaved Parity 24
Three bytes are used to monitor the error performance of
the Multiplex Section.
K1, K2 APS channel Two bytes are allocated for Multiplex Section Protection
(MSP) switching control.
S1 Synchronous status One byte is used for quality control of the synchronous
clock signal.
M1 Far end block error One byte is allocated to transmit the block error information
to the far end.
Z1, Z2 Spare Four bytes are reserved as spare.
Pointer H1 to H3 Pointer bit Administration Unit (AU) pointer bits are used for Section
Adaptation (SA).
SS bit
Sending side
H1 : 00/10/01/11 selectable
Y1 (H1#2) : same as H1
Y2 (H1#3) : same as H1
Receiving side
H1 : 00/10/01/11 selectable
Y1 (H1#2) : XX (no use)
Y2 (H1#3) : XX (no use)
Note: H1 is set to the same value for both the sending and
receiving sides.
SRT 1F
2-34 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.6.2 RFCOH
The Radio Frame Complementary Overhead (RFCOH) transfers one

class of signals for internal use to monitor/control the SRT 1F system,
one class of signals for users utilization (WS RFCOH and optional RUC),
and a set of dummy bits.
The following table shows the composition of the RFCOH frame and the
contribution of SOH and RFCOH frames to total gross bit rate:
64 QAM 128 QAM

Bits Rate kbps Bits Rate kbps
FA 36 288 42 336
C1 1,184 9,472 1,004 8,032
C2 296 2,368 251 2,008
BSCS 32 256 32 256
RID 4 32 4 32
ATPC 6 48 6 48
1BE/x1BE 2 16 2 16
FMS/xFMS 2 16 2 16
OOS/xOOS 2 16 2 16
WS RFCOH 264 2,112 264 2,112
RUC 76 608 76 608
Dummy Bits 40 320 43 344
Total RFCOH 1,944 15,552 1,728 13,824
Total SOH 19,440 155,520 19,440 155,520
Gross Bit Rate 21,384 171,072 21,168 169,344
FA: Frame Alignment bit to maintain the frame synchronization of

radio frame.
C1: Redundancy bit for the Multi Level Coded Modulation (MLCM)
level 1.
C2: Redundancy bit for the MLCM Level 2.
BSCS: Baseband Switch Control Signal to control the Radio
Protection System(RPS).
RID: Route Identifier for radio section.
ATPC: Automatic Transmit Power Control signal
1BE/x1BE: Transfer bit for 1 Bit Error
FMS/xFMS: Transfer bit for Frequency Measurement
OOS/xOOS: Transfer bit for Out of Service
WS RFCOH: Wayside Traffic in RFCOH
RUC: Optional Radio User Channel (up to 2x64kbps via proper
module on SV card)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-35
2.6.3 Radio Frame Structure
The SRT 1F organizes the Radio Frame for the transmission between two
Main Signal Transmit Units (MSTU) across a radio section. The Radio
Frame is composed of the STM-1 signal and Radio Frame
Complementary Overhead (RFCOH).
The Radio Frame has two types of configuration based on the modulation
system, 64 QAM and 128 QAM.
64 QAM : 6 streams at 28.512 Mb/s
128 QAM : 7 streams at 24.192 Mb/s
Figure 2-22 shows the Radio Frame structure for 64QAM system.
67
Figure 2-23 shows the relevant word structure for 64QAM system.
67
Figure 2-24 shows the Radio Frame structure for 128QAM system.
67
Figure 2-25 shows the relevant word structure for 128QAM system.
67
SRT 1F
2-36 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 2-22 - Radio Frame Structure of 64 QAM modulation
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-37
Bit Arrangement from 1st to 82th word
0 6 12 17 23 29 34 40 46 50 56 62
1 7 13 18 24 30 35 41 47 51 57 63
2 8 14 19 25 31 36 42 48 52 58 64
3 9 15 20 26 32 37 43 49 53 59 65
4 10 16 21 27 33 38 44 b 54 60 C2
5 11 C1 22 28 C1 39 45 C1 55 61 C1
STM-1 data bits: 66 bits

RFCOH bit (a,b): 1 bit 72 bits
C1 redundancy bit: 4 bits
Bit Arrangement from 83st to 148th word
0 6 12 17 23 29 33 39 45 49 55 61
1 7 13 18 24 30 34 40 46 50 56 62
2 8 14 19 25 31 35 41 47 51 57 63
3 9 15 20 26 32 36 42 48 52 58 64
4 10 16 21 27 a 37 43 b 53 59 C2
5 11 C1 22 28 C1 38 44 C1 54 60 C1

RFCOH bit (a,b): 2 bits 72 bits
Figure 2-23 - Word Structure of 64QAM System
SRT 1F
2-38 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 2-24 - Radio Frame Structure of 128 QAM modulation
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-39
Bit Arrangement from 1st to 36th word (1st sub frame)

Bit Arrangement from 1st to 35th word (2nd sub frame)
0 7 14 20 27 34 40 47 54 59 66 73
1 8 15 21 28 35 41 48 55 60 67 74
2 9 16 22 29 36 42 49 56 61 68 75
3 10 17 23 30 37 43 50 57 62 69 76
4 11 18 24 31 38 44 51 58 63 70 77
5 12 19 25 32 39 45 52 b 64 71 C2
6 13 C1 26 33 C1 46 53 C1 65 72 C1

RFCOH bit (a,b): 1 bit 84 bits
Bit Arrangement from 37st to 126th word (1st sub fram

Bit Arrangement from 36st to125th word (2nd sub fram
0 7 14 20 27 34 39 46 53 58 65 72
1 8 15 21 28 35 40 47 54 59 66 73
2 9 16 22 29 36 41 48 55 60 67 74
3 10 17 23 30 37 42 49 56 61 68 75
4 11 18 24 31 38 43 50 57 62 69 76
5 12 19 25 32 a 44 51 b 63 70 C2
6 13 C1 26 33 C1 45 52 C1 64 71 C1

RFCOH bit (a,b): 2 bits 84 bits
Figure 2-25 - Word Structure of 128QAM System
SRT 1F
2-40 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.7 Radio Protection Switch System

The SRT 1F is equipped with the Radio Protection Switch system (RPS)
to improve signal transmission reliability. Automatic protection switch acts
in case of equipment failure and degradation of the propagation
conditions. Manual switching is implemented for testing and maintenance
operation purposes.
2.7.1 Outline of Radio Protection Switching
One protection channel is provided for each switching group.

N+1 operation: One switching group (RPS1 = Group 1) having 1:7
protection.
2x(N+1) operation: Two independent switching groups (RPS1 =
Group 1 and RPS2 = Group 2) having 1:7 protection each.
Maximum number of main channels is limited by the frequency band
being utilized (maximum 7 main channels per group).
Switching Stages
The Radio Protection System has two switching stages, bipolar switch
(BSW) stage and unipolar switch (USW) stage. The BSW stage is not
applicable in case of use of GE ML set.
Figure 2-26 shows the block diagram of the Radio Protection System.
67
Prot MSTU MSTU Prot

(USW) (USW)
Main 1 Main 1
BSW MSTU MSTU BSW
(USW) (USW)
Main 2 Main 2
BSW MSTU MSTU BSW
(USW) (USW)
Main 3 Main 3
BSW MSTU MSTU BSW
(USW) (USW)
To/from Main N To/from Main N

Unipolar Unipolar
To/from Main N To/from Main N

STM-1 CMI signal STM-1 CMI signal
: Bipolar signal (CMI) line

: Unipolar signal (19.44 Mb/s X 8) line
Figure 2-26 - Radio Protection System
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-41
Switching Section
The switching section of Radio Protection Switch (RPS) System is
activated on one hop basis. Therefore protection switching is activated
between SRT1F stations despite the type of station among terminal
station, repeater station and back-to-back terminal station. Figure 2-27 67
shows the RPS switching section.
Terminal A Back to back Terminal B Terminal C

MSTU MSTU MSTU MSTU
USW USW USW USW
BSW MSTU MSTU BSW BSW MSTU MSTU BSW

USW USW USW USW
BSW MSTU MSTU BSW BSW MSTU MSTU BSW

USW USW USW USW
Unipolar Unipolar Unipolar Unipolar

CMI CMI CMI CMI
To/from Main N To/from Main N To/from Main N
Switching section A to B Switching section B to C
Figure 2-27 - Switching Section
EOW/UC/WS Signal
The Radio Protection Switching of Orderwire, User Channel by SOH and
Wayside traffic by SOH/RFCOH is activated in accordance with the
operation of STM-1 main signal.
Co-channel Operation
In case of 2x(N+1) Co-channel operation, two independent Radio
Protection Switching groups (RPS1 and RPS2) are configured according
to the system requirement.
RPS1 and RPS2 operate independently, and there is no mutual
protection switching between two groups.
Human Machine Interface (HMI)

The switching status and manual switch operation are supervised through
the local terminal, LCT. There is no display/control panel equipped on the
SRT 1F.
The LCT can supervise/control all SRT 1F equipment (NE = Network
Element) within a Digital Communication Channel (DCC) group
connecting the local terminal.
SRT 1F
2-42 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.7.2 USW and BSW
USW (Unipolar Switch)

The USW is part of the digital transmit/receive processor (TDP/RDP) of
MSTU. This switch is supported by manual/automatic DADEing
(Differential Automatic time Delay Equalization) function between
protection and any of main channels and performs the hitless (errorless)
switching against propagation fading.
Detailed USW information is as follows:
Signal level: 8 streams of 19.44 Mbps rate, unipolar stage

Direction: Uni-directional
Auto revertive
Initiator: Frame Alignment Loss (F LOSS)
Signal degrade (BER ALM)
BSW (Bipolar Switch)

One BSW unit per main channel is mounted in the SCSU (Supervisory
Control & Switching Unit) section. This switch is not hitless and is
dedicated to protect the system against equipment failure. Manual
protection switching is also not hitless but can safely isolate a specific
main channel from traffic transmission, for testing and troubleshooting
purposes.
Detailed BSW information is as follows:
Signal level: STM-1 CMI, bipolar stage

Direction: Bi-directional
Auto revertive
Initiator: MSTU equipment alarm
MSTU line failure alarm
MSTU power supply failure
Figure 2-28 and Figure 2-29 shows the function of USW and BSW.
67 67
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-43
Terminal A Repeater B Terminal C
USW TX RX USW USW TX RX USW
BSW USW TX RX USW BSW BSW USW TX RX USW BSW
USW RX TX USW USW RX TX USW
BSW USW RX TX USW BSW BSW USW RX TX USW BSW
Propagation fading
When propagation fading of Main 1 from Repeater B to Terminal A occurs,

USWs (shaded) of one direction from B to A of Main 1 are activated as shown above.
Other switches are not affected at all.
Figure 2-28 - Automatic Operation of USW
Terminal A Repeater B Terminal C
USW TX RX USW USW TX RX USW
BSW USW TX RX USW BSW BSW USW TX RX USW BSW
USW RX TX USW USW RX TX USW
BSW USW RX TX USW BSW BSW USW RX TX USW BSW
Equipment Failure
When equipment failure of Main 1 Terminal A (MSTU receiver) occurs,

BSWs (shaded) of both directions B and A of Main 1 are activated as shown above.
Figure 2-29 - Automatic Operation of BSW
SRT 1F
2-44 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.7.3 Switching Priority
Priority order of Radio Protection Switching operational modes is reported

in the following tables.
Table 2.4 - Priority Order of RPS Operational Modes
Priority Switching mode Description
1st LOCKOUT Inhibits any type of RPS operation

nd
2 FORCED Switch over to Prot CH unless the specified Main CH or
Prot CH is locked out. (Not effective in case of Prot CH
error)
3rd AUTOMATIC The Main CH will be switched over to Prot CH, if Prot CH
is free and normal. The priority order of AUTOMATIC
switching mode is listed in Table 2.5
67
th
4 MANUAL The traffic will be switched over to Prot CH by the
command through LCT, if Prot CH is free and normal.
5th OCC Occasional traffic transmission (option): The lowest
priority traffic is allowed to be transferred by Prot CH
when Prot CH is free and normal.
Table 2.5 - Priority Order of AUTOMATIC Switching Mode

Priority Switching operation
Highest BSW operation of Priority CH (default = Main 1)
BSW operation of the first incoming channel
BSW operation of the second incoming channel
USW operation by LOS / F LOSS of Priority CH (default = Main 1)
USW operation by LOS / F LOSS of the first incoming channel
USW operation by LOS / F LOSS of the second incoming channel
USW operation by BER ALM of Priority CH (default = Main 1)
USW operation by BER ALM of the first incoming channel
Lowest USW operation by BER ALM of the second incoming channel
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-45
2.7.4 USW Switching Initiator and Operation Time
Automatic protection of RPS is initiated by;-

Frame Failure : Frame Alignment Loss (F LOSS) of the full radio
frame
Signal Failure : Loss of Signal (LOS) of the radio stream level
Signal Degrade: Bit Error Ratio Alarm (BER ALM) of radio parity
before forward error correction.
Signal Failure (F LOSS alarm)

F LOSS alarm is initiated after losing radio frame synchronization and
recovered after establishing synchronization.

LOS alarm is initiated after loosing signal and recovered after establishing
normal signal status.
Signal Degrade
The threshold level of BER ALM can be set through the LCT. Table 2.6
67
shows the setting position and time to initiate/recover of BER ALM.

Default setting is 2.
Table 2.6 - BER ALM Initiation Setting and Time to Initiate/Restore
BER ALM BER after Time to ALM Restoration Time to
Setting Initiation before Error Initiate before Restore
Error correction correction (maximum) Error correction (average)
2 1 X 10 3 5 X 10 -7 0.25 ms 6 X 10 -5 4 ms
3 5 X 10 4 6 X 10 -8 0.5 ms 3 X 10 -5 8 ms
4 -10 -6
4 1 X 10 3 X 10 2.5 ms 6 X 10 40 ms
5 5 X 10 5 4 X 10 -11 5.0 ms 3 X 10 -6 80 ms
5 -12 -7
6 1 X 10 1 X 10 less 25.0 ms 6 X 10 400 ms
6 -12 -7
7 5 X 10 1 X 10 less 50.0 ms 3 X 10 800 ms
6 -12 -8
8 1 X 10 1 X 10 less 250.0 ms 6 X 10 4000 ms
USW Switching Time

The switching time is the switching total time.
Switching time = t1 + t2 + t3 +t4 (refer to the next figure):
t1 = BER ALM detection time
t2 = TX parallel transmission request time (propagation time)
+ TX USW switch activation time (t2')
+ TX USW total answer back time (propagation time)
t3 = Receive USW activation time
t4 = RX USW total answer back time.
SRT 1F
2-46 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Manual switching time (t3+t4):

without OCC: less than 5 ms;
with OCC: less than 9.5 ms.
In the manual switching time t1 and (t2-t2') are not included.
Note:
OPT: Operation request for parallel transmit transmission
TSW ANS: Answer back from switch for parallel transmit transmission
Figure 2-30 Switching time
DADE (Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer)

Automatic DADE ( 3 bits) functions to automatically synchronize two
baseband signals transmitted by a Main CH and Prot CH when carrying
out protection switching.
Manual DADE ( 16 bits): compensates the baseband signal path
difference between each Main CH and Prot CH.
Wait to Restore (WTR, option setting)

Delay time from the detection of BER ALM restoration up to releasing
protection switching is available to eliminate unnecessary RPS operation
when the propagation condition is unstable.
If other channels fail during the WTR period, the WTR will be cancelled
immediately and Prot CH is taken over by the newly failed channel.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-47
2.7.5 Occasional Traffic (option)
The lowest priority traffic can be transmitted by Prot CH when all

channels are normal. If a channel fails, the occasional traffic will be
immediately disconnected to remove traffic from the main failed channel.
Optional OCC card for STM-1 electrical or STM-1 optical or GigaEthernet
interface shall be equipped in the first available BSW slot on the right
side, close to the set of working baseband cards.
If all the BSW slots are equipped (7+1) the dedicated OCC card slot shall
be used.
SRT 1F
2-48 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.8 GE Multi-Link Protection Switching Operation

For Gigabit Ethernet (GE) multi-link operation, GE multi-link unit has the
unique function of multiple STM-1 operation to give high throughput and
to maintain high signal transmission quality. Protection switching function
is activated for severe propagation path condition (occurrence of
multipath fading) and equipment failure.
Two cases are possible:
Pure Ethernet link: M+0 GE Multi-Link operation in the absence of any
TDM N+1 RPS operation. In this case, M = max 8.
Hybrid TDM+Ethernet link: M+0 GE Multi-Link operation in the
presence of TDM N+1 RPS operation. In this case, M+N = max 8 and
RF channel allocation shall be done in such a way that N+1 TDM
system is allocated among MSTU slots from 1 to N, whilst GE Multi-
Link system is allocated from MSTU slot N+1 onwards.
In the provisional setting of Edit RPS of RUC&RSC&RPS on WebLT,
Max Ch should be set to N. That means that the N+1 TDM system is
protected by standard RPS (BSW+USW), whilst the GigaEthernet M+0
system is not protected by standard BSW+USW RPS (OOS condition),
but via adaptive load balancing making use of USW switching criteria only
and health check packets.
In case of N+1 RPS without OCC, it is possible to use GE ML ADPT OCC
unit in the OCC slot in order to add occasionally the protection channel of
the TDM section as an occasional VC-4 container for the GigaEthernet
section, thus optimizing the spectral efficiency by synergy between TDM
and Ethernet sections transmitted. For instance, take the hybrid operation
of 3+1 SDH without OCC and 5+0 GE Multi-Link operation implemented
with 1xGE MLM, 1xGE MLS, 2xGE ML ADPT and 1xGE ML ADPT OCC:
all this configuration can be achieved by using just 8 MSTUs in the same
rack; when the protection channel is occupied by other STM-1 channel on
fade, total GE Multi-Link capacity will drop down from 5xSTM-1 to 4xSTM-
1 automatically as per OCC functionality.
Switching Section
GE MLS unit has the switching control function of switch-off and
switchback from M working channels independently from the TDM N+1
RPS eventually present in case of hybrid TDM+Ethernet link. When any
of working channel quality degrades below the threshold level, switching
is activated inside GE MLS unit by the baseband uni-polar switch, USW,
thus GE MLS unit switches off the degraded working channel and
afterwards it switches back again when the quality becomes normal.
Figure 2-31 shows the outline of GE ML switching.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-49
Figure 2-31 GE Multi-Link RPS in the absence of TDM N+1 RPS (assumed 8+0 GE Multi-Link
Operation)
The switching section of GE ML switching is activated on a hop basis,

therefore protection switching is activated between stations despite of
terminal station, repeater station and back-to-back terminal station.
Figure 2-32 shows the relationship between terminals and a repeater for
the GE ML switching section. For the cascaded back-to-back repeater
configuration without Ethernet drop/insert, baseband interface by BSW is
allowed, thus minimizing the end-to-end resulting latency.
Figure 2-32 Multi-Hop Link Configuration of GE Multi-Link Operation
SRT 1F
2-50 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.9 Line Protection in BSW STM-1 Optical 1+1 DTI
2.9.1 Overview of 1+1 SFP Module Switching
Schematic block diagram of 1+1 SFP module switching is as follows;
Receive side of OPT BSW DTI (Unrevertive Switch)
Transmit side of OPT BSW DTI (Parallel Operation)
2.9.2 1+1 SFP Module Switching Criteria
Switching criteria of 1+1 SFP module switching is as follows;

LOS (Loss of Signal)
LOF (Loss of Frame)
MS-AIS (Multiplex Section is being AIS)
B2 ERR (B2 signal is being errors)
2.9.3 1+1 SFP Module Switching Mode
Switching mode is as follows;

Manual Switching
Automatic Switching
2.9.4 1+1 SFP Module Switching Time
Less than 50 ms with hit switch.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-51
2.10 Line Protection in GE ML 1+1 DTI

1+1 SFP line protection in GE ML 1+1 DTI card set is managed by the
L2-switch embedded in the GE MLS card by means of STP protocol and
eventually also Link Aggregation enabled on the line side.
The GE ML card set can act as 1+1 DTI line protected or as 2xLAN GE
via proper SW setting. Also HW setting available to enable 1xLAN GE
operation, 2xGE LAN operation, 1+1 LAN GE line protected operation.
SRT 1F
2-52 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.11 Supervisory, Control & Switching Unit (SCSU)

SRT1F equipment is equipped with a Supervisory, Control & Switching
Unit (SCSU) for each switching group. The main function and units of
SCSU is:
Provides STM-1 electrical/optical with/without DTI and GE interface.
Provides axiliary signal interfaces of Orderwire, User Channel, Radio
User Channel, Wayside and Digital Communication Channel.
Provides interface of the External Timing Clock Source and
administrate the Timing Clock Synchronization.
Provides interface of the Web-based Local Craft Terminal (Web LT)
and SNMP Manager for Network Management System (NMS).
Supervisory/Control of the Radio Protection Switching (RPS) at
bipolar and unipolar signal level.
Retrieves/registers alarm/status data for protection control and
indication and Performance Monitoring data.
Provides OW functions, relays equipment alarms (RAB) and
external/station Housekeeping (HK) alarms and remote controls and
registers the NE setting (provisioning) data.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-53
The SCSU is composed of following units:

BSW Bipolar Switch unit for STM-1 electrical interface
BSW OPT (1) Baseband Switch Unit for STM-1 optical without DTI
(1)
BSW OPT DTI Baseband Switch Unit for STM-1 optical with DTI
BSW GE (2) Baseband Switch Unit for Gigabit Ethernet
(2)
GE MLM GE Multi-link Master unit
GE MLS (2) GE Multi-link Slave unit
(2)
GE ML ADPT GE Adaptor
GE ML ADPT OCC (2) GE ML Adapter for OCC channel (option)
(3)
OCC INTF Occasional Traffic unit for STM-1 electrical (option)
OCC OPT (3) Occasional Traffic Unit for STM-1 optical (option)
(3)
OCC OPT DTI Occasional Traffic Unit for STM-1 optical DTI (option)
OCC GE (3) Occasional Traffic Unit for Gigabit Ethernet (option)
(4)
BSW INTF Baseband Switch Interface Unit for 2nd RPS in double
RPS SV
SV RPS1 Supervisory unit for single RPS
SV RPS1/RPS2 Supervisory unit for double RPS
HK/HK CONV Housekeeping unit (option, max. 2)
(5)
ECU Embedded Communication Unit (option)
OWBR Order Wire Branching unit (option)
(6)
TCU Timing Control Unit (option)
(7)
RST RST Sub-unit for enhanced RST mode (option)
(7)
RAB RAB Sub-unit for enhanced RAB function (option)
(7)
RUC VF RUC Sub-unit for Voice Frequency Radio User Channel
(option)
RUC G.703 (7) RUC Sub-unit for 64 kb/s G.703 Radio User Channel
(option)
RUC V.11 (7) RUC Sub-unit for 64 kb/s V.11 Radio User Channel
(option)
Note: (1) : S-1.1 or L-1.1

(2) : Gigabit Ethernet interface, 1000BASE-T/SX/LX
(3) : Occasional Traffic on PRT channel (max. 2 for CCDP.)
(4) : Only for 2x(N+1) CCDP operation
(5) : GP2-W1 DCC for 2x(N+1) CCDP instead of GP1-W1
(6) : Only for MS mode operation, maximum 2
(7) : sub-module to be mounted on SV controller card
SRT 1F
2-54 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 2-33 Schematic Block Diagram of SCSU Function
Note-*1: Baseband interface is STM-1 electrical, STM-1 optical

with/without DTI, Gigabit Ethernet electrical and optical and GE Multi-link
electrical and optical.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-55
2.11.1 Bipolar Switch for STM-1 electrical interface (BSW Electrical)
Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit is provided for each main channel as standard.
The STM-1 electrical interface signal to/from external transmission
equipment is interfaced to this BSW unit. The BSW unit switches
following signals simultaneously;--
An STM-1 CMI signal to/from MSTU
Wayside Traffic (SOH and RFCOH) and User Channel (SOH)
The Bipolar switch is activated for equipment failure and causes some
signal interruption (hit switch).
2.11.2 Bipolar Switch for STM-1 Optical Interface (BSW OPT)
A Bipolar Switch (BSW) unit is provided for each main channel. The STM-
1 Optical signals to/from other equipment are interfaced through this BSW
unit. S-1.1 or L-1.1 SFP modules can be equipped on BSW Optical. The
BSW unit simultaneously switches the following signals:
An STM-1 CMI signal after O-E conversion and before E-O
conversion
Wayside Traffic (SOH and RFCOH) and User Channel (SOH)
Controls and alarms for BSW Optical are managed via connection to
SRT1F housekeeping facility. 4 DI plus 2 DO of housekeeping facility are
needed per each BSW Optical card.
When BSW Optical is equipped, HK unit is necessary to collect such
alarm and control data via backplane:
- in case of K-shelf 7+1, one HK unit is enough for up to maximum
capacity;
- in case of K-shelf 2x(3+1) ST, second HK unit is necessary also, if
Expansion K-shelf is equipped also with some BSW Optical;
- in case of K-shelf 2x(3+1) DT, one HK unit is necessary per each
direction;
- not applicable to SRT1F 1+1 N.E.
Control Functions
Table 2.7 shows the control command which can be operated via house
7
keeping output ports on SRT1F system. The PS FAIL alarm is always

reported as fixed setting via housekeeping facility. In addition, the user
can choose maximum three items through hardware switch setting on the
BSW Optical card. The monitor items can be set per card individually.
SRT 1F
2-56 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Table 2.7 - BSW Optical Control Functions

Item Description Note
RCI Remote Card Identifier Blink CARD LED
OPTLB Optical port Loop Back Loop back the tributary.
TR Test Restart Turn on the laser output in 90s.
MR Manual Restart Turn on the laser output in 2s.
LSO Laser Shutout Force turning off the laser output.
Alarm Functions
Table 2.8 shows alarm and condition items which can be monitored via
7
house keeping input ports on SRT1F system. A user can choose

maximum three items through hardware switch setting on the BSW
Optical card. The monitor items can be set per card individually.
Table 2.8 - BSW Optical Alarm Functions

Item Description
CARD FAIL Card Fail
PSFAIL PS Fail
LINE FAIL Transmission Signal Fail
RX LOS RX Loss of Signal
TX FAIL TX Fail
CMI LOS CMI Los of Signal
CMI OUT DN CMI Output Down
TX HI ALM * Optical Output High Alarm
(OPOR : Optical Power Transmitted Out of Range)
TX LO ALM * Optical Output Low Alarm
(OPD : Optical Power Transmitted Degrade)
BIAS HI ALM * Laser Bias High Alarm
(LBOL : Laser Bias Out of Limits)
BIAS LO ALM * Laser Bias Low Alarm
ACT ALS ALS in Active condition
SUBUNIT-FAIL Optical Module Removed
* : SFP module with Diagnostic Monitor option is required.
Table 2.9 shows initiators of alarms.

7
Table 2.9 - BSW Optical Alarm Initiator

Alarm Initiator
S-1.1 L-1.1
RX LOS -30.5 - -45.0 dBm -34.5 - -45.0 dBm
TX FAIL Logical OR of TX HI ALM, TX LO ALM, BIAS HI ALM and BIAS LO ALM
CMI LOS 18 dBm
CMI OUT DN
TX HI ALM -5 dBm 3 dBm
TX LO ALM -18 dBm -7.5 dBm
BIAS HI ALM 70 mA
BIAS LO ALM 0 mA
TX HI WN -7 dBm 1 dBm
TX LO WN -16 dBm -5.5 dBm
BIAS HI WN 60 mA
BIAS LO WN 0 mA
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-57
2.11.3 Bipolar Switch for STM-1 Optical Interface (BSW OPT DTI)
Optional Bipolar Switch for STM-1 optical Interface with DTI (OPT BSW
DTI) unit is provided for each main channel. Two (2) STM-1 optical
signals (OPT-X and OPT-Y) to/from the external transmission equipment
are interfaced to this OPT BSW DTI unit.
The OPT BSW DTI unit switches following signals simultaneously;--
An STM-1 CMI signal to/from MSTU
Wayside Traffic (SOH and RFCOH)
In addition, the OPT BSW DTI unit has the function of 1+1 line protection
switching for OPT-X and OPT-Y in the receive side and parallel operation
in transmit side.
data loss (hit switch).
Same as BSW Optical STI described above, also for BSW Optical 1+1
DTI the controls and alarms are managed via connection to SRT1F
housekeeping facility. 4 DI plus 2 DO of housekeeping facility are needed
per each BSW Optical 1+1 DTI card.
Same as BSW Optical card STI, HK unit is necessary to collect such
alarm and control data via backplane:
in case of K-shelf 7+1, one HK unit is enough for up to maximum
capacity;
in case of K-shelf 2x(3+1) ST, second HK unit is necessary also, if
Expansion K-shelf is equipped also with some BSW Optical (STI or
DTI);
in case of K-shelf 2x(3+1) DT, one HK unit is necessary per each
direction;
not applicable to SRT1F 1+1 N.E.
Control Functions
Table 2.10 shows the control functions.
Table 2.10 - Control Functions of OPT BSW DTI/OPT OCC DTI

RCI Remote Card Identifier Blink CARD LED
OPTLB Optical port Loop Back Loop back the tributary.
TR Test Restart Turn on the laser output in 90s.
MR Manual Restart Turn on the laser output in 2s.
LSO Laser Shutout Force turning off the laser output.
DTI SW OPT SW in receiving side Forced switchover from working to protection
SRT 1F
2-58 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
These control command can be operated via housekeeping output ports

on the SRT 1F system. A user can choose maximum two control items
through a hardware switch setting on the card. The control items can be
set per card individually.
Alarms and Conditions

Table 2.11 shows alarm and condition items for OPT BSW DTI/OPT OCC
DTI.
Table 2.11 - Alarm and Condition of OPT BSW DTI/OPT OCC DTI
Item Description
CARD FAIL Card Fail
PSFAIL PS Fail
LINE FAIL Transmission Signal Fail
RX LOS RX Loss of Signal
TX FAIL TX Fail
CMI LOS CMI Los of Signal
CMI OUT DN CMI Output Down
TX HI ALM * Optical Output High Alarm
(OPOR : Optical Power Transmitted Out of Range)
TX LO ALM * Optical Output Low Alarm
(OPD : Optical Power Transmitted Degrade)
BIAS HI ALM * Laser Bias High Alarm
(LBOL : Laser Bias Out of Limits)
BIAS LO ALM * Laser Bias Low Alarm
ACT ALS ALS in Active condition
SUBUNIT-FAIL Optical Module Removed
TX HI WN * Optical Output High Warning
TX LO WN * Optical Output Low Warning
BIAS HI WN * Laser Bias High Warning
BIAS LO WN * Laser Bias Low Warning
OPT-X/Y SEL OPT-X/Y switching status
* : Diagnostic Monitor option is required.
These alarms and conditions can be monitored via housekeeping input

ports on the SRT 1F system. The PS FAIL alarm is always reported as
fixed setting via housekeeping facility. In addition, the user can choose
maximum three items through hardware switches setting on the card. The
monitor items can be set per card individually.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-59
Table 2.12 shows the condition of alarm intiation.

Table 2.12 - Condition of Alarm Initiation
Alarm Initiator
S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2
RX LOS -30.5 - -45.0 dBm -34.5 - -45.0 dBm
TX FAIL Logical OR of TX HI ALM, TX LO ALM, BIAS HI ALM and BIAS LO
ALM
CMI LOS 18 dBm
CMI OUT DN
TX HI ALM -5 dBm 3 dBm
TX LO ALM -18 dBm -7.5 dBm
BIAS HI ALM 70 mA
BIAS LO ALM 0 mA
TX HI WN -7 dBm 1 dBm
TX LO WN -16 dBm -5.5 dBm
BIAS HI WN 60 mA
BIAS LO WN 0 mA
SRT 1F
2-60 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.11.4 Bipolar Switch for Gigabit Ethernet Interface (BSW GE)
A Bipolar Switch (BSW Gigabit Ethernet) unit is provided for each main
channel. The Ethernet traffic to/from other equipment are interfaced
through this BSW unit. 1000BASE-T, 1000BASE-SX or 1000BASE-LX
SFP modules can be equipped on BSW GE.
The GE BSW unit switches following signals simultaneously;--
A pseudo STM-1 CMI signal to/from MSTU
Wayside Traffic (SOH and RFCOH)
Same as BSW Optical cards (STI and DTI) described above, also for
BSW GE the controls and alarms are managed via connection to SRT1F
housekeeping facility. 4 DI plus 2 DO of housekeeping facility are needed
per each BSW GE card.
Same as BSW Optical cards STI and DTI, HK unit is necessary to collect
such alarm and control data via backplane:
capacity;
DTI) or GE;
direction;
Control Functions
Table 2.13 shows the control functions.
Table 2.13 - Control Functions of GE BSW/GE OCC unit

CONT-1 Laser Shutout (LSO) Close: ON, Open: OFF
CONT-2 Remote Card Identifier (RCI) Close: ON, Open: OFF
These control command can be operated via house keeping output ports
on the SRT 1F system, if necessary. The control items can be set per
card individually.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-61

Table 2.14 shows alarm and condition items for GE BSW.
Table 2.14 - Alarm and Condition
Item Description
ALM1 UNIT fail (LED: yellow/green selectable)
SFP failure, SFP removal, CMIINLOSS, OSC failure, FPGA-CONF error
ALM2 LINE alarm (LED: yellow/green selectable)
Depending on rotary switch SW33
Setting-0: EtherRXLOSS, EtherLINK down, WANLINK down,
CMINLOSS
Setting-1: EtherLINK down, WANLINK down, CMINLOSS
Setting-2/3: EtherRXLOSS, EtherLINK down, WANLINK down,
CMIINLOSS
ALM3 Depend on rotary switch SW33
Setting-0: Being LSO, Being RCI (Maintenance)
Setting-1: EtherRXLOSS
Setting-2: EtherLINK OK, WANLINK OK (Normal)
Setting-3: Being REMOTE SHUTDOWN (Special Mode)
ALM4 PSFAIL
These alarms and conditions can be monitored via house keeping input
ports on the SRT 1F system, if necessary. ALM1 and ALM4 (PS FAIL)
are always reported as fixed setting via housekeeping facility. Instead,
ALM2 and ALM3 items are chosen by user through hardware switches
setting on the card. The monitor items can be set per card individually.
SRT 1F
2-62 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.11.5 Giga Ethernet Multi-Link Interface, Master and Slave cards (GE
MLM and GE MLS)
TheGigaEthernet Multi-link Master unit (GE MLM) can be equipped with

1000BASE-T, 1000BASE-SX or 1000BASE-LX SFP modules. The two (2)
Gigabit Ethernet signals (GE-X and GE-Y) to/from the external
transmission equipment are interfaced to this GE MLM unit and forwarded
to the L2-switch integrated inside the GE MLS unit. The Gigabit Ethernet
signal is then transferred over the radio using NxSTM-1 transmission
lines.
The set composed by GE MLM unit and GE MLS unit transfers following
signals simultaneously;--
A pseudo STM-1 CMI signal to/from MSTU pertaining to GE MLM
A pseudo STM-1 CMI signal to/from MSTU pertaining to GE MLS
Wayside Traffic (one in SOH and one in RFCOH) in unprotected
mode (no BSW)
Same as BSW Optical cards (STI and DTI) and BSW GE described
above, also for GE ML the controls and alarms are managed via
connection to SRT1F housekeeping facility. 8 DI plus 4 DO of
housekeeping facility are needed per each GE ML set.
Same as BSW Optical cards STI and DTI and BSW GE, HK unit is
necessary to collect such alarm and control data via backplane:
capacity;
DTI) or GigaEthernet interface;
direction;
Control Functions
Table 2.15 shows the control functions available for a GE ML set (GE
MLM + GE MLS).
Table 2.15 - Control Functions of GE ML Unit
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-63
These control command can be operated via housekeeping output ports on

the SRT 1F system, if necessary. The control items can be set per card
individually.

Table 2.16 shows alarm and condition items for a GE ML set (GE MLM +
GE MLS).
Table 2.16 - Alarms and Conditions Function of GE ML Unit
SRT 1F
2-64 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.11.6 Gigabit Ethernet Multi-Link Adaptors (GE ML ADPT and OCC

GE ML ADPT)
Optional Gigabit Ethernet ML Adaptor (GE ML ADPT and OCC GE ML

ADPT) unit is coaxial cable connection unit between GE MLS and MSTU
for Gigabit Ethernet multilink operation using NxSTM-1 transmission lines.
GE ML ADPT can be equipped in any baseband interface pertaining to
main working channels, whilst OCC GE ML ADPT is reserved to work in
conjunction with MSTU equipped in the protection slot.
Each GE ML ADPT and OCC GE ML ADPT unit transfers following
signals simultaneously;--
A pseudo STM-1 CMI signal to/from MSTU
2.11.7 Occasional Traffic Interface (OCC INTF)
Optional occasional traffic interface (OPT INTF) unit is provided for

protection channel for STM-1 electrical as low priority traffic channel.
The OCC INTF unit is installed in the next slot of last baseband interface
unit.
2.11.8 Occasional Traffic Interface (OCC OPT)
Optional occasional traffic interface (OCC OPT) unit is provided for

protection channel for STM-1 optical without DTI interface as low priority
traffic channel.
The OPT OCC unit is installed in the next slot of last baseband interface
unit.
2.11.9 Occasional Traffic Interface (OCC OPT DTI)
Optional occasional traffic interface (OCC OPT DTI) unit is provided for
protection channel for STM-1 optical with DTI as low priority traffic
channel.
The OCC OPT DTI unit is installed in the next slot of last baseband
interface unit.
2.11.10 Occasional Traffic Interface (OCC GE)
Optional occasional traffic interface (OCC GE) unit is provided for

protection channel for Gigabit Ethernet as low priority traffic channel.
1000BASE-T, 1000BASE-SX or 1000BASE-LX SFP modules can be
equipped on OCC GE.
The OCC GE unit is installed in the next slot of last baseband interface
unit.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-65
2.11.11 Baseband Switch Interface (BSW INTF)
BSW INTF unit is provided only for the usage of both RPS1 and RPS2 of
radio protection switching (RPS), that is, 2x(N+1) CCDP operation.
BSW INTF unit is installed in the SCSU block of initial shelf for 2x(N+1)
CCDP operation.
2.11.12 Supervisory (SV)
The main function of SV unit is;--

Terminates Orderwire, User Channel, Radio User Channel and DCC
signals.
Provides interface of the Web based Local Craft Terminal (Web LT)
and SNMP Network Management System and ethernet.
Retrieves/registers alarm/status data for protection control and
indication, and Performance Monitoring data
Sub-PCB module (RAB, RS, VF, 64k G.703, 64k V-11) interface
Supervisory/Control of the RPS at bipolar and unipolar signal level.
Provides Orderwire functions.
Registers the NE setting (provisioning) data.
Relays Housekeeping (8 item input and 4 item output)
DCC connection to/from LINE and RADIO side
Figure 2-34 shows LEDs switches and connectors of SV unit.
SRT 1F
2-66 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 2-34 Front View of SV Unit
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-67
LED Indication
The SV unit displays a summary of the alarms/status conditions on the
SRT 1F equipment (NE).
Table 2.17 - LED indication of SV unit
LED Indication
Group LED Color Status Description
Indication UNIT/RCI Red Steady on Unit failure of SV unit
for
SV unit Blinking RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of SV unit
Green (Y) Steady on Normal operation of SV unit
Yellow (G) Blinking Configuration mismatch of SV unit
LINE Red Steady on SINT/ RSC/DCC signal failure
Green (Y) Steady on SINT/ RSC/DCC signal normal
MISC Red Steady on Housekeeping alarm (DI) on
ACS/SWDL Green (Y) Steady on NE is logged on by user
Red Steady on Mismatch of software version
Green (Y) Blinking Software download on progress
Indication NORM Green (Y) Steady on Normal operation of NE
for
NE NE ALM/RCI Red Steady on CR/MJ/MN/WR alarm of any unit in NE
Blinking RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of any unit in
NE
MAINT Yellow (G) Steady on Maintenance condition of NE
CARD OUT Red Steady on CARD OUT alarm of NE more serious than
WR
Yellow (G) Steady on CARD OUT alarm of NE not more serious
than WR
ACO Yellow (G) Steady on Alarm cut off of NE
Orderwire CALL E1 Green (Y) Blinking E1 orderwire is being called
CALL E2 Green (Y) Blinking E2 orderwire is being called
Note : Green (Y) = Green for LED mode 2, Yellow for LED mode 1.
Yellow (G) = Yellow for LED mode 2, Green for LED mode 1.
SRT 1F
2-68 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Table 2.18 - Switches and Connectors of SV unit

Switch Control
Switch Type Description
ACO SW Push Alarm cut off
LED TEST Push LED test
BZ EN Dip Open: EOW Buzzer OFF
Close: EOW Buzzer ON
ATT A, B, C, D (SNMP only) Dip Input/output attenuation setting for E1 and E2
Others --- Factory use
Connector Function
Connector Type Description
E1-2W RJ-11 E1 orderwire 2-wire telephone
E2-2W RJ-11 E2 orderwire 2-wire telephone
LAN1 RJ-45 F-interface / Q-interface
LAN2 RJ-45 F-interface / Q-interface
SINT2 CLK Multi-pin Clock supply for RPS2 in RST mode
Others --- Factory use
Data Back-up
In SNMP/IP type of MCF/Controller card no EEPROM back-up is
provided, but full configuration data can be stored on laptop by proper
HOTTOOL software tool.
Housekeeping (HK)
8 items of HK alarm input (DI, Digital Input)) and 4 items of HK control
output (DO, Digital Output) are available as standard supply. HK
capabilities can be improved by equipping optional HK units in SCSU.
Digital Communication Channel (DCC)

A DCCR or DCCM line (DCCM line option is available if TCU is equipped
and MST mode is selected) is available as standard, transmitted by the
Main 1 channel and Protection channel for parallel path duplication RPS.
For double RPS version of SNMP/IP type SV, the DCCR or DCCM line of
the RPS2 can be enabled by equipping the optional ECU SNMP/IP unit
(see dedicated section below).
Orderwire Function
Two fully independent EOW channels, E1 and E2, are provided.
SRT 1F provides two RJ-11 modular jacks for orderwire telephone
connection of E1 and E2. In addition, one extension 4-wire type for E1
and E2 is provided on the backplane for connection to external equipment
(e.g. other SRT1F terminal). The number of 4-wire extension can be
optionally increased by equipping one or two OWBR (Order Wire
Branching) units in the available slots adjacent to the SV controller card.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-69
Timing
The SV card can handle the synchronization by extracting the clock from
incoming STM-1 signal as RST mode operating module. As an option, a
TCU (Timing Control Unit) card can be equipped to enable the operation
under MST mode, or a RST sub-module can be equipped on the SV card
to activate the enhanced/protected RST mode in the system.
Rack Alarm Bus (RAB)

Visible and Audible Warning, Minor, Major, Critical and General alarms
are supported by the controller and relayed to an external panel via
proper RAB connector on the backplane.
Only the general alarm is provided as standard, while all the other alarms
are enabled via proper RAB sub-module to be equipped on the controller
card.
2.11.13 Housekeeping (HK) (optional card)
The SV unit can accommodate 8 items of Housekeeping (HK) input and 4

items of HK output.
To increase Housekeeping (HK) in/out items, maximum two HK units can
be installed as option.
Number of item HK input (DI) HK output (DO)

SV unit only 8 4
SV unit + HK 1 (*1) 40 20
SV unit + HK 1 + HK 2 (*1) 72 36
SRT 1F
2-70 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 2-35 Housekeeping in/out (DI/DO) Interface
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-71
2.11.14 HK & 120/75 Impedance Converter (HK CONV) (optional card)
Optional HK CONV unit includes HK unit plus 120/75 Impedance

Converter. Each HK CONV unit provides 120/75 Ohm impedance
converter for Dsub 9-pin 120 Ohm interface to 1.0/2.3 coaxial type 75
Ohm interface for 2x Wayside Traffic channels when BSW OPT 1+1 DTI
or GigaEthernet interface is installed.
This HK CONV unit can be installed to the HK unit slot. Up to two HK
CONV units per each K-shelf can be installed.
The following picture shows example of use of HK converter unit in
conjunction with BSW GE or BSW OPT 1+1DTI.
Figure 2-36 Use of HK CONV unit with BSW GE or BSW OPT 1+1 DTI
The following picture shows the block diagrams of HK unit with converter
function.
SRT 1F
2-72 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 2-37 Block diagram of HK CONV unit
The HK CONV unit is equipped with HW switches for

Balanced/Unbalanced setting of the 75OHM interface, and for factory
testing. The following table shows the default setting for such switches:
Table 2.19 - HW switches setting and factory default for HK CONV unit
The HK CONV unit is equipped with 1 LED for CARD FAIL alarming
(UNIT/RCI LED: same as standard HK unit), plus 4 additional LEDs for
correct inputting of specified impedance for each signal input available on
the card.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-73
Table 2.20 - LED specification on HK CONV unit
The connector pin assignment of the Dsub9-pin connector available on

the HK CONV unit for the 120 OHM interface is as follows:
Table 2.21 - Pin assignment for the 120OHM connector available on HK UNIT
This connector shall be interfaced with Wayside 120 OHM connector

Dsub37-pin available on the backplane, which are requested to be
converted into 75 OHM. The following picture shows an example of the
connection necessary to convert into 75 OHM both wayside channels
available per each STM-1, i.e. the WSS (Wayside from SOH) and the
WSR (Wayside from RFCOH), by using one HK CONV unit.
Figure 2-38 onnection between HK CONV and backplane to convert WSS and WSR of an
STM-1 into 75ohm
SRT 1F
2-74 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.11.15 Embedded Communication Unit for SNMP/IP (ECU SNMP)

(optional card)
A DCCR or DCCM line (DCCM line option is available if TCU is equipped

and MST mode is selected) is available as standard, transmitted by the
Main 1 channel and Protection channel for parallel path duplication RPS.
For double RPS version of SNMP/IP type SV, the DCCR or DCCM line of
the RPS2 can be enabled by equipping the optional ECU SNMP/IP unit.
Please refer to the following schemes for DCC configuration without ECU
and with ECU (applicable only to double RPS version on SNMP/IP SV).
SV
LAN
Controller
LAN
GP1-W1-RS-LINE GP1-W1-RS-RADIO
HUB
GP1-W1-MS-LINE GP1-W1-MS-RADIO
Figure 2-39 - DCC termination by SNMP/IP SV without ECU for SNMP/IP
SV
LAN
Controller
LAN
HUB
ECU
HUB
Figure 2-40 - DCC termination by SNMP/IP SV with ECU for SNMP/IP (applicable to Double
RPS SV only)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-75
2.11.16 OWBR Unit (Optional card)
For each of the two E1 and E2 standard EOW channels available, SRT1F
equipment makes available as standard on the backplane just one 4W
extension for EOW inter-connection between two terminals in cascade
hops (backbone). In case of nodal SRT1F station with more than two
SRT1F terminals, the EOW inter-connection is generally done by acting
on co-located MUX settings.
In order to ease the EOW inter-connections in SRT1F nodal stations, the
OWBR unit allows branching of up to 5 EOW extensions per terminal, per
each EOW channel (E1 and E2). An example of use of OWBR unit is
shown in par. 2.11.16.1.
One unit allows branching up to 3 EOW extensions per terminal for E1
and E2, while two units allow branching up to 5 EOW extensions per
terminal for E1 and E2, as per figure below.
Figure 2-41 - Branching Extensions for the case of one OWBR unit equipped
and two OWBR equipped
The card is equipped in one of the two slots available adjacently to the SV
controller card slot. If such slots are already used for other optional cards
(ECU card, AUX/LAN card) of course they cannot be used for OWBR. For
the case of expansion to 5 EOW extensions (two OWBR cards needed),
of course both slots adjacent to SV controller card shall be available (not
used for other optional cards).
SRT 1F
2-76 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Block Diagram
The following figure shows block diagram of OWBR card.
Figure 2-42 - Block diagram of OWBR card
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-77
2.11.16.1 Example of use of OWBR card

Here is given one example of EOW branching network implemented by
means of OWBR unit in nodal SRT1F station where three SRT1F
terminals are co-located: equipment A (NE-A), equipment B (NE-B) and
equipment C (NE-C). Logic scheme and cable connections for this case
are depicted in the following figures.
Figure 2-43 - Example of use of OWBR in three-terminals SRT1F site logic scheme
SRT 1F
2-78 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 2-44 - Example of use of OWBR in three-terminals SRT1F site cable connections
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-79
2.11.16.2 Electrical Specifications

The following table shows the electrical specifications for the EOW 4W
connections.
Connection 4W (4-Wire)
Input nominal level (Tx) -4 dBr
Input level range -16 to +7 dBr, 1dB step
Output nominal level (Rx) -4 dBr
Output level range -24 to +7 dBr, 1 dB step
Provisioning Via ATT switches on the card, no LCT
Card Maintenance Not hot-swappable (switch OFF SV card before unplug OWBR card)
The following table shows the pinout of the D-sub37 connector on OWBR
card.
Figure 2-45 - D-sub37 Connector pinout
SRT 1F
2-80 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.11.16.3 Card Layout and HW switches

The following picture shows the card layout of OWBR unit.
Figure 2-46 - OWBR card layout
The ATT switches on the card are used to modify the voltage attenuation
for each available input and output of E1 and E2 channels independently.
The following table shows the relation between the ATT switches
name/position and the E1/E2 inputs/outputs.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-81
For each ATT switch, the voltage attenuation can be chosen

independently by acting on the switch position of the 5 digit (1,2,4,8,16)
block of ATT switch. The factory default position of these digits is
indicated on the card layout picture shown above, which corresponds to
12 dB attenuation for each Input and 11 dB attenuation for each Output
(in/out resulting level: -4dBm).
2.11.16.4 Alarms and LEDs

Besides the pins for the EOW 4W connections, the D-sub37 connectors
has got also pins reserved for the PS FAIL alarm, to be forwarded to the
controller card (and to NetViewer) via housekeeping bits function. PS
FAIL alarm is a relay alarm (Normal-open, Alarm-close), having the
following specifications:
DC 110V/1A
AC 125V/0.3 A.
The card has got two LEDs specified as follows:
SRT 1F
2-82 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.11.17 Timing Control Unit (TCU) for MST mode (optional card)
When working in MST mode, the SRT 1F system shall be synchronized to

the reference clock source of the network. In this case, one Timing
Control Unit (TCU) shall be equipped to supply the required clock signal
to the SRT 1F terminal, which acts as an SDH synchronization source.
When working in RST mode, instead, the clock signal is directly extracted
in the SCSU by the incoming STM-1 signal for internal use, so that TCU
card is not required and the SRT1F does not act as an SDH
synchronization source.
In case of MST mode, the SCSU provides an extra slot and
automatic/manual switching facilities for TCU unit redundancy (X and Y)
as option.
The operational mode can be chosen as MST or RST, so that TCU card
is an optional item, not required in case of RST mode.
The TCU accepts the synchronization timing clock signal from three (3)
STM-1 lines and/or two (2) external clock inputs (2.048 MHz or 2.048
Mb/s), then regenerates the clock signal to supply to the NE and external
clock output port. Summarizing:
Incoming STM-1 Signal (LINE) to TCU, maximum 3 inputs

From STM-1 tributary input (Tributary side)
From MSTU receiver output (Radio side)
External Clock Input (EXT) to TCU, maximum 2 inputs

2.048 MHz or
2.048 Mb/s
It is not possible to set the STM-1 signal coming from protection MSTU
receiver output (Radio side) as synchronization timing clock source. It is
not possible to set STM-1 signal coming from occasional traffic card line
input (Tributary side) as synchronization timing clock source.
Input connectors for external clock are located in the connection area of
the SCSU.
In case of signal source input loss the TCU generates the clock signal
internally:
Holdover mode, the system maintains clock accuracy of +/- 0.37
ppm for 24 hours. After 24 hours, the clock accuracy is +/- 4.6 ppm.
Internal free-running mode, +/- 4.6 ppm G.813.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-83
2.11.17.1 Synchronization Mode

SRT1F TCU has got two synchronization modes. In the following
description, Synchronous Source Unit (SSU) is defined as high quality
reference clock source equipment to generate and regenerate the
primary/secondary clock signal of the network in accordance with ITU-T
Rec. G.813.
In the MODE 1, the system receives the reference clock source from
other equipment through the STM-1 signal input (LINE) or EXT CLK input
connectors (EXT), and there is not any reference signal output to SSU.
EXT CLK (X)

(Y) EC Selection (Max. 3) EC Output to other
Equipment (T0)
LINE CLK PRI 1 PLL
PRI 2 according to Quality
2 Mb/s or 2 MHz
PRI 3 (SSMB) & Priority
INT CLK TCU
EC supply to SRT 1F
Figure 2-47 Block Diagram of Synchronization MODE 1
In the MODE 2, the clock selection is made in two separate steps, and
involves regeneration of the synchronization signal through the SSU (T4).
EC Output to
LC Selection (Max. 3) the SSU (T4)
LINE CLK PRI 1
PRI 2 according to Quality 2 Mb/s or 2 MHz
(SSMB) & Priority
PRI 3
SSU
EXT CLK (X) EC Selection (Max. 2) EC Output to other

Equipment (T0)
(Y) according to Quality PLL
(SSMB) & Priority 2 Mb/s or 2 MHz
INT CLK
S1 byte: 111111 DNU
TCU
EC supply to SRT 1F
Figure 2-48 Block Diagram of Synchronization MODE 2
SRT 1F
2-84 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.11.17.2 Clock Mode

Two clock modes are available for TCU setting, the TCU mode and the
THROUGH mode.
TCU mode
On the down stream (from the primary station to the end station), the
equipment clock synchronizes to the signal incoming from the primary
station. On the up stream (from the end station to the primary station), the
clock synchronizes to the signal incoming from the primary station on the
down stream.
THROUGH mode
On the down stream, the equipment clock synchronizes to the signal
incoming from primary station. On the up stream, the clock synchronizes
to the signal incoming from the end station.
TCU mode THROUGH mode
SRT 1F SRT 1F
TCU TCU
Down stream
Primary End
station station
Up stream
Figure 2-49 - Clock Mode of TCU
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-85
2.11.17.3 Quality Level (S1 byte)

The quality level of the synchronization source is defined by the S1 byte
of RSOH. The TCU selects best quality source as reference.
Table 2.22 - S1 byte code and Quality level
Quality S1 byte
Quality description
Level bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 bit 8
2 0 0 1 0 Traceable to ITU-T G. 811 (Best quality)
3 0 1 0 0 Traceable to ITU-T G. 812 transit
4 1 0 0 0 Traceable to ITU-T G. 812 local
5 1 0 1 1 TCU internal clock
6 0 0 0 0 Quality unknown
6 1 1 1 1 Do not use for synchronization
2.11.17.4 Line Clock Priority

Generally, the SRT 1F receives the reference clock from the incoming
STM-1 signal. The SRT 1F facing the end station accepts the source from
the Line side (Access ID = GP1-<W1-W7>-L), input to BSW unit. The
SRT 1F facing the master station accepts the source from the Radio side
(Access ID = GP1-<W1-W7>-R), the output of MSTU receiver.
Master MUX SRT 1F SRT 1F MUX SRT 1F SRT 1F MUX End

station station
Line side Radio side Line side Radio side

GP1-Wn-L GP1-Wn-R GP1-Wn-L GP1-Wn-R
Note: n = Main channel number

Normally, Main 1 (n = 1) shall be selected as Priority 1 (PRI 1)
Figure 2-50 - Example of Line Clock Selection
SRT 1F
2-86 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.11.18 RST sub-module for enhanced RST mode (optional module to

be installed on the SV unit)
One of the main features of the controller card SNMP/IP is the possibility
to set the SRT1F terminal as with MST (Multiplex Section Termination)
mode (by equipping the TSU, Timing Source Unit) or as with RST
(Regenerator Section Termination, also defined in literature as without
MST) mode (by simply not equipping the TSU).
This RS sub-module (to be installed on the SV unit) provides an
enhanced type of RST mode for improved performances also in critical
synchronization environment, where the synchronization network is not
protected against synchronization failures.
Summarizing, the synchronization mode for SRT1F with SNMP/IP
controller can be:
Operation Mode for SRT1F SNMP/IP Need of TSU Need of RS sub-module

MST YES NO
RST type 1 (typical) NO NO
RST type 2 (enhanced) NO YES
2.11.18.1 Applicability
The applicability of RS sub-module has got some limitations:
Applicable to controller cards SNMP/IP having FW V06L15 minimum.
Applicable to minimal configuration 2+1 or 2+0 with W1 and W2 slots
equipped.
Not applicable to 1+1, 1+0, nor 2+0 equipped as 1+1 with OCC card
and disabled RSC.
2.11.18.2 Functional Description of RST mode type 2

When RS sub-module is equipped and RS mode type 2 is selected via
Web LT, basic transmission functional signals such as DCCR, RSC, E1
are duplicated onto the RFCOH 2Mbps Wayside channel, instead of
usual STM-1 frame, and protected by 1:1 redundancy (RFCOH WS of W1
and W2 are used), thus providing better robustness against
synchronization impairments, than the standard RST mode type 1.
As a consequence:
2Mbps Wayside channels on the RFCOH are not available for user.
Instead, 2Mbps Wayside channels over SOH are still available for
customer use.
Both RSC-X and RSC-Y (Radio Service Channel, main and
protection) cannot be selected via Web LT which STM-1 to use
among P-W7, since its belonging STM-1 frame depends on the
selected RFCOH wayside channel.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-87
E1 radio side cannot be selected via Web LT which STM-1 to use

among P-W7, since its belonging STM-1 frame depends on the
selected RFCOH wayside channel.
E1 connection among co-located SRT1F terminals line side shall be
done via dedicated 4-wire connections using subD connectors
available on backplane, and cannot be done via tributary connection.
DCCR connection among co-located SRT1F terminals line side shall
be done via dedicated connections using LAN connectors (Q-
interface) available on MCF/Controller unit, and cannot be done via
tributary connection.
The following table summarizes the above mentioned limitations:
Operation Mode for MST RST type 1 RST type 2
SRT1F SNMP/IP
Wayside SOH 1 per STM-1 1 per STM-1 1 per STM-1
Wayside RFCOH 1 per STM-1 1 per STM-1 NOT AVAILABLE
RSC-X Selectable P-W7 Selectable P-W7 Same as selected WS RFCOH
RSC-Y Selectable P-W7 Selectable P-W7 Same as selected WS RFCOH
E1 radio side Selectable P-W7 Selectable P-W7 Same as selected WS RFCOH
E1 line side E1 or 4-wire E1 or 4-wire 4-wire
DCCR line side DCCR or LAN DCCR or LAN cable LAN cable
cable
2.11.18.3 Block Diagram

The following picture shows the block diagram of RS sub-module.
Figure 2-51 - Block diagram of RS sub-module
SRT 1F
2-88 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.11.18.4 Card Layout

The following picture shows the card layout of RS sub-module mounted
on the MCF Controller card (SV SNMP/IP). The controller card SNMP/IP
can be single RPS or double RPS.
Figure 2-52 - Card Layout of SV card with RS sub-module
The RS sub-module is equipped with HW switches, already set at 120

Ohm position at factory (75 Ohm position is not available). The D-sub 25-
pin connector allows the interfacing towards the 120Ohm interface of the
RFCOH Wayside channels available on the backplane.
Figure 2-53 - RS sub-module layout and HW switches
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-89
Table 2.23 - Pin layout of D-Sub 25 connector on RS sub-module
The following figures show the connections details between the D-sub 25
connector on RS sub-module and the D-sub 37 connectors available on
backplane for 120 Ohm interface WS/UC (Wayside/User Channel) of the
two STM-1 signals W1 and W2.
Figure 2-54 - Cable connection between RS sub-module on SV unit and

Wayside Traffic connector on backplane
SRT 1F
2-90 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 2-55 - Cable connection between RS sub-module on SV unit and

Wayside Traffic connector on backplane
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-91
2.11.19 Rack Alarm Bus Sub-module (RAB, optional modules to be

installed on the SV unit)
The SRT1F system provides some Rack Alarm Bus (RAB) functions as a
standard feature, via a dedicated connector on the backplane, called RAB
connector. The following figure shows the pin connector layout:
PIN PIN
No. Description Remarks No. Description Remarks
8 COMMON
15 *ACO IN ACO Ground line 7 VIS MN Visible Miner alarm
14 ACO IN Alarm Cut Off IN 6 AUD MN Audible Miner alarm
13 NE ALM-N NE alarm (N) 5 VIS MJ Visible Major alarm
12 NE ALM-C NE alarm (C) 4 AUD MJ Audible Major alarm
11 RAB-MNT Maintenance 3 VIS CR Visible Critical alarm
10 VIS WR Visible Warning 2 AUD CR Audible Critical alarm
9 AUD WR Audible Warning 1 FG Frame Ground
While the pins 1, 8, 12, 13, 14, 15 are enabled as standard function, all
the other pins are enabled by mounting proper RAB sub-module on the
MCF/Controller card.
The following picture shows how the RAB sub-module is mounted on the
SNMP SV MCF/Controller board. The RAB sub-module is plugged on
MCF/Controller card and fixed by screw bolts.
RAB sub-module
SRT 1F
2-92 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
2.11.20 RUC Sub-modules for RFCOH User Channel (RUC VF, RUC
G.703, RUC V.11, optional modules to be installed on the SV
unit)
SRT1F provides as standard one user channel 64kbps G.703 (using F1

byte of SOH) per each STM-1 working channel equipped with BSW
Electrical or BSW Optical 1+0.
Additionally, up to two optional 64kbps user channels using RFCOH can
be added, by mounting the proper sub-module on the MCF/Controller
card. One sub-module is required per each RUC to be added.
Note that in case of BSW GigaEthernet and/or BSW OPT 1+1 DTI, no
standard user channels are available, so the only way to have user
channels is to exploit the optional capability of RFCOH user channels.
The equipping rule is: maximum quantity is two per each MCF/Controller
card. Even mixed choice among the three types is possible (e.g one RUC
DGTL G.703 plus one RUC V.11 in the same MCF/controller card).
The technical specifications of RUC sub-modules are indicated in the

following tables.
Analogue Voice Frequency (VF) Interface

Impedance 600 ohm
Input nominal level (Tx) -16 dBr
Input level range -16 to +3dBr, 1 dB step
Output nominal level (Rx) +3 dBr
Output level range -24 to +3 dBr, 1 dB step
Maximum voice level 3 dBm0
Amplitude Response G.712
Signal to Distortion G.712
Through-repeater function Supported
Connector 4W interface on Dsub 25
Connector Location SCS backplane
Quantity of Connectors 1 connector for up to two channels,
in common with DGTL G.703 and V.11 Interfaces
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-93
DGTL G.703 Interface

Impedance 120 ohm
Type G.703 co-directional or contra-directional
Through-repeater function Not supported
Connector Dsub 25
in common with VF and digital V.11 Interface
V.11 Interface
Impedance 120 ohm
Type V.11 contra-directional
Through-repeater function Not supported
Connector Dsub 25
in common with VF and digital G.703 Interface
The following pictures show the block diagrams of RUC sub-modules.
Figure 2-56 - Block diagram of VF sub-module
SRT 1F
2-94 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Figure 2-57 - Block diagram of DGTL G.703 sub-module
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 2-95
Figure 2-58 - Block diagram of V.11 sub-module
SRT 1F
2-96 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION
3.1 Preparations for Installation

This Part describes the procedure for preparing the SRT 1F rack for
installation. It covers:
Storage
Preparations for unpacking
Unpacking procedures
IMPORTANT
THE SRT 1F EQUIPMENT MUST BE INSTALLED BY SUITABLY

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
THE SRT 1F EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN A

RESTRICTED ACCESS LOCATION ONLY.
FOR THE EXECUTION OF FIELD ACTIVITIES MORE DOCUMENTS

ARE AVAILABLE TO SUPPORT THE FIELD OPERATOR.
1. INSTALLATION INFORMATION
2. FIELD TEST PROTOCOLS
3. FIELD TEST PROCEDURE
PLEASE CONTACT NOKIA SIEMENS NETWORKS

REPRESENTATIVES TO REQUEST SUCH DOCUMENTATION.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-1
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.1.1.1 Storage, Unpacking and Inspection

This procedure describes the unpacking and inspection of the SRT 1F
equipment. It assumes that all equipment has been received and that all
data forms and job engineering drawings have been completed and are
available.
3.1.1.2 Storage
When the equipment is to be kept in storage, leave the equipment in the
shipping containers. Store slide-in units in the special bags and the units
were originally shipped in.
The bags are coated with a conductive material and will protect the slide-
in units from damage by electrostatic discharge (ESD). Figure 3-1 shows
7
examples of ESD warning labels.
Figure 3-1 - Electrostatic Discharge Warning Labels
After unloading the containers, check the contents against the invoice
sheet. Check containers for external damage, quantity and contents.
If any defects or errors are found, immediately contact the person in
charge for proper remedy.
Do not leave the containers outdoors. Store the containers in a place
provided with adequate roof cover which will protect the containers from
rain and dust. Keep the containers in a dry place.
3.1.1.3 Preparation
The unpacking site shall be protected from rain, water, dust etc.
Prepare sufficient space for the unpacking site.
Prepare the tools for the unpacking of the containers.
The quantity of the equipment and installation materials should be
checked while unpacking.
SRT 1F
3-2 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.1.1.4 Unpacking and Inspection

Before unpacking the equipment, inspect the containers for any signs of
damage that may have occurred during shipment. File any claims for
shipping damage with the transportation company according to their
published procedure.
When unpacking the equipment, use the packing list that accompanies
each shipment to determine that all items are present before continuing
with the installation.
Notify the nearest Nokia Siemens Networks representative if there is a
shortage of any kind.
3.1.1.5 General Unpacking Method

1. Cut the straps that hold the cover on the container.
2. Open the cover and pull out the sealed polythene bag.
3. Cut immediately under the seal with scissors or a knife.
4. Remove the equipment from the pack by gripping the protectors
attached to the equipment.
5. Immediately check the contents, according to the invoice sheets.
6. Check if the component and parts have been damaged.
7. Notify the nearest Nokia Siemens Networks representative if there is
damage of any kind.
2
Open the cover(1), and remove
the shock absorbing material(2).
Take out the rack(3), wrapped
3 with polythene sheet, from the
packing box(4).
Figure 3-2 - Extracting the Rack from the Packing Box
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-3
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Open the packing box(3), and remove

1 the shock absorbing material(1).
Take out the MSTU unit(2), wrapped
with polythene sheet(two pieces), from
the packing box(3).
2
Figure 3-3 - Extracting the Unit from the Packing Box
3.1.2 Storage of Spare Units
Spare units are separately packed from other main frame units. These
units should be kept in clean places avoiding high temperature and high
humidity.
These units are stored in the special bags which are coated with a
conductive material and will protect spare units from damage by
electrostatic discharge (ESD). See Figure 3-1, for indication markings.
7
3.1.3 Accessories
There are two kinds of accessories.

Installation, such as connector plugs or connector assembly,
Maintenance, according to the routine maintenance plan,
maintenance accessories should be stored in the maintenance area.
SRT 1F
3-4 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.2 Optical Fiber Cables and Jumpers
3.2.1 Warning and General Handling
This procedure lists precautionary measures which must be followed

when dealing with optical fibers and optical fiber components.
3.2.1.1 Tools Required

No tools are required for this procedure.
3.2.1.2 Warning Messages

The following safety precautions must be observed when installing, using
or maintaining electronic equipment. These precautions ensure the safety
of all personnel and the protection of equipment.
WARNING
Never look into the end of an optical cable or fibre pigtail.
PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE or BLINDNESS can occur if laser

radiation is present.
Never handle exposed fibre with bare hands or permit contact with
the body. Fibre fragments entering the skin are difficult to detect and
remove.
Figure 3-4 shows the warning labels that are attached to all laser emitting
7
and receiving units:
Figure 3-4 - Laser Warning Labels
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-5
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.2.1.3 Storage
1. Protective caps are provided with the optical connectors of the optical
cable (see Figure 3-5).
7
2. Do not expose the optical cables to direct sunlight. The recommended

storage temperature is 10 to 60C (14 to 140F), and the maximum
recommended relative humidity is 90%.
Figure 3-5 - Protective Cap (SC/PC Connector)
3.2.1.4 Handling
1. Do not pull the optical cable when the connector is attached to the
optical unit (see Figure 3-6).
7
Figure 3-6 - Optical Cable Pulling

2. Take care not to bend or obstruct the optical cable (see Figure 3-7).
7
Figure 3-7 - Optical Cable Bending and Obstruction Limits
SRT 1F
3-6 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3. Do not bend the optical cable at a radius of less than 50 mm (see

Figure 3-8).
7
Figure 3-8 - Optical Cable Minimum Bending Radius

4. Do not twist the optical cable more than 360 per meter of length (see
Figure 3-9).
7
Figure 3-9 - Optical Cable Twist Limits

5. Do not drop or step on the optical cable and do not subject it to
excessive vibration (see Figure 3-10).
7
Figure 3-10 - Optical Cable Vibration and Shock Damage
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-7
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.2.2 Connection and Disconnection of Optical Cables
This procedure details the precautions which must be taken to preserve

the integrity of optical connectors and cables during connection and
disconnection.

No tools are required for this procedure.
3.2.2.2 Preparation
1. Verify that there are no serious defects in the optical cables and
connectors.
2. Clean the optical fibre end surface with a cotton swab soaked in
alcohol.
3.2.2.3 Connection Procedure

1. While holding the connector body, insert the connector. Ensure the
connector key engages.
3.2.2.4 Disconnection Procedure

1. Gently pull the connector body away from the optical coupling
interface. Be careful not to pull or bend the optical cable.
2. Place a protective cap over the optical cable connector
3.2.3 Cleaning of Optical Cables and Connectors
This section provides procedures for the cleaning of optical fibre cables
and connectors.

The tools required are:
Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit (CLETOP Reel Type A)
If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is not available use:
Pure alcohol
Mediswabs
Lens Cleaning Paper
SRT 1F
3-8 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.2.3.2 Procedure
If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is available:
1. Insert the connector into the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit.
2. Twist the connector back and forth.
3. Slide the connector down the slot in the cleaning kit.
4. Repeat Steps 1 to 3 in the other slot of the cleaning kit.
5. Inspect the connector in accordance with the criteria detailed in par. 0.
7
If the Optical Fibre Cleaning Kit is not available:

1. Use a Mediswab dampened with alcohol to clean the end of the fibre
connector.
2. Allow the connector to air dry.
3. Wipe the end of the connector with lens cleaning paper.
4. Inspect the connector in accordance with the criteria detailed in the
following point, Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-9
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.2.4 Inspection of Optical Cables and Connectors
3.2.4.1 Connector End-face Definitions

The condition of the connector end-face is a significant factor for the long-
term operation of the network. This procedure defines the requirements
for the inspection of terminated optical fibres.
3.2.4.2 End-face Zone Definitions

The connector end-face is divided into the following regions:
core
cladding
For inspection purposes the cladding region is divided into internal and
external areas. See Figure 3-11.
7
Internal Cladding area

=62.5 m
External Cladding area

=125 m
Adhesive Bond
Ferrule Area
Figure 3-11 - Connector End-face
3.2.4.3 Defect Definitions

The following definitions apply:
a scratch defect is a linear extended surface mark
a pit defect is a localised surface mark
a crack defect is a stress fracture either wholly within the fibre or
intersecting the fibre surface
a chip defect has material broken away from the fibre following the
generation of crack defects
SRT 1F
3-10 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.2.4.4 Scratch and Pit Defects

The core region must be free from blemishes.
3.2.4.5 Chip Defects

The core region and the inner cladding region must be free from defects,
either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the surface.
The outer cladding region should be free from defects that extend for
more than 25% of the cladding circumference, either as flaws within the
fibre or cracks intersecting the surface. See Figure 3-12 for acceptance
7
criteria.
Acceptable:
Chip in outer cladding
area only
Internal cladding area
Unacceptable:
Chip extends into
External cladding area
inner cladding area
Acceptable:
Chip in outer cladding
area only
Figure 3-12 - Chip Defects
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-11
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.2.4.6 Crack Defects

The core region and the inner cladding region must be free from defects,
either as flaws within the fibre or cracks intersecting the surface. The
outer cladding region should be free from defects that extend for more
than 25% of the cladding circumference, either as flaws within the fibre or
cracks intersecting the surface.
See Figure 3-13 for acceptance criteria.
7
Unacceptable:
Crack extends
for more than 25% of
cladding circumference
Internal cladding area
Unacceptable:
Crack extends into
External cladding area inner cladding area
Acceptable:
Crack in outer
cladding
area only
Figure 3-13 - Crack Defects
SRT 1F
3-12 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

Fiberscope
3.2.4.8 Procedure
To view the optical fiber connector:
1. Insert the connector into the Fiberscope, using the adapter if required.
2. Depress the trigger to turn the Fiberscope on.
3. Adjust the Fiberscope, if necessary, to position the image in the
center of the viewing area, and focus.
4. Clean the connector face in accordance with par. 3.2.3 Cleaning of
7
Optical Cables and Connectors, if required.

5. If the fiber does not meet the acceptance criteria due to damage, the
cable must be replaced.
6. If the fiber does not meet the acceptance criteria after cleaning, and
further cleaning is not effective, the cable must be replaced.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-13
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.3 Rack Installation

This Part describes the precautions and the procedure required for the
installation of the SRT 1F rack.
3.3.1 Precautions
As a general precaution, installing sites should be selected as follows:
3.3.1.1 Suitable Places for Equipment Installation

Do not install in places subject to vibration.
Do not install in dusty places.
Avoid places which becomes high in temperature. (recommended
range 20C to 40C).
Install on a flat and level floor.
Do not eat or drink in the vicinity of the equipment.
Keep away from strong electromagnetic fields.
When cleaning equipment, use a soft bristled brush and a vacuum
cleaner with plastic nozzle or low pressure dry air.
3.3.2 Safety Measures for Equipment Handling.
Many slide-in units can be damaged by electrostatic discharge during

installation, removal, storage, or shipment. Such units are stamped with
anti-electrostatic marks and require special care in handling and storage.
When handling slide-in units for installation, removal or option setting,
always wear a wrist strap which is connected to safety ground.
Hold only the edge of slide-in units. Do not touch IC leads or circuitry on
the units. Transport and store slide-in units in the special bags in which
the units were originally shipped. Always fold the open end of the bag
over and close it securely with tape. When returning units to Nokia
Siemens Networks use these special bags. Use the original shipping
containers whenever possible.
During installation or replacement, all slide-in units should be seated with
a slow, but firm motion. They should not be pushed quickly into slots.
Many critical units have longer power connector pins to minimize power
surges during installation. Slow insertion will ensure that the slide-in units
are not damaged.
SRT 1F
3-14 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.3.3 Tools Required
Standard hand tools and socket wrench set are required.
Wrist strap - to be worn at all times when handling circuit cards.
3.3.4 Preparation
Use working gloves while installing and securing the equipment

According to the local plans and procedures, the main structure must
already be installed before installation of the equipment begins.
Check and ensure that all civil works necessary for the installation of
the equipment have been completed.
Ensure that these checks are made before the start of the installation
work. If anything is wrong or incomplete, take corrective steps before
starting the installation work.
3.3.4.1 Rack Mounting

When mounting the equipment rack, pay attention to other nearby
equipment and keep enough space to erect the equipment rack.
Before mounting the rack, heavy units such as MSTU must be taken
off (originally, these are separately packed from the equipment rack,
for safe transportation).
Ensure that each unit is properly inserted and secured, otherwise the
units will drop out of the shelf when mounting the bay upright.
To avoid unexpected material from dropping off, remove in advance
the material which easily mounts into the equipment rack.
3.3.4.2 Rack Securing

Temporarily remove the expansion K-shelf from the bottom of the rack
(if equipped).
Stand the rack in the vertical position at the designated bay layout.
First securing the top of the rack, then the base.
Use the ratchet wrench and suitable length extension bar to tighten
the bolts for fixing.
Mount again the expansion K-shelf previously removed at the bottom
of the rack (if equipped).
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-15
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Securing the top of the rack means:

Fix the metal fitting (2) with bolts (1) (M8 x 2).
Fix the metal fitting (2) with bolts (3) (M8 x 2).
Attach FG (Frame Ground) cable with a screw (5) (M6 x 1).
Note: 1. Bolts (1),(3) (M8 x 2) represents two hex head bolts of 8 mm diameter
with two set of plain washers and spring lock washers.
2. Screw (5) (M6 x 1) represents one cross-recessed pan head screw of 6
mm diameter.
2
1
4
5 3
2
1
Figure 3-14 - Securing the top of the Rack
SRT 1F
3-16 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Securing the base of the rack means:

Fix the rack base with the anchor bolts (6) (M8 x 4).
Note: 1. All dimensions are in mm.

2. Bolts (6) (M8 x 4) represents four hex head bolts of 8 mm diameter.
545
246
Figure 3-15 - Securing the base of the Rack
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-17
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.3.5 Rack Configuration
Figure 3-16 shows the dimensions of the standard rack.

7
Figure 3-16 - Dimension of standard ETSI Rack
SRT 1F
3-18 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4 SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible) installation
3.4.1 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible) rack layout
Figure 3-17 shows overview of SRT 1F N.E. model radio equipment rack.
7
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E.
Figure 3-17 - Overview of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. configuration equipment rack
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-19
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.4.2 1+1 N.E. (Not Expansible) equipment installation
3.4.2.1 RF Port Arrangement
MAIN
SD
MAIN SD
Single Polarization with SD Dual Polarization with SD
MAIN(V)
MAIN(H)
TOP VIEW
MAIN(V) MAIN(H)
Dual Polarization without SD
Figure 3-18 RF Port Arrangement of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model
SRT 1F
3-20 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.2.2 Shelf Dimensions
INTERFACE ADAP KIT (OPON)
LEFT SIDE FRONT VIEW RIGHT SIDE
(85)
588
(503)
(294) (298)
359
Figure 3-19 Equipment Dimensions of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-21
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.4.2.3 Antenna Port Position
29 240 66.5 165

160 110
(36.5)
80 55
10
12
107
73
(294)
359
Figure 3-20 Antenna Port Position of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model
SRT 1F
3-22 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.2.4 Rack Mount Material
298
248
45
111
120.5 120.5
280
M4 x 12 (mm)
Figure 3-21 - Rack Mount Kit of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-23
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.4.2.5 Assembly of SRT1F 1+1 N.E. shelf in the rack
3.4.2.5.1 Solution with one system
8.4
242
113
(337.5) min
(74.5) min
M6 x 12 (mm)
(600)
(mm)
Figure 3-22 - Assembly of SRT1F 1+1 N.E. shelf in the rack (solution with one system)
SRT 1F
3-24 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.2.5.2 Solution with two systems and W/G H-BEND
496.5
326.5
(337.5) min
216.5
101.5
(754.5) min
103
(924.5) min
176
(1187.5) min
85 85 57.5 57.5
85
85
(mm)
Figure 3-23 - Assembly of SRT1F 1+1 N.E. shelf in the rack (solution with two systems and
W/G H-BEND)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-25
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.4.2.5.3 Solution with two systems and W/G Z-BEND

124.5
60
387.5
859.5
999.5
1262.5
496.5
326.5
216.5
101.5
103
176
(mm)
Figure 3-24 - Assembly of SRT1F 1+1 N.E. shelf in the rack (solution with two systems and
W/G Z-BEND)
SRT 1F
3-26 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.2.6 Connection of Primary Power Lead

Figure 3-25 shows the DC power connector of the shelf
7
AMP
Figure 3-25 - DC power connection to the rack of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-27
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.4.2.7 Baseband Signal Cable Connection
3.4.2.7.1 STM-1 electrical signal Interface

Figure 3-26 shows the STM-1 electrical interface baseband signal
87
connection done on BSW (Baseband Switch) unit front panel for SRT 1F
1+1 N.E.
Coaxial connectors on the BSW unit are microsiemens (1.0/2.3) and line
impedance is 75 ohms and unbalanced.
STM-1(156M) CMI IN
M M
S S
STM-1(156M) CMI OUT
T T T
C
U U U IN
S WS-S
P W OUT
V
B Wayside Signal IN/OUT

S IN
W
WS-R
OUT
Front View of BSW unit
Figure 3-26 - STM-1 electrical signal interface of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model
SRT 1F
3-28 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.2.7.2 STM-1 optical signal Interface

Figure 3-27 shows the STM-1 optical signal connection between SRT 1F
87
1+1 N.E. radio equipment and Optical Fiber Transmission equipment that
is done on the PCB of the OPT INTF (Optical signal Interface) unit.
Optical Fiber connector type are FC type and they are accessible from
front of the equipment rack.
To/from Optical Fiber Transmission Equipment
STM-1 STM-1
M M
S S Optical cable
T T T Connector
C
U U U
S
P W
V
OUT
IN
B O
S P
W T
To/from Unit
Front View of Side View of OPT INTF unit

OPT INTF unit
Figure 3-27 - STM-1 optical signal interface of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-29
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.4.2.8 Interconnection for Co-Channel operation
For co-channel operation, interconnection between MSTUs as shown in

Figure 3-28 is necessary for XPIC operation.
87
M M
S S
T T T
C
U U U
S ON ON
P W V OFF OFF
POWER POWER
ON/OFF ON/OFF
B O
S P
W T
TX F MON TX F MON
Figure 3-28 - MSTU Inter connection for SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model Co-channel operation
SRT 1F
3-30 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.4.2.9 Connectors and Connector Pin Assignment

This section provides information on the connector and pin assignments
for SRT 1F 1+1 N.E.
CN1 (EXT SX)
CN2 (T4 SX)
CN3 (T0 SX)
V (-48Vdc)
CN4 (HK)
CN5
(RAB &EOW)
CN6 (WS/UC)
CN7 (RUC)
Figure 3-29 - Connectors layout on the shelf of SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. model
Table 3.1 - Connectors on the shelf

CN Description Remarks Connector Type
No.
CN 1 EXT SX Synchronization signal (Square/HDB3) (1.0/2.3) coaxial
CN 2 T4 SX Synchronization signal (Square /HDB3) (1.0/2.3) coaxial
CN 3 T0SX Synchronization signal (Square /HDB3) (1.0/2.3) coaxial
CN 4 HK Housekeeping (DI/DO) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 5 RAB &EOW Rack Alarm BUS and EOW Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 6 WS/UC Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 7 RUC Radio User Channel Dsub 37 multi-pin
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-31
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Coaxial Connector assignment for External Clock
Table 3.2 - Coaxial Connectors for External Synchronization Signal

CN Description Remarks
No.
CN 1 EXT SX Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU, 2.048 MHz

square wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3.
CN 2 T4 SX Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU, 2.048 MHz
square wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3.
CN 3 T0 SX Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external equipment,
2.048 MHz square wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3.
SRT 1F
3-32 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Connector PIN assignment for Housekeeping port

Table 3.3 shows the Connector PIN assignment for HK.
87
Use Access Name Connector No. Type of Connector

HK CN4 Dsub 37
Table 3.3 - Connector PIN assignment for HK

PIN PIN
1 FG Frame Ground 20 DI-4 Housekeeping IN-4
2 DI-1 Housekeeping IN-1 21 DI-6 Housekeeping IN-6
4 DI-5 Housekeeping IN-5 23 LSO1-N OPT ALS status out (N)
5 DI-7 Housekeeping IN-7 24 LSO1-C OPT ALS status out (C)
6 AGC MON AGC monitor (W1) 25 LINE1ALM-N OPT LINE ALM (N)
7 AGC SG Signal Ground for Monitor 26 LINE1ALM-C OPT LINE ALM out (C)
8 SD AGC SD AGC monitor (W1) 27 HK-Common HK Common Ground
9 SDA SG Signal Ground for Monitor 28 DO-1N Housekeeping OUT-1N
10 HK-Common HK Common Ground 29 DO-2N Housekeeping OUT-2N
11 DO-1C Housekeeping OUT-1C 30 DO-3N Housekeeping OUT-3N
12 DO-2C Housekeeping OUT-2C 31 DO-4N Housekeeping OUT-4N
13 DO-3C Housekeeping OUT-3C 32 LSO2-N OPT OCC ALS status out (N)
14 DO-4C Housekeeping OUT-4C 33 LSO2-C OPT OCC ALS status out (C)
15 OPT1-ALM-N OPT CARD FAIL out (N) 34 LINE2ALM-N OPT OCC LINE ALM out (N)
16 OPT1-ALM-C OPT CARD FAIL out(C) 35 LINE2ALM-C OPT OCC LINE ALM out (C)
OPT OCC CARD FAIL out
17 OPT2-ALM-N
(N) 36 NC
OPT OCC CARD FAIL out
18 OPT2-ALM-C
(C) 37 NC
19 DI-2 Housekeeping IN-2
1 20
(Front view of the connector)
19 37
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-33
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Connector PIN assignment for RAB and EOW
Table 3.4 shows the Connector PIN assignment for Rack Alarm Bus and
87
EOW.

RAB & EOW CN5 Dsub 37
Table 3.4 - Connector PIN assignment for RAB and EOW

PIN PIN
1 FG Frame Ground 20 FG Frame Ground
2 AUD CR Audible Critical alarm 21 E1-OUT T (OUT) 4W Send E1ch Tip
3 VIS CR Visible Critical alarm 22 E1-IN T(IN) 4W Rec E1ch Tip
4 AUD MJ Audible Major alarm 23 CALL1-C Calling E1 common
5 VIS MJ Visible Major alarm 24 SG Signal Ground
6 AUD MN Audible Minor alarm 25 CALL2-C Calling E2 common
7 VIS MN Visible Minor alarm 26 E2-OUT T (OUT) 4W Send E2ch Tip
8 COMMON 27 E2 IN T (IN) 4W Rec E2ch Tip
9 AUD WR Audible Warning 28 E1-OUT R(OUT) 4W Send E1ch Ring
10 VIS WR Visible Warning 29 E1-IN R(IN) 4W Rec E1ch Ring
11 RAB-MNT Maintenance 30 CALL1-N Calling E1-N-line
12 NE ALM-C NE alarm (C) 31 SG Signal Ground
13 NE ALM-N NE alarm (N) 32 CALL2-N Calling E2-N-line
14 ACO IN Alarm Cut Off IN 33 E2-OUT R(OUT) 4W Send E2ch Ring
15 *ACO IN ACO Ground line 34 E2 IN R(IN) 4W Rec E2ch Ring
16 NC 35 NC
17 NC 36 NC
18 NC 37 NC
19 NC
1 20
19 37
SRT 1F
3-34 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC

Table 3.5 shows the Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC.
87

WS/UC CN6 Dsub 37
Table 3.5 - Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC

PIN PIN
1 FG Frame Ground 20 SUC LTDP (O) UC LINE side TDATA (P)
2 WSS IN P ( I ) SOH WS IN (P) 21 SUC LTDN (O) UC LINE side TDATA (N)
3 WSS IN N ( I ) SOH WS IN (N) 22 SUC LTCP (O) UC LINE side TCLK (P)
4 WSS OUT P (O) SOH WS OUT (P) 23 SUC LTCN (O) UC LINE side TCLK (N)
5 WSS OUT N (O) SOH WS OUT (N) 24 SG Signal Ground
6 SG Signal Ground 25 SG Signal Ground
7 SG Signal Ground 26 SUC RRDP ( I ) UC RADIO side RDATA(P)
8 WSR IN P ( I ) RFCOH WS IN (P) 27 SUC RRDN ( I ) UC RADIO side RDATA(N)
9 WSR IN N ( I ) RFCOH WS IN (N) 28 SUC RRCP (O) UC RADIO side RCLK (P)
10 WSR OUT P (O) RFCOH WS OUT (P) 29 SUC RRCN (O) UC RADIO side RCLK (N)
11 WSR OUT N (O) RFCOH WS OUT (N) 30 SG Signal Ground
13 SG Signal Ground 32 SUC RTDP (O) UC RADIO side TDATA(P)
14 SUC LRDP ( I ) UC LINE side RDATA(P) 33 SUC RTDN (O) UC RADIO side TDATA(N)
15 SUC LRDN ( I ) UC LINE side RDATA(N) 34 SUC RTCP (O) UC RADIO side TCLK (P)
16 SUC LRCP (O) UC LINE side RCLK (P) 35 SUC RTCN (O) UC RADIO side TCLK (N)
17 SUC LRCN (O) UC LINE side RCLK (N) 36 SG Signal Ground
19 SG Signal Ground
1 20
19 37
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-35
3. INSTALLATION UMN
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. Connector PIN assignment Radio User Channel

Table 3.6 shows the Connector PIN assignment for RUC.
87

RUC CN7 Dsub 37
Table 3.6 - Connector PIN assignment for RUC

PIN PIN
1 FG Frame Ground 20 U2R DP ( I ) CH2 T DATA P (IN) 4WR
2 U1T DP (O) CH1 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS 21 U2R DN ( I ) CH2 T DATA N (IN) 4WR
3 U1T DN (O) CH1 T DATA N (OUT) 4WS 22 SG Signal Ground
4 SG Signal Ground 23 U2R CKP (O) CH2 R CLK P (OUT)
5 U1T CKP (O) CH1 T CLK P (OUT) 24 U2R CKN (O) CH2 R CLK N (OUT)
6 U1T CKN (O) CH1 T CLK N (OUT) 25 SG Signal Ground
7 SG Signal Ground 26 NC
8 U1R DP ( I ) CH1 R DATA P (IN) 4WR 27 NC
9 U1R DN ( I ) CH1 R DATA N (IN) 4WR 28 NC
11 U1R CKP (O) CH1 R CLK P (OUT) 30 NC
12 U1R CKN (O) CH1 R CLK N (OUT) 31 NC
14 U2T DP (O) CH2 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS 33 NC
15 U2T DN (O) CH2 T DATA N (OUT) 4WS 34 NC
17 U2T CKP (O) CH2 R CLK P (OUT) 36 NC
18 U2T CKN (O) CH2 T CLK N (OUT) 37 NC
19 SG Signal Ground
1 20
19 37
SRT 1F
3-36 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5 SRT 1F K-shelf Installation
3.5.1 K-shelf rack layout
Figure 3-30 shows overview of SRT 1F K-shelf radio equipment rack.

87
Figure 3-30 - K-shelf rack layout
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-37
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2 SRT 1F K-shelf equipment installation
3.5.2.1 Shelf layout

Figure 3-31 shows K-shelf configuration. MSTU units are slide into the
87
MSTU block via plug-in adapter and other units are plug-ined directly to
the shelf.
For MSTU, DC power supply and RF signals connection between unit
and shelf are plugged in via plug-in adapter. User interface signal
connection such as baseband signals, supervision and control signals
also plugged in via multi-pin connector mounted on the BWB of the SCSU
and UIA blocks.
Figure 3-31- K-shelf and MSTU Unit
SRT 1F
3-38 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.2 How to Install Shelves & Units
3.5.2.2.1 Mounting of Shelves

Shelves should be mounted on to the rack in order. Install K-shelf first,
then expansion K-shelf, if any.
Figure 3-32 - Mounting of shelves
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-39
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.2.2 Mounting of Slide In Units

Slide-in-units (SIU) are locked to the shelf by card puller with latching
lever and also protected not to remove fixing screws or metal plate for
strong vibration, especially earthquake.
To mount a SIU, lift latching lever first, then slide in the SIU firmly and
close latching levers confirming that levers are engaging with the shelf
securely.
To remove a SIU, lift latching levers and pull out the SIU.
MSTU is mounted to the K-shelf by means of MSTU adaptor as shown in
Figure 3-33. MSTU adaptor is fixed by screws to the K-shelf on MSTU
87
basis. MSTU has only one (1) latch at the bottom and two (2) mounting
screws at the top and bottom each.
Half-size SIU cards (BSW, OCC, HK, TCU, BSW INTF) have only one
latch at the bottom each, as shown in Figure 3-34. After mounting SIUs,
87
all SCSU cards are locked by pull-out protection metal plates, as shown
in Figure 3-35. SV and other full-size SIU cards have two latches at the
87
left and right each, s shown in Figure 3-34.

87
Figure 3-33 Installing MSTU
SRT 1F
3-40 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Half-size SIU
Full-size SIU
Figure 3-34 Half size and full size SIUs
Mis-removal protection metal plate should be

installed to the upper side of SCSU unit shelf
by two fixing bolts.
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU-Y
TCU-X
HK1
HK2
SCSU
Block
Figure 3-35 Mis-removal protection for slide-in units on SCSU section
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-41
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.2.3 General BRU Installation Information
WARNING
BRU installation for RF CH expansion must be

carried out by suitably qualified service personnel.
Special care must be taken for BRU installation
because of some traffic interruption
3.5.2.2.3.1 Necessary Tool for BRU Installation
Necessary tools for BRU installation are listed in Table 3.7.

87
Table 3.7 - Necessary Tools for BRU Installation
Item Tool Name Remarks
1 Screw Driver 300 mm length
2 Torque Wrench
SRT 1F
3-42 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.2.3.2 DUP/ADPT Installation

Duplexer/Adapter installation of U6G, 2+1 alternated operation using
CH1-CH3 and CH5-CH7 with SD is shown in Figure 3-36 as an example.
87
Transmit-Receive Duplexer (DUP) for

transmit and main receiver port to/from Adapter (ADPT) for space diversity (SD)
antenna system of H (V) polarization for reception port from antenna system of H (V)
future RF CH expansion. polarization for future RF CH expansion.
Semi-rigid cables to/from BRU block are Semi-rigid cable to BRU block is wired back
wired back side of K-shelf. side of K-shelf.
DUP/cables will be installed on site at the ADPT/cable will be installed on site at the
time of RF CH expansion. time of RF CH expansion.
Semi-rigid Cables
TAB0001-L448 TAB0001-L449
Semi-rigid Cable
TAB0001-L448
Metal Plate (Cover)

TA35002-3953
Shelf Front
Transmit-Receive Duplexer (DUP) for Adapter (ADPT) for Space diversity (SD)
transmit and receiver port to/from antenna reception port from antenna system of V (H)
system of V (H) polarization. polarization.
Semi-rigid cables to/from BRU block are Semi-rigid cable to BRU block is wired back
wired back side of K-shelf. side of K-shelf.
DUP/cables are installed at factory. ADPT/cable is installed at factory.
Figure 3-36 Top view of DUP/ADPT Installation
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-43
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Plug-in coaxial connectors of three (3) semi-rigid cables for TX, RX and SD RX sides
are fixed to the BRU block structure separately by two fixing bolts.
For the initial stage of U6G, 2+1 alternated operation, this plug-in connector fixing to
the BRU block structure are made at factory, however when the RF CH expansion of
more than 4+1 is planned in a future, the additional DUP/ADPT fixing will be made on
site at the time of RF CH expansion.
Plug-in coaxial connectors of

SD RX and RX sides
Plug-in coaxial connector

of TX side
Figure 3-37 Front view of DUP/ADPT Installation
SRT 1F
3-44 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
There are no DUP/ADPT on the top of Semi-rigid Cable

the expansion K-shelf
(TAB0001-L447)
Semi-rigid Cable
(TAB0001-L448)
Filter trays for TX/RX/SD RX

are plug-ined to the BRU
block connectors of K-shelf
independently by using slide
gauge and fixed by two (2)
fixing bolts.
Figure 3-38 Side View of DUP/ADPT Installation
RF CH branching filter assembly on

filter tray for TX/RX/SD RX is plug-
ined to the BRU block connectors of
K-shelf by using slide gauge
independently and fixed by two (2)
fixing bolts.
On filter tray, maximum two RF filter
modules are mounted.
(Two (2) CH filters per module and
two (2) filter modules per tray).
WARNING
Filter tray fixing to the BRU block
structure for K-shelf shall be made
mandatorily with TX, RX and SD RX
trays from bottom up.
structure for expansion K-shelf shall
be made mandatorily with SD RX, RX
and TX trays from bottom up.
Figure 3-39 Plug-in filter tray mounting into the BRU Block Structure
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-45
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.2.3.3 FIL TRAY Installation

RF CH filter module installation on filter tray for U6G, 2+1 alternated
operation using CH1-CH3 and CH5-CH7 with SD is shown in Figure 3-40 87
as an example.
RF plug-in coaxial connector for the Fixing bolt to the BRU block structure
BRU block structure to DUP
Semi-rigid cable
Semi-rigid cable
RF dummy load
Label (TX)
Drawing No.
Fixing bolt for RF

CH filter module
on filter tray
Equivalent BRU circuit of loss equalized TX BPF
Figure 3-40 Filter Tray Installation of TX CH Filter
SRT 1F
3-46 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Fixing bolt to the BRU block structure RF plug-in coaxial connector for the
BRU block structure from DUP
Semi-rigid cable
Semi-rigid cable
Dummy load Label (RX)
Drawing No.
Fixing bolt for RF

CH filter module
on filter tray
Equivalent BRU circuit of loss equalized RX BPF
Figure 3-41 Filter Tray Installation of RX CH Filter
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-47
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Fixing bolt to the BRU block structure RF plug-in coaxial connector for the
BRU block structure from ADPT
Semi-rigid cable
Semi-rigid cable
Dummy load
Label (RX)
Drawing No.
Fixing bolt for RF

CH filter module
on filter tray
Equivalent BRU circuit of loss equalized SD RX BPF
Figure 3-42 Filter Tray Installation of SD RX CH Filter
SRT 1F
3-48 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.2.3.4 Semi-flexible Cable Connection between MSTU and BRU

RF coaxial cable connection between MSTU and BRU for K-shelf are
made by semi-flexible coaxial cable shown in Figure 3-43. 87
K-shelf FIL CN No.

REF FIL No.
BRU BEF BLOCK
F13 25 26 F15 29 30 BEF for

F14 27 28 F16 31 32 innermost CH
FIL CN No.
RF FIL No.
BRU BPF BLOCK
17 F9 18 19 F10 20 21 F11 22 23 F12 24 SDRX
9 F5 10 11 F6 12 13 F7 14 15 F8 16 RX
1 F1 2 3 F2 4 5 F3 6 7 F4 8 TX
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD
ADPT CN No.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
MSTU ADPT No.
SCSU BLOCK
(1) Connections to/from MSTU are carried out by coaxial connectors on top of
MSTU adapter (TX, RX and SD).
(2) Detailed semi-flexible cable connection between BRU connector and MSTU
are shown in Figure 3-45.
(3) Abbreviation: CD: Cable number, CN: Connector Number
(4) BEFs are mounted only when innermost RF CH pair is allocated.
(for example, in case of U6 GHz band, CH8-CH1 is innermost CH pair)
Figure 3-43 Coaxial Connector Arrangement between MSTU and BRU (K-shelf)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-49
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Expansion K-shelf FIL CN No.

REF FIL No.
BRU BEF BLOCK
F13 25 26 F15 29 30 BEF for

F14 27 28 F16 31 32 innermost CH
FIL CN No.
RF FIL No.
BRU BPF BLOCK
17 F9 18 19 F10 20 21 F11 22 23 F12 24 TX
9 F5 10 11 F6 12 13 F7 14 15 F8 16 RX
1 F1 2 3 F2 4 5 F3 6 7 F4 8
SDRX
1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD TX RX SD
ADPT CN No.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
MSTU ADPT No.
SCSU BLOCK
(5) Connections to/from MSTU are carried out by coaxial connectors on top of
MSTU adapter (TX, RX and SD).
(6) Detailed semi-flexible cable connection between BRU connector and MSTU
are shown in Figure 3-45.
(7) Abbreviation: CD: Cable number, CN: Connector Number
(8) BEFs are mounted only when innermost RF CH pair is allocated.
(for example, in case of U6 GHz band, CH8-CH1 is innermost CH pair).
WARNING
Please note that location of TX, RX and SD RX filter tray is different in K-

shelf and expansion K-shelf, that is, TX/RX/SD RX for K-shelf and SD
RX/RX/TX for expansion K-shelf from the bottom up.
Figure 3-44 Coaxial Connector Arrangement between MSTU and BRU (Expansion K-shelf)
SRT 1F
3-50 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Cable Connection Between FIL CN and MSTU ADPT CN

(U6G, TX-CH=CH1-3, CH5-7, CH2-4 and CH6-8 with SD)
FIL Cord No Q'ty MSTU ADPT
CN No or DL ADPT No. CN No.
1 CD1 1 (1) CN1
2 CD2 1 (2) CN1
3 CD3 1 (3) CN1
4 CD4 1 (4) CN1
TX
5 CD5 1 (5) CN1
6 CD6 1 (6) CN1
7 CD7 1 (7) CN1
8 CD8 0 (8) CN1
9 CD9 0 (1) CN2
10 CD10 1 (2) CN2
11 CD11 1 (3) CN2
12 CD12 1 (4) CN2
13 CD13 1 (5) CN2 RX
14 CD14 1 (6) CN2
15 CD15 1 (7) CN2
16 CD16 1 (8) CN2
17 CD17 0 (1) CN3
18 CD18 1 (2) CN3
19 CD19 1 (3) CN3
20 CD20 1 (4) CN3 SD RX
21 CD21 1 (5) CN3
22 CD22 1 (6) CN3
23 CD23 1 (7) CN3
24 CD24 1 (8) CN3
Cable Connection between BEF and FIL

(U6G, TX-CH=CH1-3, CH5-7, CH2-4 and CH6-8 with SD)
BEF Cord or Q'ty A B Note
CN No DL
25 CD25 1 FIL13-25 ADPT-(1)-3 BEF-RXSD
26 CD26 1 FIL13-26 FIL9-17 FIL-BEF
27 CD27 1 FIL14-27 ADPT-(1)-2 BEF-RX
28 CD28 1 FIL14-28 FIL5-9 FIL-BEF
29 CD29 1 FIL15-29 ADPT-(8)-1 TX-BEF
30 CD30
1 FIL15-30 FIL16-31 BEF-BEF
31 CD31
32 CD32 1 FIL16-32 FIL4-8 BEF-FIL
Figure 3-45 Typical Cable Connection between MSTU ADPT and BRU Block (As an example
of U6G, 7+1 Alternated Operation, K-shelf)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-51
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.2.4 BRU Expansion Component and Expansion Type

RF branching network installation for future RF CH expansion will be
made on site after purchasing necessary BRU expansion kit.
Table 3.8 - BRU Expansion Component and Expansion Type
D U P /A D P T K it B R U Filter K it Traffic
Expansion Type
DUP ADPT Cables FIL FIL TRAY Cables Interruption
<N+1 Single pol.>
1+0 to 1+1 - - - - - 1set A No
1+1 to 2+1 - - - 2 or 3 - 1set B Yes-1
2+1 to 3+1 - - - - - 1set A No
3+1 to 4+1 - - - 2 or 3 2 or 3 1set C Yes-1
4+1 to 5+1 - - - - - 1set A No
5+1 to 6+1 - - - 2 or 3 - 1set B Yes-1
6+1 to 7+1 - - - - - 1set A No
<N+1 doble pol.>

1+0 to 1+1 - - - - - 1set A No
1+1 to 2+1 - - - 2 or 3 - 1set B Yes-1
2+1 to 3+1 - - - - - 1set A No
3+1 to 4+1 1 1 or 0 1set 2 or 3 2 or 3 1set D No
4+1 to 5+1 - - - - - 1set A No
5+1 to 6+1 - - - 2 or 3 - 1set B Yes-1
6+1 to 7+1 - - - - - 1set A No
<2x(N+1)>
2x(1+0) to 2x(1+1) - - - - - 2sets A No
2x(1+1) to 2x(2+1) - - - 4 or 6 - 2sets B Yes-1
2x(2+1) to 2x(3+1) - - - - - 2sets A No
2x(3+1) to 2x(4+1) - - - - - - E Yes-2
2x(4+1) to 2x(5+1) - - - - - 2sets A No
2x(5+1) to 2x(6+1) - - - 4 or 6 - 2sets B Yes-1
2x(6+1) to 2x(7+1) - - - - - 2sets A No
<Upgrade of SD>
w/o SD to w/t SD - 1 1set n 1 or 2 n-set F No
<Addition of BEF> - - - max. 3 - 1-set G Yes-3
Note: Traffic interruption time apportionment is as follows:

Yes-1: Cable connection removal on BRU + Removal of filter tray +
Expansion filter module mounting on filter tray + Plug-in of filter tray +
Cable connection on BRU
Yes-2: Cable connection removal on BRU + Plug-in of filter tray +
Cable wiring change of initial BRU + Inter-shelf cable connection
Yes-3: Cable removal/connection on BRU + Cable connection with BEF
SRT 1F
3-52 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.2.5 RF CH Expansion Procedure (Type-A)

In this case the RF CH filter is already present inside the branching.
All you have to do is:
(1) Removal of dummy load of the CH filter.
(2) Semi-flexible coaxial cable connection between BRU and MSTU
adaptor. In this case no removal/plug-in on filter trays are needed.
Same approach applis to TX, RX and SD RX sections.
Semi-rigid cable
Semi-rigid cable
Dummy load
Label (TX)
Drawing No.
(1) Remove the dummy load from TX CH filter

(2) Connects between TX CH filter input connector
and TX connector on top of expanding MSTU
adapter by semi-flexible cable.
(3) Same manner for RX and SD RX CH filters.
Figure 3-46 One RF filter expansion without addition of filter (U6G, 2+1 to 3+1 TX CH
expansion as an example)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-53
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.2.6 RF CH Expansion Procedure (Type-B)

In this case all you have to do is:
(1) Disconnect all semi-flexible cable connectors on BRU.
(2) Remove all filter trays (TX, RX and SD RX).
(3) Mount RF CH filter on filter tray with new coaxial cables.
(4) Plug-in filter tray to the BRU block.
(5) Cable connection on BRU.
3.5.2.2.6.1 Removal/Plug-in of Filter Tray

After disconnection of all semi-flexible cables on BRU, all filter trays of
TX/RX/SD RX are removed. After completion of RF CH filter expansion
on filter tray, filter trays are plug-ined to the BRU block. After plug-in and
fixing by bolts, all semi-flexible cable connections on BRU will be carried
out.
RF CH filter assembly (BRU AS) on filter

tray for TX/RX/SD RX is removed from
the BRU block connectors of K-shelf
independently by two fixing bolts.
After completion of RF CH expansion on
filter tray, filter trays are plug-ined to the
BRU block by using sliding gauge.
All cable connection on BRU are made
tightly.
WARNING

structure for expansion K-shelf shall be
made mandatorily with SD RX, RX and
TX trays from bottom up.
Figure 3-47 Removal/Plug-in of Filter Tray
SRT 1F
3-54 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.2.6.2 RF CH Filter Installation with Cables on FIL TRAY

(1) Remove the dummy load (or coaxial cable) on filter tray.
(2) Connect the two RF CH filters with new coaxial cable.
(3) Connect dummy load (or coaxial cable) to the new filter module.
(4) Fix the RF CH filter module on filter tray by two fixing bolts.
(1) Remove dummy load

from CIR connector of
existing filter module
(2) Connect the two filter

modules by new coaxial
cable.
(3) Connect dummy load to

the CIR output of new
RF CH module.
(4) Fix the new RF CH filter

module by two fixing
bolts.
Figure 3-48 One Example of RF CH Expansion of TX CH Filter
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-55
3. INSTALLATION UMN
(1) Remove the coaxial

cable with plug-in connector
(2) Connect the two RF CH

filter modules by new
coaxial cable.
(3) Connect the new filter

module with filter tray input
by coaxial cable with plug-
in connector.
(4) Fix the new RF CH filter

module by two fixing bolts.
Figure 3-49 One Example of RF CH Expansion of RX/SD RX Filter
SRT 1F
3-56 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.2.7 RF CH Expansion Procedure (Type-C)

This procedure is only for N+1 single-pol operation.
All you have to do for TX section, after mounting the new TX filter on the
new filter tray, is:
(1) Removal of existing TX filter tray.
(2) Removal of dummy load from CIR.
(3) Connection of the two filter trays by joint metal plate.
(4) Cable connection between existing and new filter module CIR.
(5) Plug-in to the BRU block and fixing.
(1) Removal of existing TX filter tray

(2) Removal of dummy load from CIR
(4) Coaxial cable connection between

circulators (CIR)
(5) Jointed two filter trays are plug-ined
to the BRU block structure and fixed
(3) Connection of the two filter New TX filter module already

trays by joint metal plate mounted on new filter tray
Figure 3-50 RF CH Expansion of TX Filter from 3+1 to 4+1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-57
3. INSTALLATION UMN
All you have to do for RX and RX SD sections, after mouting the new RX /
RX SD filter on the new RX / SD RX filter tray, is:
(1) Removal of existing RX / SD RX filter tray.
(2) Removal of coaxial cable with plug-in connector.
(3) Connection of the two filter trays by joint metal plate.
(4) Cable connection between existing and new filter module CIR.
(5) Connection between CIR port and existing tray input port.
(6) Plug-in to the BRU block and fixing.
(1) Removal of existing RX / SD RX

filter tray
(2) Removal of cable connection
between filter tray input and CIR of
the existing filter module
(4) Coaxial cable connection between

circulators (CIR)
(5) Cable connection between CIR of new
filter module and existing filter tray
input
(6) Jointed two filter trays are plug-ined to
the BRU block structure and fixed
(3) Connection of the two filter New RX / SD RX filter module

trays by joint metal plate already mounted on new filter tray
Figure 3-51 RF CH Expansion of RX and SD RX Filter from 3+1 to 4+1
SRT 1F
3-58 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.2.8 RF CH Expansion Procedure (Type-D)

This procedure is only for N+1 double-pol operation.
(1) Addition of DUP/ADPT and connection to/from BRU block.
(2) Mount the RF CH filter module on the filter tray.
(3) Plug-in filter tray to the BRU block.
(4) Connect all of semi-flexible cables between BRU and MSTU.
3.5.2.2.8.1 Installation of DUP and ADPT

Installation of transmit-receive duplexer (DUP) and adapter (ADPT) for
SD reception input port are made at the top of the K-shelf as shown in
Figure 3-52.
87
Transmit-Receive Duplexer (DUP) for

transmit and receiver port to/from
antenna system of H (V) polarization.
Semi-rigid cables to/from BRU block are
wired back side of K-shelf.
DUP/cables are installed after removal of
DUP cover.
Adapter (ADPT) for Space diversity (SD)

reception port from antenna system of H
(V) polarization.
Semi-rigid cable to BRU block is wired
back side of K-shelf.
ADPT/cable is installed after removal of
ADPT cover.
Figure 3-52 Location of DUP and ADPT
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-59
3. INSTALLATION UMN
(1) Cables are wired back side

of BRU block structure.
(2) Maximu of three (3) coaxial
cables with plug-in
connector are fixed on the
BRU block structure
independently.
Figure 3-53 Cable Wiring to/from BRU Block
RX SD RX
connector connector
TX
connector
DUP/ADPT/Cable Installation Procedure

(1) DUP/ADPT installation after removal of cover
(2) Cable installation between DUP and BRU block structure (TX and RX), and
ADPT and BRU block structure (SD RX).
(3) Connection of DUP and two coaxial cables and ADPT and one coaxial cable.
Figure 3-54 Plug-in Connector Location on BRU block structure
SRT 1F
3-60 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.2.8.2 RF Filter Module Installation on Filter Tray

Installation of new RF filter module on filter tray is shown in Figure 3-55.
87
(3) Plug-in connector of coaxial cable is fixed

to the filter tray.
(4) Connect coaxial cable connector with the
CIR of new filter module.
Mounting guide
(5) Fix the new filter module tightly by two

(1) New filter module is put on the filter tray
fixing bolts after completion of cable
by using mounting guide
connection.
(2) Fix new filter module loosely by two fixing
bolts.
Figure 3-55 RF Filter Module Installation on Filter Tray (TX side)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-61
3. INSTALLATION UMN

to the filter tray.
(1) New filter module is put on the filter tray (5) Fix the new filter module tightly by
by using mounting guide two fixing bolts.
(2) Mount new filter module loosely by two
fixing bolts.
Figure 3-56 RF Filter Module Installation on Filter Tray (RX / SD RX side)
SRT 1F
3-62 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.2.8.3 Filter Tray Installation to the BRU Block

Installtion of new filter tray (TX/RX/SD RX) to the BRU block is shown in
Figure 3-57.
87
RF filter module and cables are

assembled on filter tray for TX/RX/SD
RX independently.
After completion of RF CH filter
assembly, filter trays are plug-ined to
the BRU block structures separately
by using sliding gauge.
WARNING
structure for expansion K-shelf shall
be made mandatorily with SD RX, RX
and TX trays from bottom up.
After completion of filter tray plug-in to the BRU block, connection between BRU filter connectors and
MSTU adapter connectors are made by semi-flexible coaxial cables.
Figure 3-57 Filter Tray Installation into the BRU Block
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-63
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.2.9 8.7 RF CH Expansion Procedure (Type-E)

This procedure is only for RF CH expansion from 2x(3+1) to 2x(4+1), that
is, addition of expansion K-shelf to the initial 2x(3+1) K-shelf.
In this case all you have to do is as follows:
(1) Disconnection of all semi-flexible cables on BRU of initial K-shelf.
(2) Removal of all filter trays and wiring change of initial BRU.
(3) Plug-in all trays and connect all semi-flexible cabel on initial BRU.
(4) Connection between initial K-shelf and expansion K-shelf by coax
cables.
3.5.2.2.9.1 Cable Wiring Change on TX Filter Tray of Initial K-shelf

After removal of TX filter trays of both V- and H-polarization system, BRU
wiring change will be carried out as shown in Figure 3-58.
87
V (H)-polarized system H (V)-polarized system
(1) Remove two (2) dummy loads
(2) Fix two (2) metal fitting plates after removal of knobs.
(3) Connect two (2) coaxial cables with plug-in connector.
TX : TX output signal input from TX of expansion BRU
Figure 3-58 Cable Wiring Change on TX Filter Tray of Initial K-shelf
SRT 1F
3-64 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.2.9.2 Cable Wiring Change on RX Filter Tray of Initial K-shelf

After removal of RX filter trays of both V- and H-polarization system, BRU
wiring change will be carried out as shown in Figure 3-59.
87
(1) Remove two (2) cables with plug-in
(2) Fix two (2) metal fitting plates after removal of knobs
(3) Connect two (2) cables with plug-in connector one end
(4) Connect two (2) cables with plug-in connector both ends
RX1: RX signal output from DUP to RX1 port of expansion BRU

RX2: RX signal input from RX2 port of expansion BRU
Figure 3-59 Cable Wiring Change on RX Filter Tray of Initial K-shelf
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-65
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.2.9.3 Cable Wiring Change on SD RX Filter Tray of Initial K-shelf

After removal of SD RX filter trays of both V- and H-polarization system,
BRU wiring change will be carried out as shown in Figure 3-60.
87
(1) Remove two (2) cables with plug-in
(2) Fix two (2) metal fitting plates after removal of knobs.
(3) Connect two (2) cables with plug-in connector one end
(4) Connect two (2) cables with plug-in connector both ends
SD1: SDRX signal output form ADPT to SD1 port of expansion

BRU
SD2: SDRX signal input from SD2 port of expansion BRU
Figure 3-60 Cable Wiring Change on SDRX Filter Tray of Initial K-shelf
SRT 1F
3-66 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.2.9.4 Semi-Rigid Cable Connection Between Initial and Expansion K-

shelves
After completion of BRU wiring change of initial K-shelf, coaxial cable
connection between initial and expansion K-shelves are made both V-
polarization and H-polarization as shown in Figure 3-61. And also 8
schematic block diagram of RF branching network of TX/RX/SDRX are

shown.
TX OUT SD RX in
DUP ADP DUP ADP
BPF BPF BPF BPF SD AD

DP
BPF BPF BPF BPF RX
BPF BPF BPF BPF TX
CIR CIR
CIR CIR
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
P M1 M2 M3
P M1 M2 M3
MSTU(PRT, V-pol)
MSTU(PRT, H-pol)
Initial K-shelf
MSTU(M1, H-pol)
MSTU(M2, H-pol)
MSTU(M3, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, V-pol)
MSTU(M2, V-pol)
MSTU(M3, V-pol)
Initial K-shelf
CIR CIR
CIR CIR
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
M4 M5 M6 M7
M4 M5 M6 M7
Expansion K-shelf
Expansion K-shelf
BSW INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
SW(M1)
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
RX IN
DP
SV
CIR CIR Five (5) semi-rigid

NFB
coaxial cables are
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
connected both sides

between initial K-
Connectors TERM
P M1 M2 M3 shelf and expansion
Initial K-shelf K-shelf for V- and H-
polarization BRU
CIR CIR
Expansion K-shelf
BPF
BPF
BPF
BPF
M4 M5 M6 M7
Connectors TERM
Expansion K-shelf
Figure 3-61 Cable Connection Between Initial and Expansion K-shelves
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-67
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.2.9.5 Detailed Cable Connection between Initial and Expansion K-shelves

Detailed semi-rigid cable connection between initial K-shelf and
expansion K-shelf are made both V-polarization and H-polarization as
shown in Figure 3-62.
8
Initial Shelf (Left Side) Initial Shelf (Right Side)
SD2 SD2
SD1 SD1
RX2 RX2
RX1 RX1
TX TX
Expansion Shelf (Left Side) Expansion Shelf (Right Side)
TX TX
RX2 RX2
RX1 RX1
SD2 SD2
SD1 SD1
Inter-shelf cables are connected

Inter-shelf cables are tied to the
between initial K-shelf and
metal holding plate after
expansion K-shelf along with shelf
completion of connection to the
side of TX-TX, RX1-RX1, RX2-RX2,
BRU
SD1-SD1 and SD2-SD2.
(1) Maximum five (5) inter-shelf cable connections are needed for TX, RX
and SDRX.
(2) One cable for TX, two (2) cables for RX and SD RX per polarization.
(3) Inter-shelf cable connection is carried out to BRU through above holes
of shelves.
(4) After completion of connection, cables are tied to the metal holding
plates.
Figure 3-62 Detailed Semi-Rigid Cable Connection between Initial and Expansion K-shelves
SRT 1F
3-68 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Initial K-shelf for 2x(3+1)
Fitting metal plate for inter-shelf coax cables
Expansion K-shelf for 2x(4+0)
Fitting metal plate for inter-shelf coax cables

Metal holding plate
Figure 3-63 Typical Cable Connection Between Initial and Expansion K-shelves (Without
SD reception as an example)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-69
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.2.10 SD Upgrade Procedure (Type-F)

This procedure is only for upgrade installation from without SD to with SD.
(1) Addition of ADPT and cable connection to BRU block structure.
(2) Assemble the RF CH filter module and cable on the filter tray.
(3) Plug-in filter tray to the BRU block structure and fix.
(4) Connect semi-flexible cables between BRU and MSTU for SD.
3.5.2.2.10.1 Installation of ADPT

Installation of adapter (ADPT) for SD reception input port is made at the
top of the K-shelf as shown in Figure 3-64.
8
Adapter (ADPT) for Space diversity

(SD) reception port from antenna
system of V (H) - polarization.
back side of the K-shelf.
ADPT/cable is installed after removal
of ADPT cover.
Adapter (ADPT) for Space diversity

(SD) reception port from antenna
system of H (V) - polarization.
back side of the K-shelf.
ADPT/cable is installed after removal
of ADPT cover.
Figure 3-64 Location of ADPT
SRT 1F
3-70 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Cables are wired back side

of BRU block.
One coaxial cable with
plug-in connector is fixed
on the BRU block structure
for SD RX
Figure 3-65 Cable Wiring to BRU Block
SD (H(V))
SD (V(H)) connector
connector
ADPT/Cable Installation Procedure

(1) ADPT installation after removal of cover
(2) Plug-in cable connection installation to the BRU block structure (SD position).
(3) Cable connection to the ADPT
Figure 3-66 Plug-in Connector Location on BRU Block structure
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-71
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.2.10.2 RF Filter Module Installation on FIL TRAY

Installation of new RF filter module on filter tray is shown in Figure 3-67.
8

to the filter tray.
(1) New filter module is put on the filter tray (5) Fix the new filter module tightly by two
by using mounting guide fixing bolts.
(2) Mount new filter module loosely by two
fixing bolts.
Figure 3-67 RF Filter Module Installation on Filter Tray (SD RX) (As an example of 1+1 SD
RX expansion)
SRT 1F
3-72 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.2.10.3 FIL TRAY Installation to the BRU Block

Installation of new filter tray (SD RX) to the BRU block is shown in Figure 8
3-68.
RF filter module and cables are

assembled on SD RX filter tray.
After completion of RF CH filter
assembly, filter tray is plug-ined to
the BRU block structures by using
sliding gauge.
WARNING
mandatorily with TX, RX and SD
RX trays from bottom up.
structure for expansion K-shelf
shall be made mandatorily with SD
RX, RX and TX trays from bottom
up.
After completion of filter tray plug-in to the BRU block, connection between BRU filter connector and
MSTU adapter SD connector is made by semi-flexible coaxial cables.
Figure 3-68 Filter Tray Installation to the BRU Block Structure
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-73
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.2.11 BEF Installation Procedure (Type-G)

This procedure is for BEF installation when innermost RF channel is
allocated in a future expansion. In this case all you have to do is:
(1) Fixing BEFs to the BRU block of K-shelf.
(2) Remove semi-rigid cables between MSTU adaptor and BRU filter of
already installed innermost RF channel for TX, RX and SDRX.
(3) Plug-in newly installing MSTU of innermost RF channel.
(4) Connect cables between MSTU adaptor and BRU, and BEF for
innermost RF channel both existing and newly installing channels.
3.5.2.2.11.1 TX Side BEF

TX side BEF is composed of two (2) BEFs tuned to FRi, coaxial cable
between BEFs, fixing metal plate to the K-shelf and semi-rigid cables.
Metal fixing plate to K-shelf Connection cable 2 BEFs tuned to FRi
Figure 3-69 Typical L6 GHz band TX side BEF as an example
3.5.2.2.11.2 RX/SDRX Side BEF

RX/SDRX side BEF is composed of two (2) BEFs tuned to FTi for RX and
SDRX side each, fixing metal plate to the K- shelf and semi-rigid cables.
Metal fixing plate to K-shelf 2 BEFs tuned to FTi
Figure 3-70 Typical L6 GHz band RX/SDRX side BEF as an example
SRT 1F
3-74 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.2.11.3 BEF Installation Procedure to the K-shelf

BEF installation procedure is as follows:
(1) Fix TX side BEF and RX/SDRX side BEF to the K-shelf BRU block by
fixing bolts.
(2) Disconnect cables between BRU filter and MSTU adaptor for
innermost RF channels.
(3) Connect cables between MSTU adaptor TX and TX side BEF input,
and between TX side BEF output and BRU filter input.
(4) Connect cables between MSTU adaptor RX and RX side BEF output,
and between RX side BEF input and BRU RX filter output.
(5) Connect cables between MSTU adaptor SD and SD side BEF output,
and between SD side BEF input and BRU SD filter output.
BEF filter fixing by two fixing bolts
Cable connections to/from TX/RX/SDRX
Figure 3-71 Typical L6 GHz band RX/SDRX side BEF as an example
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-75
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.3 Shelf Connections

This section provides information on the inter shelf connections and user
interface connections between SRT 1F K-shelf radio equipment and
external equipment.
Warning Messages
The following safety precautions must be observed when installing or
maintaining the waveguide. These precautions ensure the safety of all
personnel and the protection of equipment.
Figure 3-72 shows the warning labels that are attached to all emitting and
8
receiving units:
Figure 3-72 - Warning Labels
SRT 1F
3-76 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.3.1 Waveguide Connection

Figure 3-73 shows the location of antenna port of SRT 1F K-shelf radio
8
equipment.
V(H)
MAIN SD
N+1, Single-feed Operation
V(H) H(V)
MAIN SD MAIN SD
N+1, Dual-feed Operation
V(H) H(V)
MAIN SD MAIN SD
2x(N+1), Co-Channel Operation
Figure 3-73 - Antenna port location on top of K-shelf
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-77
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Waveguide Flange
Top of Rack
Top of
Waveguide
Figure 3-74 - Antenna port location on top of SRT1F K-shelf
SRT 1F
3-78 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Waveguide connection is generally done by means of flexible and

twistable waveguide. Figure 3-75 shows the waveguide connections to
8
the equipment antenna port in the particular case of use of connection by

means of feeder.
WAVEGUIDE CONNECTOR
WAVEGUIDE
FLEXIBLE SECTION
GAS BARRIER
TWIST
Figure 3-75 - An example of Feeder Connection for Alternated Operation
Tools Required
Standard hand tools
Step ladder for connecting wave guide
Ratchet type set of socket wrenches
Waveguide Allen keys
Torque wrench for waveguide Allen keys
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-79
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Preparation
Do not connect feeder to the equipment until all the twists in the feeder
have been corrected. See Figure 3-76.
8
A person experienced in waveguide connections should carry out the

installation of the feeder to the equipment.
Refer to the wave guide installation manual.
Figure 3-76 - Twisting Wave guides
Precautions
When the wave guides are connected to the radio equipment, pay
attention not to apply a forced twisting torque to the radio equipment side.
Refer to the wave guide installation manual.
3.5.2.3.2 Connection of Primary DC Power Lead

This section provides the procedure for installing DC power and ground
cables in the equipment shelf and it shows the office power input terminal
identification.
As shown in Figure 3-77, DC power from primary power system is
8
connected with DC power supply terminal on user interface area (UIA)

block of K-shelf directly.
Dual-feed DC power supply system (system-X and system-Y redundancy)
is available.
Tools Required
Standard hand tools
DMM (Digital Multi-Meter)
SRT 1F
3-80 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
-48V DC Power for UIA block

from Office Power Supply
W/C W/C W-C W/C DUP

BPF BPF BPF BPF RX
BPF BPF BPF BPF TX
MSTU(PRT, V-pol)
MSTU(PRT, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, H-pol)
MSTU(M2, H-pol)
MSTU(M3, H-pol)
MSTU
MSTU(M1, V-pol)
MSTU(M2, V-pol)
MSTU(M3, V-pol)
BSW INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
SCSU
SV
NFB
UIA Connectors TERM

Dual-feed available
both system-X and
system-Y
Expansion K-Shelf
Dual-feed available
UIA Connectors TERM both system-X and
system-Y
Figure 3-77 - DC power connection for K-shelf by crimp terminal
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-81
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Procedure
Prepare power lead and crimping terminal as specified on the local plan.
Main DC power distribution board side:
Removing of cable sheath (see Figure 3-78 for details)
8
Crimp terminal by using die.

K-shelf equipment side:
Removing of cable sheath (see Figure 3-78 for details)
8
Crimp terminal by using die.
Figure 3-78 shows the cable sheath and terminal connection.

8
Figure 3-78 - Cable Sheath
1. Disconnect office power and use a voltmeter to ensure that the supply
rail is at zero volts (with reference to the earth ground).
2. Connect the red (0 V) lead to the 0V terminal.
3. Connect the blue (-48 V) lead to the -48V terminal.
4. Reconnect office power.
SRT 1F
3-82 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.3.2.1 Suitable Lead Terminal Treatment

The crimping method (Solderless) shall be applied to the power wiring
connecting terminal and to the indoor connection branching only.
Annealed copper only is used for this method.
Crimping Method
1. Choose the die fit for the cross-section area of the terminal to use.
2. Insert the terminal into the die section of the instrument and press the
terminal till it does not slip off. Then set the soldering portion of the
terminal body opposite to the male die while inserting the terminal
body to the centre of the die. Take care not to deform the terminal
when compressing it.
3. Start crimping the terminal after having ascertained that vary the
relative position of terminal and die
4. Insulating treatment at the compressed portion. This treatment shall
be performed as follows:
More than 1 mm in width on the insulated sheath will be sealed. Wind
PVC tape with a half tape width pitch as required.
Figure 3-79 shows the method for crimping the terminal and the cable
8
conductor.
Figure 3-79 - Method of Crimping
Precautions
1. This equipment has the ESD (Electrostatic Discharge) Frame Ground
(FG) terminal. Therefore, if your station has an ESD Ground terminal,
connect to them. If difficult, connect to the FG of each equipment to
keep the same voltage level as FG.
2. While connecting the power lead, do not drop in any cable sheath or
cable fragments. It may cause short circuits or faulty units.
3. Ensure the cable is connected before turning on the main breaker.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-83
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.3.3 Frame Grounding for SRT 1F K-shelf

Figure 3-80 shows the shelf Ground connection of the SRT 1F K-shelf
8
radio equipment.
The Frame Ground of the each K-shelf should be connected to the station
ground bus at the top of the shelf.
If SRT 1F K-shelf is supplied with ETSI standard rack, the Frame Ground
should be connected to the station ground bus at the top of the equipment
rack.
Frame Ground Connection

W/C W/C W/C W/C DUP

BPF BPF BPF BPF RX
BPF BPF BPF BPF TX
MSTU(PRT, V-pol)
MSTU(PRT, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, H-pol)
MSTU(M2, H-pol)
MSTU(M3, H-pol)
MSTU
MSTU(M1, V-pol)
MSTU(M2, V-pol)
MSTU(M3, V-pol)
BSW INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
SCSU
SV
NFB
UIA Connectors TERM
Frame Ground Connection
Expansion K-shelf
UIA Connectors TERM
Figure 3-80 - Frame Grounding of the Equipment Shelf
SRT 1F
3-84 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.3.4 Waveguide Pressurization and Alarms

The Dry Line Dehydrators and Line Monitors are part of the SRT 1F
installation.
Refer to the operators handbook for Installation, Acceptance and Turn Up
procedures.
3.5.2.3.5 Semi-Rigid Coaxial Connectors

The SMA semi rigid coaxial connectors are pre formed to exact lengths
for connection from the branch filter to the MSTU plug-in Adapter. The
transmitter output and receiver input are connected to the branching
network through the MSTU plug-in Adapter shown in Figure 3-81.
8
Careful handling should be used when fitting or removing the semi rigid
coaxial connectors, using the torque wrench with a setting of 21/Ncm.
Each end should be unscrewed before trying to remove the connector.
MSTU plug-in Adapter
SMA Connector
SMA Coaxial Connector
MN RX IN SD RX IN
TX RX SD
TX output
TX port: Transmitter OUT
RX: port: Main RX input
SD port: SD RX input
Top view of MSTU plug-in Adapter
MSTU
Figure 3-81 - MSTU plug-in Adapter and semi rigid coaxial cable connector
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-85
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.3.6 RF Branching Network Filter Connection
Figure 3-82 - RF Branching Network Filter connection

RF Branching network (BRU) connection to the BRU block is made on
two channel filter basis, that is, one filter module is composed of two RF
channel filters. In case of 1+1 alternated operation, for example, three
filer modules are needed with SD reception, one filter module is for
transmitter side, one filter module for receiver side, one filter module for
SD reception.
Two filter modules (for four RF channels) are mounted on one metal plate
and filter-mounted metal plate is plug-ind to the BRU block to connect to
the DUP.
BRU future expansion will be made on two-channels filter basis. If the
added two-channels filter is to be inserted in the same branching feed
than the existing one, the expansion is made with some traffic
interruption. If the insertion of new filter is made on opposite polarization
than the existing one, no traffic interruption is achieved. If the branching is
already conceived from the beginning with all the filters required for future
expansions, the expansion itself can be done without any traffic
interruption, despite the expansion is made at the same polarization or at
opposite polarization than the working channels.
SRT 1F
3-86 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.3.7 STM-1 electrical signal Interface (BSW)

Figure 3-83 shows the signal connection of STM-1 electrical interface and
8
signal connection is carried out at the front panel of the BSW unit.
Coaxial cable connector is 1.0/2.3 type and line impedance is 75 ohms
unbalanced.
Coaxial cables of STM-1 signal are layed along the SCSU shelf front
structure to the right side cable inlet. At the cable inlet EMC-control
measure for cables are carried out. For detailed coaxial cable assembly
and EMC-control measure, refer to section 6 and 7 of this Chapter.
Figure 3-83 - STM-1 Electrical Interface Connection
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-87
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.3.8 STM-1 optical Interface without DTI (OPT BSW)

Figure 3-84 and Figure 3-85 show the OPT BSW unit overview and signal
8
connction of STM-1 optical interface without DTI. Optical connector is LC

duplex type and connection is made on SFP module.
Optical cables to/from external telecommunication equipment are layed
along the SCSU shelf front structure to the right side cable inlet.
Figure 3-84 - Overview of OPT BSW Unit and SFP Module
SRT 1F
3-88 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Figure 3-85 - STM-1 Optical Interface (OPT BSW) Connection
Note-*: ALM/CONT connector PIN assignment is below;
PIN Description
1 ALM1
2 ALM2
3 ALM3
4 ALM4 (PSFAIL)
5 ALM COM
6 CONT1
7 CONT2
8 CONT COM
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-89
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.3.9 STM-1 optical Interface with DTI (OPT BSW DTI)

Figure 3-86 shows the OPT BSW DTI unit overview and signal connction
8
of STM-1 optical interface with DTI. Optical connector is LC duplex type

and connection is made on SFP module.
Optical cables to/from external telecommunication equipment are layed
Figure 3-86 - STM-1 Inter shelf connection of baseband signal
SRT 1F
3-90 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

PIN Description
1 ALM1
2 ALM2
3 ALM3
4 ALM4 (PSFAIL)
5 ALM COM
6 CONT1
7 CONT2
8 CONT COM
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-91
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.3.9.1 Optional MPS cable connection for OPT BSW DTI

Figure 3-87 shows the optional MPS (mutual power supply) cable
connection between OPT BSW DTI unit, or between OPT BSW DTI and
optional PSR (power supply redundant) card to reduce MTBF of OPT
BSW DTI unit.
Figure 3-87 - Typical Unit Layout for OPT BSW DTI and PSR
A-B direction system (3+1 system with OCC)

(1) Unit mixture of one BSW and two OPT BSW DTIs with OCC INTF
(2) In this case, no PSR unit is needed and MPS cable connection is
between OPT BSW DTI (W2) and OPT BSW DTI (W3).
(3) When OPT OCC DTI is applied, mutual power supply feed is not
applicable.
B-C direction system (3+1 system without OCC)

(1) Unit mixture of two BSWs and one OPT BSW DTI without OCC
(2) In this case, PSR unit is installed in the OCC slot and MPS cable
connection is between OPT BSW DTI (W2) and PSR.
(3) When OPT OCC or OPT OCC DTI is applied in future, mutual power
supply feed for OPT BSW DTI will be between OPT BSW DTI and OPT
OCC DTI.
SRT 1F
3-92 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.3.10 Gigabit Ethernet 1000BASE-T elctrical Interface (GE BSW)

Figure 3-88 and Figure 3-89 show the GE BSW unit overview and signal
connction of Gigabit Ethernet 1000BASE-T electrical interface.
Connector is RJ-45 type and connection is made on SFP module with
UTP category 5e cable.
LAN cables to/from external telecommunication equipment are layed
Figure 3-88 - Overview of GE BSW Unit and SFP Module
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-93
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Figure 3-89 - 1000BASE-T Electrical Interface (GE BSW) Connection

PIN Description
1 ALM1
2 ALM2
3 ALM3
4 ALM4 (PSFAIL)
5 ALM COM
6 CONT1
7 CONT2
8 CONT COM
SRT 1F
3-94 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.3.11 1000BASE-SX/LX Gigabit Ethernet optical signal Interface

(GE BSW)
Figure 3-90 and Figure 3-91 show the GE BSW unit overview and signal
connction of Gigabit Ethernet 1000BASE-SX/LX optical interface.
Connector is LC type and connection is made on SFP module.
Figure 3-90 Overview of GE BSW Unit and SFP Module
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-95
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Figure 3-91 1000BASE-SX/LX Optical Interface (GE BSW) Connection

PIN Description
1 ALM1
2 ALM2
3 ALM3
4 ALM4 (PSFAIL)
5 ALM COM
6 CONT1
7 CONT2
8 CONT COM
SRT 1F
3-96 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.3.12 GE Multi-Link Master Unit for 1000BASE-T Interface (GE MLM)

Figure 3-92 and Figure 3-93 show the GE MLM unit overview and signal
connction of Gigabit Ethernet 1000BASE-T electrical interface.
Connector is RJ-45 type and connection is made on SFP module with
UTP category 5e cable.
Figure 3-92 Overview of GE MLM and SFP Module
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-97
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Figure 3-93 GE Multi-Link for 1000BASE-T Electrical Interface (GE MLM)
SRT 1F
3-98 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.3.13 GE Multi-Link Master Unit for 1000BASE-SX/LX Interface

(GE MLM)
Figure 3-94 and Figure 3-95 show shows the GE MLM unit overview and
signal connction of Gigabit Ethernet 1000BASE-SX/LX optical interface.
Connector is LC type and connection is made on SFP module.
Figure 3-94 Overview of GE MLM Unit and SFP Module
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-99
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Figure 3-95 GE Multi-Link for 1000BASE-SX/LX Optical Interface (GE MLM)
SRT 1F
3-100 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.3.14 Cable Connection on GE MLM, GE MLS and GE ADPT

Figure 3-96, Figure 3-97 and Figure 3-98 show the detailed unit overview
of GE MLM, GE MLS and GE ADPT.
Figure 3-96 GE MLM unit Overview
Figure 3-97 GE MLS Unit Overview
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-101
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Figure 3-98 GE ADPT Unit Overview
Table 3.9 shows the cable connection between GE ML units.
Table 3.9 Connectors on Unit
No Connector Unit Name Quantity Cable Connection

GE MLM
1 PS CN 1 Between GE MLM and GE MLS
GE MLS
GE MLM
2 M-S CN 1 Between GE MLM and GE MLS
GE MLS
GE MLM 1 Flat cabel to/from GE MLS
GE MLS 7 Flat cable to/from GE ADPT
3 STM1 CN
GE ADPT1 1 Flat cable to/from GE MLS
GE ADPT2 1 Flat cable to/from GE MLS
4 L2 CONT CN GE MLS 1 To/from PC
SRT 1F
3-102 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.2.3.15 Wayside Signal Cable Connection

Figure 3-99 shows the 2 Mb/s wayside signal connection on the front
8
panel of the BSW/OPT BSW unit in SRT 1F K-shelf.

Coaxial connectors on the BSW/OPT BSW unit are 1.0/2.3 type and line
impedance are 75 ohms and unbalanced.
Coaxial cables of Wayside Traffic signal are located along the SCSU
section front structure to the right side cable inlet. At the cable inlet EMC-
control measure for cables are carried out. For detailed coaxial cable
assembly and EMC-control measure par. 3.6 and 3.7. 8 8
Front View of BSW unit
IN
2.048 Mbit/s HDB3 IN
WS-S
OUT
2.048 Mbit/s HDB3 OUT
BSW INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
OCC INTF
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
IN
WS-R
WS coaxial cable run to cable inlet OUT
Wayside Signal IN/OUT
(HDB3, 75 ohms, unbalance)
Wayside Signal IN/OUT (HDB3, 12 ohms, balance)

available on the backplane
Figure 3-99 - HDB3, 2 Mb/s wayside signal connection
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-103
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.3.16 Auxiliary Signal Cable Connection

Figure 3-100 and Figure 3-101 show the auxiliary (AUX) signal cable run
8 8
that is done on the connectors on the SCSU and UIA blocks of K-shelf
and Expansion K-shelf.
Detailed wiring and assembly for multi-pin connectors are shown in par.
3.6.
8
SCSU
Block
UIA
Block
Cables with Multi-pin

connectors for AUX signal
on UIA block are laid
through the left cable inlet
or under the shelf
Figure 3-100 - Auxiliary signal cable run for K-shelf
SRT 1F
3-104 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
CN-64
CN-67
CN-65
CN-68
SCSU
Block
G
CN-45
CN-46
CN-47
CN-48
CN-49
CN-50
CN-51
CN-52
UIA
Block
Cables with Multi-pin

connectors for AUX signal
on UIA block are laid
through the left cable inlet
or under the shelf.
Figure 3-101 - Auxiliary signal cable run for expansion K-shelf
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-105
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.2.3.17 Signal Cable Connection between K-shelf and Expansion K-shelf

Figure 3-102 shows the connection between K-shelf and expansion K-
8
shelf for 2x(N+1) co-channel operation.

Detailed wiring and assembly for multi-pin connectors are shown in par.
3.6.
8
K-shelf
W/C W/C W/C W/C DUP
BPF BPF BPF BPF SD

BPF BPF BPF BPF RX
BPF BPF BPF BPF TX
MSTU(PRT, V-pol)
MSTU(PRT, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, H-pol)
MSTU(M2, H-pol)
MSTU(M3, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, V-pol)
MSTU(M2, V-pol)
MSTU(M3, V-pol)
Five semi-rigid Five semi-rigid

coaxial cables are coaxial cables are
connected between connected between
BSW INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BRUs of top and BRUs of top and

TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
bottom shelves for bottom shelves for

H(V)-polarization V(H)-polarization
SV
NFB
Connectors TERM
Expansion K-shelf
Connectors TERM
Inter-shelf connection
cables are laid
through UIA blocks
between K-shelf and
expansion K-shelf
Figure 3-102 - Inter-shelf signal cable run between K-shelf and Expansion K-shelf
SRT 1F
3-106 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.3 Connector, Pin Assignment and Cable Connection
This section provides information on the connectors available on SCSU

and UIA blocks, relevant connector pin assignments and cable
connection for SRT 1F K-shelf equipment.
3.5.3.1 K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC

Figure 3-103 shows the multi-pin connector layout on the BWB of SCSU and
8
UIA blocks of K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC.
CN-40
CN-41
CN-47
CN-42
CN-46
SCSU
Block
CN-43
CN-44
CN-45
CN-11
CN-12
CN-13
CN-14
CN-15
CN-16
CN-17
CN-34
CN-21
CN-22
CN-23
CN-24
UIA
CN-33
CN-32
CN-31
Block
CN-1 CN-2
CN-3 CN-4
CN-5 CN-6
Figure 3-103 - Multi-pin connectors layout on K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-107
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Table 3.10 summarizes all connectors on the BWB of SCSU and UIA of
8
K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC.

Table 3.10 Connectors on the BWB on SCSU and UIA block of K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC
No.
CN 1 EXT SX-1 Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 2 EXT SY-1 Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 3 T4 SX-0 Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 4 T4 SY-0 Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 5 T0 SX-MON Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 6 T0 SY-MON Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 11 WS/UC 1 Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 21 HK 2 Housekeeping (DI/DO) 1st HK unit Dsub 37 multi-pin
st
CN 22 HK 3 Housekeeping (DI/DO) 1 HK unit Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 23 HK 4 Housekeeping (DI/DO) 2nd HK unit Dsub 37 multi-pin
nd
CN 31 RAB Rack Alarm BUS Dsub 15 multi-pin
CN 32 EOW Engineering Order Wire Dsub 15 multi-pin
CN 34 HK 1 Housekeeping (DI/DO) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 40 S INT/SSMB-1 Serial Interface 1 for 2x(N+1) slave DHA 80 multi-pin
CN 41 S INT/SSMB-2 Serial Interface 2 for 2x(N+1) master DHA 80 multi-pin
CN 42 BBIU1-SSMB Not used DHA 40 multi-pin
CN 43 BBIU2-SSMB Not used DHA 40 multi-pin
CN 44 CM-BUS Not used DHA 68 multi-pin
CN 45 BBIU/EOW Not used DHA 68 multi-pin
CN 46 OPT-BB Not used DHA 40 multi-pin
CN 47 S INT2 CLK Use with SNMP SV in RS mode DHA 26 multi-pin
SRT 1F
3-108 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC Connector PIN assignment for

Housekeeping port 1
Table 3.11 shows the Connector PIN assignment for HK1.
8
Use Access Name Connector No. on BWB Type of Connector

HK1 UIA-CN34 Dsub 37
Table 3.11 - Connector PIN assignment for HK1

PIN PIN
19 AGC MON 4 AGC monitor W4

37 SD AGC P SD AGC monitor P 18 SD AGC 3 SD AGC monitor W3
36 AGC MON P AGC monitor P 17 AGC MON 3 AGC monitor W3
35 SD AGC 7 SD AGC monitor W7 16 SD AGC 2 SD AGC monitor W2
34 AGC MON 7 AGC monitor W7 15 AGC MON 2 AGC monitor W2
33 SD AGC 6 SD AGC monitor W6 14 DO-4C Housekeeping OUT-4C
32 DO-4N Housekeeping OUT-4N 13 DO-3C Housekeeping OUT-3C
29 DO-1N Housekeeping OUT-1N 10 HK-Common HK Common Ground
28 HK-Common HK Common Ground 9 SDA SG Signal Ground for Monitor
27 AGC MON 6 AGC monitor W6 8 SD AGC 1 SD AGC monitor W1
26 SD AGC 5 SD AGC monitor W5 7 AGC SG Signal Ground for Monitor
25 AGC MON 5 AGC monitor W5 6 AGC MON 1 AGC monitor W1
24 SD AGC 4 SD AGC monitor W4 5 DI-7 Housekeeping IN-7
20 DI-2 Housekeeping IN-2 1 FG Frame Ground
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-109
3. INSTALLATION UMN

Housekeeping port 2
8


PIN PIN
19
37 18 HK1 DO-8C Housekeeping OUT-8C
36 HK1 DO-8N Housekeeping OUT-8N 17 HK1 DO-7C Housekeeping OUT-7C
29 HK1 DO-1N Housekeeping OUT-1N 10 HK-Common HK Common Ground
28 HK-Common HK Common Ground 9 HK1 DI-15 Housekeeping IN-15
27 HK1 DI-16 Housekeeping IN-16 8 HK1 DI-13 Housekeeping IN-13
20 HK1 DI-2 Housekeeping IN-2 1 FG Frame Ground
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3-110 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
The following table shows the housekeeping bits pre-assignment in the

case of BSW Optical cards equipped.
Table 3.13 - Connector PIN assignment for HK2 (BSW Optical or GE equipped)
PIN HK item when STM-1 PIN HK item when STM-1
No. HK item optical unit or GE unit No. HK item optical unit or GE unit
is inserted in slot W#n is inserted in slot W#n
19
37 18 HK1-DO-8C W4 CONT2-
36 HK1-DO-8N W4 CONT2+ 17 HK1-DO-7C W4 CONT1-
32 HK1-DO-4N W2 CONT2+ 13 Hk1-DO-3C W2 CONT1-
29 HK1-DO-1N W1 CONT1+ 10 HK-Common Common SG
28 HK-Common Common SG 9 HK1-DI-15 W4 ALM3
27 HK1-DI-16 W4 PSFAIL 8 HK1-DI-13 W4 ALM1
26 HK1-DI-14 W4 ALM2 7 HK1-DI-11 W3 ALM3
20 HK1-DI-2 W1 ALM2 1 FG Frame Ground
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-111
3. INSTALLATION UMN

Housekeeping port 3
8


PIN PIN
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3-112 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

19
37 18 HK1-DO-16C OCC CONT2-
36 HK1-DO-16N OCC CONT2+ 17 Hk1-DO-15C OCC CONT1-
35 HK1-DO-15N OCC CONT1+ 16 HK1-DO-14C W7 CONT2-
33 Hk1-DO-13N W7 CONT1+ 14 HK1-DO-12C W6 CONT2-
29 HK1-DO-9N W5 CONT1+ 10 HK-Common Common SG
28 HK-Common Common SG 9 HK1-DI-31 OCC ALM3
27 HK1-DI-32 OCC PSFAIL 8 HK1-DI-29 OCC ALM1
26 HK1-DI-30 OCC ALM2 7 HK1-DI-27 W7 ALM3
21 Hk1-DI-20 W5 PSFAIL 2 HK1-DI-17 W5 ALM1
20 HK1-DI-18 W5 ALM2 1 FG Frame Ground
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-113
3. INSTALLATION UMN

Housekeeping port 4
8


PIN PIN
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3-114 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

Housekeeping port 5
8


PIN PIN
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-115
3. INSTALLATION UMN
K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC Connector PIN assignment for Radio User

Channel
8

RUC UIA-CN33 Dsub 25

PIN PIN
13 SG Signal Ground
25 SG Signal Ground 12 U1R CKN (O) CH1 R CLK N (OUT)
24 U2R CKN (O) CH2 R CLK N (OUT) 11 U1R CKP (O) CH1 R CLK P (OUT)
23 U2R CKP (O) CH2 R CLK P (OUT) 10 SG Signal Ground
22 SG Signal Ground 9 U1R DN ( I ) CH1 R DATA N (IN) 4WR
21 U2R DN ( I ) CH2 R DATA N (IN) 4WR 8 U1R DP ( I ) CH1 R DATA P (IN) 4WR
20 U2R DP ( I ) CH2 R DATA P (IN) 4WR 7 SG Signal Ground
19 SG Signal Ground 6 U1T CKN (O) CH1 T CLK N (OUT)
18 U2T CKN (O) CH2 T CLK N (OUT) 5 U1T CKP (O) CH1 T CLK P (OUT)
17 U2T CKP (O) CH2 T CLK P (OUT) 4 SG Signal Ground
16 SG Signal Ground 3 U1T DN (O) CH1 T DATA N (OUT) 4WS
15 U2T DN (O) CH2 T DATA N (OUT) 4WS 2 U1T DP (O) CH1 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS
14 U2T DP (O) CH2 T DATA P (OUT) 4WS 1 FG Frame Ground
13
25
14 1
SRT 1F
3-116 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC Connector PIN assignment for Rack Alarm

BUS
Table 3.19 shows the Connector PIN assignment for RAB.
8

RAB UIA-CN31 Dsub 15
Table 3.19 - Connector PIN assignment for RAB

PIN PIN
8 COMMON
15 *ACO IN ACO Ground line 7
VIS MN Visible Minor alarm
14 ACO IN Alarm Cut Off IN 6
AUD MN Audible Minor alarm
13 NE ALM-N NE alarm (N) 5
VIS MJ Visible Major alarm
12
NE ALM-C NE alarm (C) 4 AUD MJ Audible Major alarm
11 3
RAB-MNT Maintenance VIS CR Visible Critical alarm
10
VIS WR Visible Warning 2 AUD CR Audible Critical alarm
8
15
9 1
With MCF/Controller type SNMP/IP, only pins 1, 8, 12, 13, 14, 15 are
enabled as standard function, all the other pins being enabled by
mounting proper RAB sub-module on the MCF/Controller card.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-117
3. INSTALLATION UMN
K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC Connector PIN assignment for EOW

Table 3.20 shows the Connector PIN assignment for EOW.
8

EOW UIA-CN32 Dsub 15
Table 3.20 - Connector PIN assignment for EOW

PIN PIN
8 E2 IN T (IN) 4WR E2ch T

15 E2 IN R (IN) 4WR E2ch R 7 E2-OUT T (OUT) 4WS E2ch T
14 E2-OUT R(OUT) 4WS E2ch R 6 CALL2-C Calling E2 common
13 CALL2-N Calling E2-N-line 5 SG Signal Ground
12 SG Signal Ground 4 CALL1-C Calling E1 common
11 CALL1-N Calling E1-N-line 3 E1-IN T (IN) 4WR E1ch T
10 E1-IN R (IN) 4WR E1ch R 2 E1-OUT T (O) 4WS E1ch T
9 E1-OUT R (O) 4WS E1ch R 1 FG Frame Ground
8
15
9
1
SRT 1F
3-118 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC

8

WS/UC 1 UIA-CN11 Dsub 37

PIN PIN
19 SG Signal Ground
36 SG Signal Ground 17 SUC LRCN (O) LINE side RCLK (N)
35 SUC RTCN (O) RADIO side TCLK (N) 16 SUC LRCP (O) LINE side RCLK (P)
34 SUC RTCP (O) RADIO side TCLK (P) 15 SUC LRDN ( I ) LINE side RDATA(N)
33 SUC RTDN (O) RADIO side TDATA (N) 14 SUC LRDP ( I ) LINE side RDATA(P)
32 SUC RTDP (O) RADIO side TDATA (P) 13 SG Signal Ground
30 SG Signal Ground 11 WSR OUT N (O) RFCOH WS OUT (N)
29 SUC RRCN (O) RADIO side RCLK (N) 10 WSR OUT P (O) RFCOH WS OUT (P)
28 SUC RRCP (O) RADIO side RCLK (P) 9 WSR IN N ( I ) RFCOH WS IN (N)
27 SUC RRDN ( I ) RADIO side RDATA(N) 8 WSR IN P ( I ) RFCOH WS IN (P)
26 SUC RRDP ( I ) RADIO side RDATA(P) 7 SG Signal Ground
24 SG Signal Ground 5 WSS OUT N (O) SOH WS OUT (N)
23 SUC LTCN (O) LINE side TCLK (N) 4 WSS OUT P (O) SOH WS OUT (P)
22 SUC LTCP (O) LINE side TCLK (P) 3 WSS IN N ( I ) SOH WS IN (N)
21 SUC LTN (O) LINE side TDATA (N) 2 WSS IN P ( I ) SOH WS IN (P)
20 SUC LTDP (O) LINE side TDATA (P) 1 SG Signal Ground
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-119
3. INSTALLATION UMN
K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC Coaxial Connector assignment for External

Clock
Coaxial Connectors as per Table 3.22, located on UIA block, are used for
8
IN/OUT of the External Synchronization Signal, 2.048 MHz sine wave or

2.048 Mb/s HDB3. The signal type can be set by LCT.

No.
CN 1 EXT SX-1 Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU,

2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for X-system
CN 2 EXT SY-1 Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU,
2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for Y-system
CN 3 T4 SX-0 Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU,
CN 4 T4 SY-0 Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU,
CN 5 T0 SX-MON Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external equipment,
CN 6 T0 SY-MON Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external equipment,
K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC Connector assignment for RS mode

One (1) coaxial cable with DHA-26pin straight and DHA-26pin right angle
connectors is needed between SNMP SV GP1/GP2 unit front connector
and SINTCLK connector (CN-47) on SCSU BWB when operation mode is
set to RS. The operation setting can be set by Web LCT. In case of
MS mode, no cable connection is needed.
Table 3.23 - Cable connection for Operation Mode RS

Connector on SV unit Connector on SCSU Connector Type
S INT2 CLK CN 47 (SINT2 CLK) DHA 26 multi-pin
SRT 1F
3-120 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.3.2 K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST

8
UIA blocks of K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST.
Figure 3-104 - Multi-pin connectors layout on K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-121
3. INSTALLATION UMN
8
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST.
Table 3.24 - Connectors on the BWB on SCSU and UIA block of K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST
No.
CN 39 HK 1 Housekeeping (DI/DO) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 40 WS/UC 1-1 Wayside/User channel (F1 byte) Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 43 EXT TX-1 Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 44 EXT TY-1 Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 46 T4 SX-0 Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 47 T4 SY-0 Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 48 T0 SX-MON Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 49 T0 SY-MON Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 53 HK 5 Housekeeping (DI/DO) 2nd HK unit Dsub 37 multi-pin
nd
st
st
CN 57 RAB Rack Alarm BUS Dsub 15 multi-pin
CN 58 EOW Engineering Order Wire Dsub 15 multi-pin
CN 63 S INT2 CLK Use with SNMP SV in RS mode DHA26 multi-pin
CN 64 EXPAND-2 Inter-shelf cable (*1) DHA80 multi-pin
CN 65 GP1 USW GP1 USW data (*1) DHA50 multi-pin
CN 66 S-INT/CLK Terminate by means of TA21570-C901 Z-pack60 multi-pin
for operation without expansion K-shelf
and remove with expansion K-shelf
CN 68 GP2 USW GP2 USW data (*1) DHA50 multi-pin
(Note-*1): When Expansion K-shelf ST is used, this connector is in use.
SRT 1F
3-122 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST Connector PIN assignment for

Housekeeping port 1
8


PIN PIN
19 AGC MON2-P AGC monitor 2-P

37 SD AGC1-P SD AGC monitor 1-P 18 SD AGC1-3 SD AGC monitor 1-W3
36 AGC MON1-P AGC monitor 1-P 17 AGC MON1-3 AGC monitor 1-W3
35 SD AGC 2-3 SD AGC monitor 2-W3 16 SD AGC1-2 SD AGC monitor 1-W2
34 AGC MON2-3 AGC monitor 2-W3 15 AGC MON1-2 AGC monitor 1-W2
33 SD AGC 2-2 SD AGC monitor 2-W2 14 DO-4C Housekeeping OUT-4C
27 AGC MON2-2 AGC monitor 2-W2 8 SD AGC1-1 SD AGC monitor 1-W1
26 SD AGC2-1 SD AGC monitor 2-W1 7 AGC SG Signal Ground for Monitor
25 AGC MON2-1 AGC monitor 2-W1 6 AGC MON1-1 AGC monitor 1-W1
24 SD AGC2-P SD AGC monitor 2-P 5 DI-7 Housekeeping IN-7
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-123
3. INSTALLATION UMN

Housekeeping port 2
8


PIN PIN
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3-124 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

19
37 18 HK1-DO-8C 1OCC CONT2-
36 HK1-DO-8N 1OCC CONT2+ 17 HK1-DO-7C 1OCC CONT1-
35 HK1-DO-7N 1OCC CONT1+ 16 HK1-DO-6C 1W3 CONT2-
34 HK1-DO-6N 1W3 CONT2+ 15 HK1-DO-5C 1W3 CONT1-
29 HK1-DO-1N 1W1 CONT1+ 10 HK-Common Common SG
28 HK-Common Common SG 9 HK1-DI-15 1OCC ALM3
27 HK1-DI-16 1OCC PSFAIL 8 HK1-DI-13 1OCC ALM1
26 HK1-DI-14 1OCC ALM2 7 HK1-DI-11 1W3 ALM3
25 HK1-DI-12 1W3 PSFAIL 6 HK1-DI-9 1W3 ALM1
24 HK1-DI-10 1W3 ALM2 5 HK1-DI-7 1W2 ALM3
20 HK1-DI-2 1W1 ALM2 1 FG Frame Ground
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-125
3. INSTALLATION UMN

Housekeeping port 3
8


PIN PIN
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3-126 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

19
37 18 HK1-DO-16C 2OCC CONT2-
36 HK1-DO-16N 2OCC CONT2+ 17 HK1-DO-15C 2OCC CONT1-
35 HK1-DO-15N 2OCC CONT1+ 16 HK1-DO-14C 2W3 CONT2-
29 HK1-DO-9N 2W1 CONT1+ 10 HK-Common Common SG
28 HK-Common Common SG 9 HK1-DI-31 2OCC ALM3
27 Hk1-DI-32 2OCC PSFAIL 8 HK1-DI-29 2OCC ALM1
26 HK1-DI-30 2OCC ALM2 7 HK1-DI-27 2W3 ALM3
20 HK1-DI-18 2W1 ALM2 1 FG Frame Ground
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-127
3. INSTALLATION UMN

Housekeeping port 4
8


PIN PIN
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3-128 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

Housekeeping port 5
8


PIN PIN
19
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-129
3. INSTALLATION UMN
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST Connector PIN assignment for Radio User

Channel
8

RUC UIA-CN45 Dsub 25

PIN PIN
13 SG Signal Ground
13
25
14 1
SRT 1F
3-130 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST Connector PIN assignment for Rack Alarm

BUS
8

RAB UIA-CN57 Dsub 15

PIN PIN
8 COMMON
15 *ACO IN ACO Ground line 7 VIS MN Visible Minor alarm
14 ACO IN Alarm Cut Off IN 6 AUD MN Audible Minor alarm
8
15
9 1
With MCF/Controller type SNMP/IP, only pins 1, 8, 12, 13, 14, 15 are
enabled as standard function, all the other pins being enabled by
mounting proper RAB sub-module on the MCF/Controller card.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-131
3. INSTALLATION UMN
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST Connector PIN assignment for EOW

8

EOW UIA-CN58 Dsub 15

PIN PIN

15 E2 IN R(IN) 4WR E2ch R 7 E2-OUT T (OUT) 4WS E2ch T
11 CALL1-N Calling E1-N-line 3 E1-IN T (IN) 4WR E1ch T
10 E1-IN R (IN) 4WR E1ch R 2 E1-OUT T (O) 4WS E1ch T
9 E1-OUT R (O) 4WS E1ch R 1 FG Frame Ground
8
15
9
1
SRT 1F
3-132 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC

8

WS/UC 1-1 UIA-CN40 Dsub 37

PIN PIN
19 SG Signal Ground
33 SUC RTDN (O) RADIO side TDATA(N) 14 SUC LRDP ( I ) LINE side RDATA(P)
32 SUC RTDP (O) RADIO side TDATA(P) 13 SG Signal Ground
27 SUC RRDN ( I ) RADIO side 8 WSR IN P ( I ) RFCOH WS IN (P)
RDATA(N)
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-133
3. INSTALLATION UMN
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST Coaxial Connector assignment for External

Clock
8

2.048 Mb/s HDB3. The signal type can be set by LCT.

No.
CN 43 EXT SX-1 Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU,

CN 44 EXT SY-1 Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU,
CN 46 T4 SX-0 Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU,
CN 47 T4 SY-0 Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU,
CN 48 T0 SX-MON Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external
equipment, 2.048 MHz sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for
X-system
CN 49 T0 SY-MON Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external
Y-system
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST Connector assignment for RS mode

One (1) coaxial cable with DHA-26pin straight and DHA-26pin right angle
connectors is needed between SNMP SV GP1/GP2 unit front connector
and SINTCLK connector (CN-63) on SCSU BWB when operation mode is
set to RS. The operation setting can be set by Web LCT. In case of
MS mode, no cable connection is needed.
Table 3.37 - Cable connection for Operation Mode RS

Connector on SV unit Connector on SCSU Connector Type
S INT2 CLK CN 63 (SINT2 CLK) DHA 26 multi-pin
SRT 1F
3-134 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.3.3 Expansion K-shelf ST

Expansion K-shelf ST is used in conjunction with K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST in
order to achieve, for instance, higher CCDP capacity configuration up to
2x(7+1)/2x(8+0) CC.
8
UIA blocks of Expansion K-shelf ST.
CN-64
CN-67
CN-65
CN-68
SCSU
Block
G
UIA
CN-45
CN-46
CN-47
CN-48
CN-49
CN-50
CN-51
CN-52
CN-43
CN-44
CN-42
CN-41
Block
Figure 3-105 - Multi-pin connectors layout on Expansion K-shelf ST (Single Terminal)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-135
3. INSTALLATION UMN
8
Expansion K-shelf ST.
Table 3.38 - Connectors on the BWB on SCSU and UIA block of Expansion K-shelf ST
No.
CN 41 AGC AGC monitor for 1/2-W4-W7 Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 42 OCC ALM/CONT for OCC OPT Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 43 ALM1 ALM/CONT for OPT BSW for 1-W4-W7 Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 44 ALM2 ALM/CONT for OPT BSW for 2-W4-W7 Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 64 EXPAND-2 Inter-shelf connection with initial shelf DHA80 multi-pin
CN 65 GP1 USW GP1 USW data DHA50 multi-pin
CN 67 EXPAND-1 Inter-shelf connection with initial shelf DHA80 multi-pin
CN 68 GP2 USW GP2 USW data DHA50 multi-pin
SRT 1F
3-136 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Expansion K-shelf ST Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC

8

WS/UC 1-4 UIA-CN 45 Dsub 37

PIN PIN
19 SG Signal Ground
27 SUC RRDN ( I ) RADIO side RDATA(N) 8 WSR IN P ( I ) RFCOH WS IN (P)
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-137
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Expansion K-shelf ST Connector PIN assignment for AGC

Table 3.40 shows the Connector PIN assignment for AGC.
AGC UIA-CN41 Dsub 37
Table 3.40 - Connector PIN assignment for AGC

PIN PIN
19 AGC 2-4 AGC monitor 2-W4

37 SD AGC 1-4 SD AGC monitor 1-W4 18 SD AGC 1-7 SD AGC monitor 1-W7
36 AGC 1-4 AGC monitor 1-W4 17 AGC 1-7 AGC monitor 1-W7
35 SD AGC 2-7 SD AGC monitor 2-W7 16 SD AGC 1-6 SD AGC monitor 1-W6
33 SD AGC 2-6 SD AGC monitor 2-W6 14
32 13
31 12
30 11
29 10 SG Signal Ground
27 AGC 2-6 AGC monitor 2-W6 8 SD AGC 1-5 SD AGC monitor 1-W5
26 SD AGC 2-5 SD AGC monitor 2-W5 7 SG Signal Ground
24 SD AGC 2-4 SD AGC monitor 2-W4 5
23 4
22 3
21 2
20 1
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3-138 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Expansion K-shelf ST Connector PIN assignment for OCC

Table 3.41 shows the Connector PIN assignment for OCC.
OCC UIA-CN42 Dsub 37
Table 3.41 - Connector PIN assignment for OCC

PIN HK item HK item when STM-1 PIN HK item HK item when STM-1
No. optical or GE is No. optical or GE is
inserted in slot OCC inserted in slot OCC
19
37 18 DO-8C RPS2 OCC CONT2-
36 DO-8N RPS2 OCC CONT2+ 17 DO-7C RPS2 OCC CONT1-
33 DO-5N RPS1 OCC CONT1+ 14 DO-4C
32 DO-4N 13 DO-3C
31 DO-3N 12 DO-2C
30 DO-2N 11 DO-1C
29 DO-1N 10 SG Signal Ground
28 SG Signal Ground 9 DI-15 RPS2 OCC ALM3
27 DI-16 RPS2 OCC PSFAIL 8 DI-13 RPS2 OCC ALM1
26 DI-14 RPS2 OCC ALM2 7 DI-11 RPS1 OCC ALM3
25 DI-12 RPS1 OCC PSFAIL 6 DI-9 RPS1 OCC ALM1
24 DI-10 RPS1 OCC ALM2 5 DI-7
23 DI-8 4 DI-5
22 DI-6 3 DI-3
21 DI-4 2 DI-1
20 DI-2 1 FG Frame Ground
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-139
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Expansion K-shelf ST Connector PIN assignment for ALM

Table 3.42 shows the Connector PIN assignment for ALM.
ALM1 UIA-CN43 Dsub 37
ALM2 UIA-CN44 Dsub 37
Table 3.42 - Connector PIN assignment for ALM

HK item when STM-1 HK item when STM-1
No HK Item optical unit or GE unit No HK Item optical unit or GE unit
19
37 18 DO-8C W7 CONT2-
36 DO-8N W7 CONT2+ 17 DO-7C W7 CONT1-
29 DO-1N W4 CONT1+ 10 SG Signal Ground
28 SG Signal Ground 9 DI-15 W7 ALM3
27 DI-16 W7 PSFAIL 8 DI-13 W7 ALM1
26 DI-14 W7 ALM2 7 DI-11 W6 ALM3
24 DI-10 W6 ALM2 5 DI-7 W5 ALM3
22 DI-6 W5 ALM2 3 DI-3 W4 ALM3
20 DI-2 W4 ALM2 1 FG Frame Ground
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3-140 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.3.4 K-shelf 2x(3+1) DT

Figure 3-106 shows the multi-pin connector layout on the BWB of SCSU
and UIA blocks of K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT.
Initial Shelf for 3+1 DT
CN64
CN67
CN67
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW)M2)
BSW(M3)
OCC INTF
TCU
TCU
HK
HK
CN66
SCSU
CN83
RPS 1 (East)
Eastern Route RPS 2 (West)
Western Route Block
SVSV
forfor
Eastern
RPSRoute
1
CN65
CN68
SVSV for RPSRoute
for Western 2 G
CN51
CN52
CN53
CN50
CN54
CN55
CN71
CN72
CN87
CN69
CN70
CN84
UIA
CN49
CN86
Block
CN56
CN57
CN73
CN74
CN58 CN75
CN81 CN77
CN76
CN88 CN77
Figure 3-106 - Multi-pin connectors layout on K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-141
3. INSTALLATION UMN
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT.
Table 3.43 - Connectors on the BWB on SCSU and UIA block of K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT
CN No. Description Remarks Connector Type
CN 49 RUC E Radio User Channel for RPS1 Dsub 25 multi-pin
CN 50 HK 1 E Housekeeping (DI/DO) for RPS1 Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 51 WS/UC 1 E Wayside/User channel for RPS1 Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 56 RAB E Rack Alarm BUS for RPS1 Dsub 15 multi-pin
CN 57 EOW E Engineering Order Wire for RPS1 Dsub 15 multi-pin
CN 58 EXT SX-1 E Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 65 USW E USW data for RPS1 (*1) DHA50 multi-pin
CN 66 SINT / CLK Terminate by TA21570-C901 without Z-pack60 multi-pin
expansion K-shelf and remove with
expansion K-shelf.
CN 68 USW W USW data for RPS2 (*1) DHA50 multi-pin
CN 69 WS/UC 2 W Wayside/User channel for RPS2 Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 71 HK 2 W Housekeeping (DI/DO) for RPS2 Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 73 RAB W Rack Alarm BUS for RPS2 Dsub 15 multi-pin
CN 74 EOW W Engineering Order Wire for RPS2 Dsub 15 multi-pin
CN 75 EXT SX-1 W Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 76 T4 SX-0 W Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 77 T0 SX-MON W Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 81 T4 SX-0 E Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
CN 86 RUC W Radio User Channel for RPS2 Dsub 25 multi-pin
CN 88 T0 SX-MON E Synchronization signal (Sine/HDB3) 1.0/2.3 coaxial
(Note-*1): When Expansion K-shelf DT is used, this connector is in use.
SRT 1F
3-142 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT Connector PIN assignment for

Housekeeping port 1
HK1 E/HK1 W UIA-CN50, CN84 Dsub 37

PIN PIN
19
37 SD AGC SD AGC monitor P 18 SD AGC 3 SD AGC monitor W3
36 AGC MON P AGC monitor P 17 AGC MON 3 AGC monitor W3
35 16 SD AGC 2 SD AGC monitor W2
34 15 AGC MON 2 AGC monitor W2
33 14 DO-4C Housekeeping OUT-4C
27 8 SD AGC 1 SD AGC monitor W1
26 7 AGC SG Signal Ground for Monitor
25 6 AGC MON 1 AGC monitor W1
24 5 DI-7 Housekeeping IN-7
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-143
3. INSTALLATION UMN

Housekeeping port 2
Table 3.45 shows the Connector PIN assignment for HK 2.

PIN PIN
19
29 DO-1N Housekeeping OUT-1N 10 Common HK Common Ground
28 Common HK Common Ground 9 DI-15 Housekeeping IN-15
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3-144 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
The following table shows the housekeeping pin assignment in the case
of BSW Optical cards equipped.
PIN HK item HK item when STM-1 PIN HK item HK item when STM-1
No. optical unit or GE unit No. optical unit or GE unit
19
37 18 DO-8C OCC CONT2-
36 DO-8N OCC CONT2+ 17 DO-7C OCC CONT1-
35 DO-7N OCC CONT1+ 16 DO-6C W3 CONT2-
29 DO-1N W1 CONT1+ 10 Common Common SG
28 Common Common SG 9 DI-15 OCC ALM3
27 DI-16 OCC PSFAIL 8 DI-13 OCC ALM1
26 DI-14 OCC ALM2 7 DI-11 W3 ALM3
24 DI-10 W3 ALM2 5 DI-7 W2 ALM3
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-145
3. INSTALLATION UMN

Housekeeping port 3
Table 3.47 shows the Connector PIN assignment for HK 3

PIN PIN
19
29 DO-9N Housekeeping OUT-9N 10 Common HK Common Ground
28 Common HK Common Ground 9 DI-31 Housekeeping IN-31
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3-146 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT Connector PIN assignment for Radio

User Channel
RUC E UIA-CN49 Dsub 25
RUC W UIA-CN86 Dsub 25

PIN PIN
13 SG Signal Ground
13
25
14 1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-147
3. INSTALLATION UMN
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT Connector PIN assignment for Rack

Alarm BUS
RAB E UIA-CN56 Dsub 15
RAB W UIA-CN73 Dsub 15

PIN PIN
8 COMMON
15 *ACO IN ACO Ground line 7 VIS MN Visible Minor alarm
14 ACO IN Alarm Cut Off IN 6 AUD MN Audible Minor alarm
8
15
9 1
NOTE: Only pins 1, 8, 12, 13, 14, 15 are enabled as standard function, all
the other pins being enabled by mounting proper RAB sub-module on the
MCF/Controller card.
SRT 1F
3-148 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION

EOW
EOW E UIA-CN57 Dsub 15
EOW W UIA-CN74 Dsub 15

PIN PIN

15 E2 IN R(IN) 4WR E2ch R 7 E2-OUT T (OUT) 4WS E2ch T
11 CALL1-N Calling E1-N-line 3 E1-IN T(IN) 4WR E1ch T
10 E1-IN R(IN) 4WR E1ch R 2 E1-OUT T (O) 4WS E1ch T
9 E1-OUT R(O) 4WS E1ch R 1 FG Frame Ground
8
15
9
1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-149
3. INSTALLATION UMN
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC

WS/UC 1 E UIA-CN51 Dsub 37
WS/UC 1 W UIA-CN87 Dsub 37

PIN PIN
19 SG Signal Ground
RDATA(N)
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3-150 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT Connector assignment for External

Clock
2.048 Mb/s HDB3. The signal type can be set by Web LT.

CN No. Description Remarks
CN 58 EXT SX-1 E Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU, 2.048 MHz
sine wave or 2.048 Mb/s HDB3 for RPS1
CN 75 EXT SX-1 W Synchronization clock signal INPUT from SSU, 2.048 MHz
CN 81 T4 SX-0 E Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU, 2.048 MHz
CN 76 T4 SX-0 W Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to SSU, 2.048 MHz
CN 88 T0 SX-MON E Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external
RPS1
CN 77 T0 SY-MON W Synchronization clock signal OUTPUT to external
RPS2
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-151
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.3.5 Expansion K-shelf DT

Expansion K-shelf DT is used in conjunction with K-shelf up to 2x(3+1)
DT in order to achieve higher Double Terminal capacity configuration up
to 2x(7+1)/2x(8+0) DT.
Figure 3-107 shows the multi-pin connector layout on the BWB of SCSU
and UIA blocks of Expansion K-shelf DT.
Expansion Shelf for 4+0 Double Terminal

CCC ADPT E
CCC ADPT E
CN67
CN64
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
BSW (M4)
BSW (M5)
BSW (M6)
BSW (M7)
BSW (M4)
BSW (M5)
BSW (M6)
BSW (M7)
CN83
SCSU
CN65
CN68
Block
RPS 1 (East)
Eastern Route RPS 2 (West)
Western Route
CN61
CN62
CN63
CN85
CN49
CN50
CN51
CN52
CN59
CN44
CN58
CN57
UIA
Block
Figure 3-107 - Multi-pin connectors layout on Expansion K-shelf DT
SRT 1F
3-152 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Expansion K-shelf DT.
Table 3.53 - Connectors on the BWB on SCSU and UIA block of Expansion K-shelf DT
CN No. Description Remarks Connector Type
CN 44 ALM2 (W) ALM/CONT for OPT BSW for RPS2 Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 57 AGC AGC monitor for W4-W7 Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 58 OCC ALM/CONT for OCC OPT Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 59 ALM1 (E) ALM/CONT for OPT BSW for RPS1 Dsub 37 multi-pin
CN 64 EXPANSION-2 Inter-shelf cable DHA80 multi-pin
CN 65 USW E USW data for RPS1 direction DHA50 multi-pin
CN 68 USW W USW data for RPS2 direction DHA50 multi-pin
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-153
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Expansion K-shelf DT Connector PIN assignment for WS/UC

WS/UC 4 E UIA-CN 61 Dsub 37
WS/UC 4 W UIA-CN 49 Dsub 37

PIN No. Description Remarks PIN No. Description Remarks
19 SG Signal Ground
RDATA(N)
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3-154 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Expansion K-shelf DT Connector PIN assignment for AGC

Table 3.55 shows the Connector PIN assignment for AGC.
AGC UIA-CN57 Dsub 37
Table 3.55 - Connector PIN assignment for AGC

PIN PIN
19 AGC 4 W AGC monitor W-W4

37 SD AGC 4 E SD AGC monitor E-W4 18 SD AGC 7E SD AGC monitor E-W7
36 AGC 4 E AGC monitor E-W4 17 AGC 7 E AGC monitor E-W7
35 SD AGC 7 W SD AGC monitor W-W7 16 SD AGC 6 E SD AGC monitor E-W6
34 AGC 7 W AGC monitor W-W7 15 AGC 6 E AGC monitor E-W6
33 SD AGC 6 W SD AGC monitor W-W6 14
32 13
31 12
30 11
29 10 SG Signal Ground
27 AGC 6 W AGC monitor W-W6 8 SD AGC 5 E SD AGC monitor E-W5
26 SD AGC 5 W SD AGC monitor W-W5 7 SG Signal Ground
25 AGC 5 W AGC monitor W-W5 6 AGC 5 E AGC monitor E-W5
24 SD AGC 4 W SD AGC monitor W-W4 5
23 4
22 3
21 2
20 1
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-155
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Expansion K-shelf DT Connector PIN assignment for OCC

Table 3.56 shows the Connector PIN assignment for OCC.
OCC UIA-CN58 Dsub 37
Table 3.56 - Connector PIN assignment for OCC

No HK Item optical or GE is No HK Item optical or GE is
inserted in slot OCC inserted in slot OCC
19
37 18 DO-8C OCC CONT2- W
36 DO-8N OCC CONT2+ W 17 DO-7C OCC CONT1- W
35 DO-7N OCC CONT1+ W 16 DO-6C OCC CONT2- E
34 DO-6N OCC CONT2+ E 15 DO-5C OCC CONT1- E
33 DO-5N OCC CONT1+ E 14 DO-4C
32 DO-4N 13 DO-3C
31 DO-3N 12 DO-2C
30 DO-2N 11 DO-1C
29 DO-1N 10 SG Signal Ground
28 SG Signal Ground 9 DI-15 OCC ALM3 W
27 DI-16 OCC PSFAIL W 8 DI-13 OCC ALM1 W
26 DI-14 OCC ALM2 W 7 DI-11 OCC ALM3 E
25 DI-12 OCC PSFAIL E 6 DI-9 OCC ALM1 E
24 DI-10 OCC ALM2 E 5 DI-7
23 DI-8 4 DI-5
22 DI-6 3 DI-3
21 DI-4 2 DI-1
20 DI-2 1 FG Frame Ground
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
3-156 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Expansion K-shelf DT Connector PIN assignment for ALM

Table 3.57 shows the Connector PIN assignment for ALM.
ALM1 (E) UIA-CN59 Dsub 37
ALM2 (W) UIA-CN44 Dsub 37
Table 3.57 - Connector PIN assignment for ALM

No HK Item optical unit or GE unit No HK Item optical unit or GE unit
19
37 18 DO-8C W7 CONT2-
29 DO-1N W4 CONT1+ 10 SG Signal Ground
28 SG Signal Ground 9 DI-15 W7 ALM3
26 DI-14 W7 ALM2 7 DI-11 W6 ALM3
24 DI-10 W6 ALM2 5 DI-7 W5 ALM3
19
37
20 1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-157
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.3.6 Inter-shelf connection between K-shelf and Expansion K-shelf

Table 3.58 shows the inter-shelf connection list between K-shelf and
8
Expansion K-shelf for both ST and DT cases.
Table 3.58 - Inter-shelf connection between K-shelf and Expansion K-shelf

Description K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) Expansion K-shelf
EXPAND-1 CN 67 CN 67
with G-terminal G G
EXPAND-2 CN 64 CN 64
EXPAND-3 CN 83 (DT only) CN 83 (DT only)
RPS1 USW CN 65 CN 65
RPS2 USW CN 68 CN 68
EXPAND-1 cable is equipped with ground terminal cable as shown in the

following figure.
80-pin connector
marked with CN67
with ground terminal
Figure 3-108 - EXPAND-1 inter-shelf cable
3.5.3.6.1 Shift of slide-In-Unit from K-shelf to Expansion K-shelf

When expanding an already installed 2x(N+1) system (N<4), deployed
with K-shelf up to 2x(3+1), by means of Expansion K-shelf, if occasional
traffic units are equipped in existing K-shelf up to 2x(3+1), such cards
shall be shifted from initial K-shelf to Expansion K-shelf.
Table 3.59 - Slide-in-unit shift from Initial K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) to Expansion K-shelf
Unit Name From Initial K-shelf To Expansion K-shelf
OCC INTF Remove Plug-in

OPT OCC Remove Plug-in
SRT 1F
3-158 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.5.3.6.2 CCC ADPT cards and base band inter-shelf connections

Inter-shelf cable connections between K-shelf and expansion K-shelf by
means of proper CCC (Cable Connection Card) units (named CCC ADPT
E for Expansion K-shelf and CCC ADPT I for Initial K-shelf) are required.
Initial Shelf for 2x(3+1)
Inter-shelf cable Inter-shelf cable

connection connection
CCC ADPT I
CCC ADPT I
BSW INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M1)
BSW)M2)
BSW(M3)
CCC ADPT I CCC ADPT I
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK-1
HK-2
RPS1 system RPS2 system
SCSU
Block
STM-1 x2 STM-1 x2
Wayside x4 Wayside x4
Cont/ALM x1 UIA Cont/ALM x1
Block
Expansion Shelf for 2x(4+0)

CCC ADPT E
CCC ADPT E
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
CCC ADPT E CCC ADPT E

BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
RPS1 system RPS2 system
SCSU
Block
UIA
Block
Figure 3-109 - Inter-Shelf Coaxial Cable Connection and Unit Shift
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-159
3. INSTALLATION UMN
Detailed Inter-shelf connection cables between initial and expansion

shelves on CCC ADPT cards are shown in the following tables. Coaxial
cables for STM-1 and wayside channels have 27cp connectors and 2m
length. Multi-pin cable for Cont/ALM has got DHA26 type connectors and
2m length.
Table 3.60 - Inter-shelf coaxial connections between CCC ADPT cards

Connector label Connector label
Signal to CCC ADPT I to CCC ADPT E Cable Code
on initial shelf on expansion shelf
STM-1 IN (L) 156M CMI IN 156M CMI OUT TA70001-2076A4

STM-1 OUT (L) 156M CMI OUT 156M CMI IN TA70001-2076A4
STM-1 IN (R) 156M CMI IN 156M CMI OUT TA70001-2076A4
STM-1 OUT (R) 156M CMI OUT 156M CMI IN TA70001-2076A4
2M WSS IN (L) 2M WSS IN 2M WSS OUT TA70001-2288A1
2M WSS OUT (L) 2M WSS OUT 2M WSS IN TA70001-2288A1
2M WSR IN (L) 2M WSR IN 2M WSR OUT TA70001-2288A2
2M WSR OUT (L) 2M WSR OUT 2M WSR IN TA70001-2288A2
2M WSS IN (R) 2M WSS IN 2M WSS OUT TA70001-2288A1
2M WSS OUT (R) 2M WSS OUT 2M WSS IN TA70001-2288A1
2M WSR IN (R) 2M WSR IN 2M WSR OUT TA70001-2288A2
2M WSR OUT (R) 2M WSR OUT 2M WSR IN TA70001-2288A2
Note*: STM-1 IN (L) means the STM-1 connection on left side CCC ADPT
card and STM-1 IN (R) means the STM-1 connection on right side
CCC ADPT card.
Table 3.61 - Inter-shelf multi-pin connection between CCC ADPT cards

Connector label Connector label
Signal to CCC ADPT I to CCC ADPT E Cable Code
on initial shelf on expansion shelf
Control & Alarm CCC ADPT I CCC ADPT E TA70001-2287A1

(CN 16) (CN 16) (DHA-26 pin)
SRT 1F
3-160 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Detailed connector port on CCC ADPT card is shown in the following

figures.
156M CMI IN
156M CMI OUT
CN
2M WSS IN
ALM/ 2M WSS OUT
CN16
CONT
2M WSR IN
2M WSR OUT
CN
Figure 3-110 - Cable Connection Card (CCC ADPT I)
156M CMI OUT

156M CMI IN
CN
2M WSS OUT
ALM/ 2M WSS IN
CN16
CONT
2M WSR OUT
2M WSR IN
CN
Figure 3-111 - Cable Connection Card (CCC ADPT E)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-161
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.3.6.3 BSW STM-1 Optical cards or GigaEthernet equipped in the

Expansion K-shelf
In case some BSW STM-1 Optical and/or OCC STM-1 Optical cards or
GigaEthernet cards are equipped in the Expansion K-shelf, some
ALM/CONT connections are necessary between the K-shelf 2x(3+1) and
the Expansion K-shelf, as described in the following tables for ST case
and DT case, respectively.
It is assumed that the HK units are equipped in the SRT1F terminal as
required in case of equipping of BSW STM-1 Optical and/or OCC STM-1
Optical and/or GigaEthernet.
Table 3.62 - ALM/CONT inter-shelf connections for Expansion K-shelf ST
K-shelf 2x(3+1) ST Expansion K-shelf ST

CN n. Pin n. Pin n. CN n.
8 6
9 7
17 15
OCC RPS1 CN 56 18 16 CN 42
(HK 2) 26 24 (OCC)
27 25
35 33
36 34
8 8
9 9
17 17
OCC RPS2 CN 55 18 18 CN 42
(HK 3) 26 26 (OCC)
27 27
35 35
36 36
CN 54 CN 43
ALM RPS1 ALL pins ALL pins
(HK 4) (ALM1)
CN 53 CN 44
ALM RPS2 ALL pins ALL pins
(HK 5) (ALM2)
SRT 1F
3-162 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Table 3.63 - ALM/CONT inter-shelf connections for Expansion K-shelf DT
K-shelf 2x(3+1) DT Expansion K-shelf DT

CN n. Pin n. Pin n. CN n.
8 6
9 7
17 15
OCC RPS1 (E) CN 54 18 16 CN 58
(HK 2 E) 26 24 (OCC)
27 25
35 33
36 34
8 8
9 9
17 17
OCC RPS2 (W) CN 71 18 18 CN 58
(HK 2 W) 26 26 (OCC)
27 27
35 35
36 36
CN 55 CN 59
ALM RPS1 (E) ALL pins ALL pins
(HK 3 E) (ALM1)
CN 72 CN 44
ALM RPS2 (W) ALL pins ALL pins
(HK 3 W) (ALM2)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-163
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.5.3.7 Inter-connection cables between MSTUs for CCDP operation

Inter-connection cables between MSTU of RPS1 and MSTU of RPS2 for
2x(N+1) CCDP operation are needed on radio frequency channel basis.
Three coaxial cables (7m length) with angle connectors 1.0/2.3 both sides
are required for XPIC IN, XPIC OUT and REF I/O SYNC.
Maximum twelve (12) cables for

2x(7+1) CCDP operation are
fed through metal square
sockets located top right and
DUP ADPT DUP ADPT
left of BRU block of K-shelf and
expansion K-shelf.
Three (3) coaxial cables from

MSTU (V) are fed up vertically
to the BRU and connected with
MSTU (H) through square
MSTU(PRT, V-pol)
MSTU(PRT, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, H-pol)
MSTU(M2, H-pol)
MSTU(M3, H-pol)
MSTU(M1, V-pol)
MSTU(M2, V-pol)
MSTU(M3, V-pol)
sockets located both sides of

the shelf.
Max. 3x4=12 cables in total.
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
BSW INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
SV
Square
socket for
XPIC cable
feed between
Connectors TERM MSTUs
Figure 3-112 - Cable Connection between MSTUs in CCDP operation by means of

K-shelf 2x(3+1) ST
SRT 1F
3-164 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Maximum twelve (12) cables for 2x(3+1) and Three (3) coaxial cables from MSTU (V/H) are
2x(4+0) CCDP operation are fed separately fed up vertically and connected with MSTU
through metal square sockets located both (V/H) through square sockets located both
sides of the K-shelf of each rack. sides of shelf.
Max. 3x4=12 cables in total
DUP ADPT DUP ADPT

MSTU(PRT)
MSTU(PRT)
MSTU(M1)
MSTU(M2)
MSTU(M3)
MSTU(M4)
MSTU(M5)
MSTU(M6)
MSTU(M7)
MSTU(M1)
MSTU(M2)
MSTU(M3)
MSTU(M4)
MSTU(M5)
MSTU(M6)
MSTU(M7)
OCC INTF
BSW INTF
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU1
TCU2
HK1
HK2
SV
Connectors TERM Connectors TERM
Figure 3-113 - Cable Connection between MSTUs in CCDP operation by means of

K-shelf 7+1
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-165
3. INSTALLATION UMN
There are two (2) types of XPIC cable installation location as shown in the
following figures. One is on the rack fixing structure , the other is on the
metal angle of SRT1F rack side.
XPIC cable installation location
is on the SRT1F rack fixing
structure
Rack fixing structure
XPIC cable
wrapped
Figure 3-114 - XPIC Cable Installation Location on the rack fixing structure
SRT 1F
3-166 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Rack fixing structure
XPIC cable installation

location is on the metal
angle of rack side for the
initial K-shelf.
XPIC cable
wrapped
XPIC cable installation

location is on the metal
angle of rack side for the
expansion k-shelf.
Figure 3-115 - XPIC Cable Installation Location on the SRT1F rack side
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-167
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6 Wiring and Assembly for Connectors

This section provides information on the wiring and assembly for the
connectors of various types used in the radio equipment for external
connections.
3.6.1 Wiring and Assembly for Multi-pin Connectors
3.6.1.1 Assembly for the D-sub Connector (15-pin)

Figure 3-116 below shows the assembly for D-sub 15-pin connector.
8
a 2
Solder the wire (1) to the pin of the connector
(2).
8 Beforehand, slip the heat-shrink tubing (8) of
appropriate length over the wire, after soldering,
heat the tubing to shrink around the connector
pin.
1
b 3
Attach the cover (3) to the connector (2), as

shown in the figure b.
Fix the multi-cable part of wires (1) with

the cable clamp (4).
SRT 1F
3-168 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
d
Cable clamp was fixed.
e
5
Put the cover (5) on the cover of opposite

side.
6 7
f
Fix the cover (5) with the screw (6) and the nut
(7).
7
6
Figure 3-116 - Assembly for the D-sub Connector (15-pin)
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-169
3. INSTALLATION UMN

8
a
2
Solder the wire (1) to the pin of the
8 connector (2).
Beforehand, slip the heat-shrink tubing (8)
of appropriate length over the wire, after
1 soldering, heat the tubing to shrink around
the connector pin.
b 3
Attach the cover (3) to the connector
(2), as shown in the figure b.
Fix the multi-cable part of wires (1) with

the cable clamp (4).
4
SRT 1F
3-170 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
e
5
Put the cover (5) on the cover of

opposite side.
6 7
f
Fix the cover (5) with the screw (6) and

the nut (7).
7 6
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-171
3. INSTALLATION UMN

8
a
2 Solder the wire (1) to the pin of the
connector (2).
8 Beforehand, slip the heat-shrink tubing
(8) of appropriate length over the wire,
after soldering, heat the tubing to shrink
around the connector pin.
3
b
Attach the cover (3) to the connector
(2), as shown in the figure b.
Fix the multi-cable part of wires (1)

4
with the cable clamp (4).
SRT 1F
3-172 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
d
e
5
Put the cover (5) on the cover of opposite

side.
6 7
f
Fix the cover (5) with the screw (6) and

the nut (7).
7 6
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-173
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.6.2 Wiring and Assembly for Coaxial Connectors
3.6.2.1 Assembly for the 1.0/2.3 type Coaxial Connector

Figure 3-119 below shows the assembly for 1.0/2.3 type connector.
8
Slip the boot (2) and the outer ferrule (3)

a over the coaxial cable (1).
Cut the sheath (4), the braid of outer
conductor (5), insulator (6), and inner
conductor (7) into the size as shown in the
1 2 5 6 7 figure.
Note Do not damage the sheath(4), the
braid (5), the insulator (6), or the inner
conductor (7), by cutting too deeply.
Tin the inner conductor (7) before soldering.
3 4 Note Be careful not to melt the insulator
(6) by excess heat .
Insert the inner conductor (7) into the contact (8) until the contact just
touches the insulator (6).
b
Solder the inner conductor (7) to the contact
8 (8).
Note Be careful not to melt the insulator (6)
by excess heat .
Note Shave off the bulge of excess solder
along with the cylindrical surface of the
6 contact (8).
Spread the end of the braid (5) slightly as

c shown in the figure c.
Insert the inner ferrule (10) (part of
5 connector body (9)) into the cable braid (5)
and insert the cable assembly into the body
centre until the end of insulator (6) butts into
the body.
*1 Equipment accessory
10
9
*1
SRT 1F
3-174 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
d
Slide the outer ferrule (3) over the braid as
*2 11
shown in figure d.
Crimp the outer ferrule (3) with the crimping
tool through the die (11).
a Measuring point for crimp height.
3 Note Crimp heights should be the value
shown in table below.
Tool Die Tool set name Crimp height
CR-H-300 RFD-1 CR-H-1163 A,B,C
357J-13134 HRFD-1 ditto 5.08-5.30 mm
*2 Maintenance accessory
a
Gap between the contact (8) and the end of

the insulator (6) should be 0 to 0.24 mm.
Gap between the outer ferrule (3) and the
body (9) should be 0.5 mm or less.
Cover the outer ferrule (3) with the boot (2).
Figure 3-119 - Assembly for 1.0/2.3 Coaxial Connector
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-175
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.7 Coaxial Cable Installation for EMC Requirement

This section provides information on the coaxial cable installation for
EMC-control measure.
Relevant coaxial cables are STM-1 electrical interface cable and wayside
traffic cable (when 75-ohm unbalanced application is employed.) to/from
BSW/OPT BSW unit of SCSU block.
3.7.1 Coaxial Cable Wiring Installation
Figure 3-120 and Figure 3-121 show the image of coaxial cable
8 8
installation for EMC-control measure for K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC and for
K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC.
Coaxial cables with 1.0/2.3 straight

connector for STM-1 signal
(max. 14 cables, 2 cables/STM-1)
Coaxial cables with 1.0/2.3 straight

Coaxial cable inlet for
connector for wayside traffic signal
EMC-control measure
Figure 3-120 - Coaxial Cable Installation for EMC-control for K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC
SRT 1F
3-176 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
Coaxial cables with straight

connector for STM-1 signal
Coaxial cables with straight

connector for wayside traffic signal Coaxial cable inlet for
EMC-control measure
Figure 3-121 - Coaxial Cable Installation for EMC-control for K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) CC
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-177
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.7.2 EMC-control Measure at the Coaxial Cable Inlet
Figure 3-122 shows the EMC-control measure at the coaxial cable inlet of
8
SCSU block. Coaxial cables of STM-1 electrical and wayside traffic signal
are stripped off the cable jacket, bind in the cable holder, press the metal
plate with conduction rubber and lock the metal plate.
Strip off all cable jackets of Close the metal plate window
both STM-1 and wayside with conduction rubber
traffic cables at the inlet cabel
Press the metal plate window
holder (Approx. 20 mm in
with enough contact strength.
width)
Fix the metal plate window by
Bind the stripped cables to the
fixing bolts.
cable holder by strap cords
Figure 3-122 - Coaxial Cable Inlet for EMC-control Measure
SRT 1F
3-178 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.7.3 Wiring Work of Coaxial Cables
Figure 3-123 and Figure 3-124 show the coaxial cable run and wiring &
98 98
assembly.
All baseband cables are bound together at

the cable holder 1-1.
Cable length confirmation with margin on
each Baseband interface card basis.
Wiring and assembly of 1.0/2.3 straight
coaxial connector
Cable wiring to each Baseband interface
card unit and cable binding.
Cable holder 1-1

OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
SCSU
Block
Cable holder 2-1
All wayside traffic cables are bound

together at the cable holder 2-1.
Cable length confirmation with margin
on each Baseband interface card
CN-11
CN-12
CN-13
CN-14
CN-15
CN-16
CN-17
CN-34
CN-21
CN-22
CN-23
CN-24
UIA
CN-33
basis. Block
CN-32
CN-31
Wiring and assembly of 1.0/2.3

straight coaxial connector
Cable wiring to each Baseband
interface card unit and cable binding.
Figure 3-123 - Wiring works of coaxial cable for K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-179
3. INSTALLATION UMN
All baseband cables are bound together

at the cable holder 1-1.
Cable length confirmation with margin on
each Baseband interface card basis.
coaxial connector
Cable wiring to each Baseband interface
card unit and cable binding.
Cable holder 1-1
BSW INTF
OCC INTF
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
TCU-X
TCU-Y
HK1
HK2
SCSU
Block
Cable holder 2-1

All wayside traffic cables are bound
together at the cable holder 2-1.
Cable length confirmation with margin
on each Baseband interface card basis.
CN-40
CN-41
CN-42
CN-39
CN-56
CN-55
CN-54
CN-53
CN-50
CN-51
CN-52
UIA
CN-45
Block
CN-58
CN-57
coaxial connector
Cable wiring to each Baseband
interface card unit and cable binding.
Figure 3-124 - Wiring works of coaxial cable for K-shelf up to 2x(3+1)
SRT 1F
3-180 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 3. INSTALLATION
3.7.4 Precaution for Wiring Work of Coaxial Cables
For the wiring work of coaxial cables, Figure 3-125 shows good 98
installation and bad installation samples for user reference.
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU-Y
TCU-X
HK1
HK2
SCSU
Block
Good wiring work

< Easy unit removal in case of unit replacement>
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU-Y
TCU-X
HK1
HK2
SCSU
Block
Bad wiring work

< Not easy unit removal in case of unit replacement>
Figure 3-125 Precaution for Wiring Work of Coaxial Cables
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 3-181
3. INSTALLATION UMN
3.7.5 Metal Plate Installation for EMC Requirement
For the EMC requirement, metal plate is fixed in front of TCU unit part on
SCSU block shown in the following figure.
OCC INTF
BSW(M1)
BSW(M2)
BSW(M3)
BSW(M4)
BSW(M5)
BSW(M6)
BSW(M7)
TCU-Y
TCU-X
HK1
HK2
SCSU
Block
In front of TCU unit part, metal plate for

EMC requirement should be installed by
two bolts at the top and at the bottom.
Figure 3-126 Metal Plate installation for EMC requirement
SRT 1F
3-182 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP
4 ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP

Acceptance tests are generally performed after installation to check that
proper installation procedures has been followed and to check system
performances comnpliance with specifications.
In this part acceptance of SRT1F rack is described, together with details
about card settings available via HW switches and via SW commands.
IMPORTANT
THE ACCEPTANCE TEST OF SRT 1F EQUIPMENT MUST BE

CARRIED OUT BY SUITABLY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
THE SRT 1F EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED IN A

RESTRICTED ACCESS LOCATION ONLY.
FOR THE EXECUTION OF FIELD ACTIVITIES MORE DOCUMENTS

ARE AVAILABLE TO SUPPORT THE FIELD OPERATOR.
1. INSTALLATION INFORMATION
2. FIELD TEST PROTOCOLS
3. FIELD TEST PROCEDURE
PLEASE CONTACT NOKIA SIEMENS NETWORKS

REPRESENTATIVES TO REQUEST SUCH DOCUMENTATION.
4.1 Acceptance of the SRT 1F Rack

Acceptance tests are performed to ensure that proper installation
procedures detailed in Part 3 Installation have been followed.
Acceptance tests verify the following;
Proper power wiring has been provided to the rack.
Equipment shelves are free of defects or damage.
The acceptance tests generally assume;
Accurate and concise system designations and office records are
available to properly identify systems and equipment.
Any faults found and not corrected during testing are referred to the
installation group responsibility.
The test equipment required is available, properly tested and working
correctly.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 4-1
4. ACCEPTANCE AND TURN-UP UMN
4.1.1 Perform Overall Visual Inspection
1. Locate the SRT 1F rack and bay that will house the equipment.
2. Place yourself facing the rack.
3. Check that no slide-in units are installed. Remove any units that are
installed.
4. Check that the shelves are secure and free of defects or damage.
5. Check that all electrical connectors inside the shelves are properly
secured and aligned in the shelf slots.
6. Check that there are no broken, bent or mis-aligned contacts in the
connectors.
7. Check that there are no mis-aligned, dented or twisted shelves.
8. Check that there is no broken or damaged equipment
(connectors, wiring, back wired boards, etc.).
9. Check that all cabling and wiring is terminated and secured in
place.
10. Check that the wiring from the central office battery supply is
connected to the power connector on the SRT 1F rack.
11. Check that the plug from the office alarm system is connected to the
rack alarm bus connector:
SRT 1F K-SHELF VERSION
Connector Description
CN31 on UIA block of K-shelf up to 7+1 AP/CC
CN57 on UIA block of K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) ST
CN56 on UIA block of K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT
CN73 on UIA block of K-shelf up to 2x(3+1) DT
SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. VERSION

Connector Description
CN5 (1+1 Not Expandible configuration)
12. Check that the SRT 1F rack connections to the equipment outside
of the bay have been made.
13. Check that the feeder connections are properly terminated.
14. Record the inspection results
Note: Report any problems to the installation group.
SRT 1F
4-2 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
4.1.2 Check Incoming Power Supply at SRT 1F Rack
This procedure lists the steps required to check the incoming power
supply to the SRT 1F rack. Before beginning this procedure, turn on the
main power supply and check that the fuse assigned to the shelf is
inserted properly.
4.1.3 Test Equipment Required
Digital Multimeter (DMM) or equivalent.
4.1.3.1 Procedure for shelves using AMP PS connector

This procedure shall be applied for SRT 1F 1+1 N.E. version.
1. Turn off all the No-Fuse Breakers on units and shelves.
2. Unplug all the power connectors from all the units and shelves
equipped on the rack.
3. Confirm the voltage between the 48V and Battery return terminals
in the power connector. 38.4 V DC and 57.6 V DC for 48V
system.
4. If OK, continue with Step 5. If NOT OK, report the problem to the
installation group.
5. Re plug in all the power connectors.
6. Turn on all the No-Fuse Breakers on units and shelves.
Violet
Minus
Power cable 48 V
Plus
Black
AMP connector: 1-79958-2
Figure 4-1 AMP PS Connector
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 4-3
4.1.3.2 Procedure for shelves NOT using AMP PS connector

This procedure shall be applied for K-shelves and for Expansion K-shelf,
which make no use of AMP PS connector, but are powered directly via
proper power terminals at UIA block.
1. Turn off all the No-Fuse Breakers on units and shelves
2. Confirm that the voltage on the Power Supply Terminal of UIA block is
48 V nominal. Note that specification of input DC primary power is
within 36 V to 72 V including all of variation factors such as station
DC power variation, DC power cable loss and so on.
3. If OK, continue with Step 4. If NOT OK, report the problem to the
installation group.
4. Turn on all the No-Fuse Breakers on units and shelves.
SRT 1F
4-4 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
4.2 Installation of the Slide-in Units

This paragraph provides instructions to install the various units into the
SRT 1F rack.
4.2.1 Warning Messages
The following safety precautions must be observed when installing, using

or maintaining electronic equipment. These precautions ensure the safety
of all personnel and the protection of equipment.
4.2.1.1 Laser Warning
WARNING
Never look into the end of an optical cable or fiber pigtail.
PERMANENT EYE DAMAGE or BLINDNESS can occur if laser

radiation is present.
Never handle exposed fiber with bare hands or permit contact with
the body. Fiber fragments entering the skin are difficult to detect
and remove.
Figure 4-2 shows the warning labels that are attached to all laser emitting
98
and receiving units:
DANGER
Invisible laser
radiation from
connectors when
uncoupled.
AVOID DIRECT
EXPOSURE TO
BEAM.
Figure 4-2 - Laser Warning Labels
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 4-5
4.2.1.2 Electrostatic Discharge Warning
CAUTION
Many slide-in units can be damaged by electrostatic discharge during

installation, removal, storage or shipment. Such units have electrostatic
discharge (ESD) warning labels attached (see Figure 4-3) and require
98
special care in handling and storage. The following precautions must be

strictly observed:
Always wear a wrist strap connected to earth when handling slide-in units.
The wrist strap must have a minimum resistance of 250 k. Before using
the wrist strap, check for continuity, shorts and minimum resistance value.
Replace the wrist strap if it fails any of these checks.
Hold only the edge of the slide-in units. Do not touch IC leads or circuitry
on the units.
Transport or store slide-in units in the special bags the units were
originally shipped in. Always fold the open end of the bag over and secure
with tape.
Return units to Nokia Siemens Networks in special bags and original
shipping containers.
Figure 4-3 - ESD Warning Labels
SRT 1F
4-6 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
4.2.2 Slide-In Installation Procedures
This procedure assumes that:

1. The equipment rack has been installed in accordance with local
procedures.
2. The SRT 1F rack has been installed and connected according to the
procedure described in par. Connector and Connector Pin
Assignment.
3. The procedures described in par. 4, Acceptance of SRT 1F rack have
9
been performed.
This procedure is provided as a guide to equipping the SRT 1F rack.
4.2.3 Insertion and Removal of Slide-in Units
This section details the procedures to be followed for the insertion and
removal of all slide-in units.
Warning
During replacement, all slide-in units should be seated with a slow,

but firm motion.
They should not be pushed quickly into the slot.
Many critical units have longer power connector pins to minimise

power surges during unit replacement.
A slow insertion method will ensure that the slide-in units are not
damaged.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 4-7
4.2.3.1 Inserting a Slide-In Unit

1. If required, set the option switches and straps on the unit to customer
requirements. These settings are detailed in the par. 4.3 on page 4-
11.
2. Ensure the card extractor levers are fully open, then slowly press the
unit into the correct mounting slot. Carefully close the top and bottom
extractor levers with both hands, until they latch, to set the unit in the
backboard connectors.
3. The backboard connectors are keyed to accept only the card
assigned to that position. See Figure 4-4.
9
Figure 4-4 - Inserting a Slide-in Unit
Attention
Do not slam the unit into the shelf.
It may damage connectors.
SRT 1F
4-8 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
4.2.3.2 Removing a Slide-In Unit

1. Locate the slide-in unit to be removed.
2. Gently pull open the top and bottom extractor levers until the slide-in
unit is free from the rear connector (see Figure 4-5). If the unit is hard
9
to remove, gently push the card in, then raise the extractor levers.
Do not force the levers open. See Figure 4-5.
9
3. Carefully remove the slide-in unit from the mounting shelf.
Figure 4-5 - Removing a Slide-in Unit

Figure 4-6 shows a detailed description of the extraction levers.
9
Figure 4-6 - Detail of an Extractor Lever
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 4-9
4.2.3.3 Removing an Optical Unit

1. Gently pull the top and bottom extractor levers out with both hands
until the unit is pulled free from the backboard connector.
2. Slowly pull the unit until it is stopped by the card stopper located at
the bottom edge of the card.
3. Disconnect the optical fiber cords if they are connected to the unit.
An instruction label is located on the Optical Interface unit. This
label is visible when the unit is partially removed.
4. Fit the protection caps to the optical fiber connectors and on the unit
if they are not already fitted with the protection caps.
5. Lift the metal spring on the card stopper and remove the unit
completely out of the shelf. See Figure 4-7.
9
Note: Care must be taken when removing units with optical fiber cables
connected to prevent undue stress being placed on the fiber cables.
See par Optical Circuits, Fiber Optic Cables and Jumpers for optical
fiber cable handling procedures.
Figure 4-7 - Removing an Optical Unit
SRT 1F
4-10 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
4.3 Card Settings
4.3.1 MSTU Setting
MSTUs (Main Signal Transmit Units) are set and tuned at the factory and
commissioning test is carried out at factory to assure the system
performance.
There is no need to carry out any setting change or readjustment for
MSTU controls.
Nokia Siemens Networks strongly recommends not to attempt to change
or readjust settings unless the error performance degraded seriously
because of equipment deterioration.
Following information is provided for very skilled technical staffs who may
have any chances to change or re-adjust settings in some special
circumstances.
WARNING
Do not attempt to change or readjust settings of MSTU unless
seriously needed.
If needed, use the WebLT as the first priority.
In the case of single antenna reception (without SD),

remove all straps of DADE (J1 to J32 in Figure 4-9).
9
In the case of double antenna reception (with SD), remove

straps of DADE as per length difference between main and
diversity waveguide runs.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 4-11
4.3.1.1 MSTU Front Panel

Figure 4-8 shows the front panel of MSTU unit.
9
Table 4.1 shows the functions for MSTU front panel.

9
FAN
(1)
FAN PWR 70M IN (5)

(2)
REF I/O (6)
MN
ON 70M OUT (7)
POWER SD
ON/OFF
(3)
OFF
DADE (8)
TX F MON D-EQL (9)

(4)
XPIC OUT (10)

XPIC IN (11)
INCR
DECR (12) Factory use only.
ITEM No. must be 0
for normal operation.
ITEM No.
UNIT/RCI (13)
LINE
Figure 4-8 - Front Panel of MSTU Unit
SRT 1F
4-12 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Table 4.1 - Functions for MSTU Front Panel Controls

Item Item Function
No.
(1) FAN Four fans for transmitter cooling
(2) FAN PWR Power cable connector for cooling fans
(3) POWER ON/OFF DC power supply switch for MSTU unit
(4) TX LO MON Monitor terminal for TX local frequency
(5) 70M IN 70 MHz test input terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement
(6) REF I/O In/out terminal for RX local reference signal of Co-channel operation
OUT (master) or IN (slave) selection is made through the LCT.
(7) 70M OUT MN 70 MHz test output terminal for IF-IF characteristic measurement of
70M OUT SD Main/SD antenna reception
(8) DADE DADE for Main/SD antenna waveguide length difference
See Figure 4-9 and Table 4.3 for setting.
9 9
Remove all straps in case of single antenna reception (without SD).

(9) D-EQL Delay equalizer for branching network
(10) XPIC OUT XPIC output terminal for Co-channel operation
(master) Combined IF signal of Main/SD is available at this terminal
(11) XPIC IN XPIC input terminal for Co-channel operation
(slave)
(12) INCR Analog level setting for MSTU (Factory use only)
DECR
Keep ITEM No. = 0, and use LCT for maintenance.
ITEM No.
See the next page for details.
To memorize the setting,
select ITEM No. = 9, then
press INCR/DECR switches together.
(13) LED indicator Alarm/status indicator :
UNIT/RCI Normal = green(*), Unit failure = red on, RCI = red blinking
LINE Normal = green(*), Line failure = red on
* : Green for mode 2 or Yellow for mode 1 is selectable through the LCT.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 4-13
Table 4.2 shows the relationship between the position of rotary switch
9
and functions of Analog Level Setting (12).
Table 4.2 - Functions for Rotary Switch (12)

Item Item Function
No.
0 Normal operation The position for normal operation, in service state.
INCR and DECR push switches are invalid.
1 DADE for XPIC Compensates the delay time difference between the
feeders for Vertical and Horizontal polarization using
DADE (Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer) in the case
of co-channel operation.
2 DELAY-H Adjusts IF-IF group delay, high frequency component.
3 DELAY-M Adjusts IF-IF group delay, medium frequency component
4 DELAY-L Adjusts IF-IF group delay, low frequency component
5 ALC LVL Sets TX output level at ALC AUTO (ON)
6 ALC GAIN Sets TX output level at ALC MNL (OFF)
7 SD GAIN Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF
to compensate the loss of DADE line.
8 SD SLOPE Adjusts XPIC OUT slope at AGC OFF
to compensate the slope of DADE line.
9 RRF GAIN Adjusts MN/SD 70M OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF
A RIF GAIN Adjusts XPIC OUT level to -10 dBm at AGC OFF
B R SLOPE Compensates the slope of Main line.
C T SLOPE Compensates the slope of TX.
D --- Factory use only
E --- Factory use only
F FAN replacement For FAN replacement,
inhibits FAN alarm and switches TX output to LOW level.
Use the LCT for setting.
Note
Do not attempt to re-adjust.
To memorize the setting,

select ITEM No. = 9, then
press INCR/DECR switches together.
SRT 1F
4-14 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
4.3.1.2 DADE Setting for SD
The difference of waveguide length between Main and SD antenna

causes a group delay between the main and SD signals received by the
MSTU. The entity of such group delay can be calculated knowing the wg
length difference (generally equivalent to height difference between main
and diversity antenna on the tower) and the specified group delay figure
shown in wg datasheet. The following table shows the specified typical
figures for group delay of all types of premium wg used in conjunction
with SRT1F.
WG type Frequency (MHz) Group delay (ns/10m)

3300 61.8
3400 57.8
3500 54.6
3600 52.2
3700 50.2
EWP37 3800 48.6
3900 47.2
4000 46
4100 45
4200 44.2
4300 43.4
4400 42.6
4500 42
4600 41.4
EWP43 4700 41
4800 40.5
4900 40.1
5000 39.7
5200 46.4
5400 44.8
5600 43.5
EWP52 5800 42.5
6000 41.6
6200 40.8
6400 40.2
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 4-15
WG type Frequency (MHz) Group delay (ns/10m)

5850 45.2
6000 44.3
6200 43.2
EWP63 6400 42.3
6600 41.5
6800 40.8
7000 40.2
6500 44.2
6700 43.2
6900 42.3
EWP64 7100 41.6
7300 40.9
7500 40.4
7700 39.9
6500 48
6700 46.5
6900 45.3
7100 44.2
7300 43.3
EWP77 7500 42.5
7700 41.8
7900 41.2
8100 40.6
8300 40.2
8500 39.7
10700 41.5
10900 41.1
11100 40.7
EWP90
11300 40.3
11500 40
11700 39.7
12500 41.8
12700 41.4
EWP127A 12900 41
13100 40.7
13250 40.5
SRT 1F
4-16 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
The group delay caused by the difference in length between main and SD
antennas shall be compensated by DADE function of SRT1F. Automatic
(dynamic) DADE allows compensation of length difference up to 50cm
wg. The manual (static) DADE function available on MSTU front panel,
instead, allows delay compensation up to 120ns (corresponding to about
30 meters wg length difference). As a consequence, the length difference
between main wg and SD wg shall be known with 50cm tolerance, and
static DADE shall be arranged on the MSTU front panel accordingly (pin
straps from J1 to J32 in Figure 4-9).
no use
J1 J2 -
2 ns
J3 J4 -
J5 J6 -
4 ns
J7 J8 -
J9 J10 -
4 ns
J11 J12 -
J13 J14 -
10 ns
J15 J16 -
J17 J18 -
10 ns
J19 J20 -
J21 J22 -
20 ns
J23 J24 -
J25 J26 -
30 ns
J27 J28 -
J29 J30 -
40 ns
J31 J32 -
Figure 4-9 - Strap pins for SD DADE Adjustment
When 4ns SD DADE is necessary, for example, pin strap both J5-J6 and J7-J8
Are needed.
See Table 4.3 for example of SD DADE setting.

915H919H
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 4-17
Table 4.3 - DADE Setting for SD

Strap position vs delay time difference between Main and SD antenna as reference
0 ns 2 ns 4 ns 10 ns 18 ns 36 ns 110 ns
J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2 J1 J2
2 ns
J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4 J3 J4
J5 J6 J5 J6 J5 J6 J5 J6 J5 J6 J5 J6 J5 J6
4 ns
J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8 J7 J8
J9 J10 J9 J10 J9 J10 J9 J10 J9 J10 J9 J10 J9 J10
4 ns
J11 J12 J11 J12 J11 J12 J11 J12 J11 J12 J11 J12 J11 J12
J13 J14 J13 J14 J13 J14 J13 J14 J13 J14 J13 J14 J13 J14
10 ns
J15 J16 J15 J16 J15 J16 J15 J16 J15 J16 J15 J16 J15 J16
J17 J18 J17 J18 J17 J18 J17 J18 J17 J18 J17 J18 J17 J18
10 ns
J19 J20 J19 J20 J19 J20 J19 J20 J19 J20 J19 J20 J19 J20
J21 J22 J21 J22 J21 J22 J21 J22 J21 J22 J21 J22 J21 J22
20 ns
J23 J24 J23 J24 J23 J24 J23 J24 J23 J24 J23 J24 J23 J24
J25 J26 J25 J26 J25 J26 J25 J26 J25 J26 J25 J26 J25 J26
30 ns
J27 J28 J27 J28 J27 J28 J27 J28 J27 J28 J27 J28 J27 J28
J29 J30 J29 J30 J29 J30 J29 J30 J29 J30 J29 J30 J29 J30
40 ns
J31 J32 J31 J32 J31 J32 J31 J32 J31 J32 J31 J32 J31 J32
0 ns :
Keep all straps as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J5 to J7, J6 to J8 and so on.
2 ns :
Strap J1 to J2, J3 to J4, but keep others as default, J5 to J7, J6 to J8 and so on.
4 ns :
Strap J5 to J6, J7 to J8, but keep others as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J9 to J11, J10
to J12 and so on.
10 ns :
Strap J13 to J14, J15 to J16, but keep others as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4, J5 to J7, J6
to J8, J9 to J11, J10 to J12 and so on.
18 ns :
Strap J5 to J6, J7 to J8, J9 to J10, J11 to J12, J13 to J14, J15 to J16, but keep others
as default, J1 to J3, J2 to J4 and so on.
Attention : In the case of single antenna reception (without SD),

remove all straps J1 to J32.
SRT 1F
4-18 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
4.3.2 SV SNMP/IP unit Setting
Item Switch Setting Position

Buzzer Enable SW5600 Buzzer Disable (Default) OPEN
-bit1
SV
Buzzer Enable CLOSE
UNIT
LINE
MISC
ACS/SWDL
NORM
NE ALM/RCI
MAINT
CARD OUT
ACO
CALL E1
CALL E2
LAN 1
LAN 2
2W E1
CLOSE OPEN
2W E2
LED TEST
OPEN = Buzzer Disable
CLOSE = Buzzer Enable
ACO
Factory use
BZ EN (Default = Open)
Buzzer Enable
Buzz OFF (RAB)
Figure 4-10 BZ EN switch on SV SNMP/IP unit front panel
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 4-19

4W OW input level ATT C,D 0 to 31 dB (1 dB step) 12 dB
4W OW output level ATT A,B 0 to 31 dB (1 dB step) 11 dB
SW 5602 SW 5601
ATT C
ATT D
SW 5600
ATT A
ATT B
SW5601 and SW5602 ON 1 2 4 8 16
ATT C
ATT D
1 2 3 4
Factory use OFF

OFF
(Default = OFF)
ON 1 2 4 8 16
ATT A
ATT B
OFF
Figure 4-11 HW switches on SV SNMP/IP unit side
SRT 1F
4-20 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
4.3.3 TCU Unit Setting

EXT 2M CLK (X) input SW84 Balance BAL
Unbalance UNBAL
EXT 2M CLK (Y) input SW82 Balance BAL
Unbalance UNBAL
EXT 2M CLK (X) input pattern SW15-1 Bipolar HDB3 (bit/s) OFF
Return to Zero (Hz) ON
EXT 2M CLK (Y) input pattern SW15-2 Bipolar HDB3 (bit/s) OFF
T0, T4 CLK output pattern SW15-3 Bipolar HDB3 (bit/s) OFF
SSMB SEL SW15-4 Only effective for Mode-2 ON
Figure 4-12 - TCU Setting
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 4-21
4.3.4 BSW STM-1 Electrical Unit Setting

CMI input SW2A Balance (default) BAL
Unbalance UNBAL
WS output SW65 (RFCOH) 75 ohms unbalance 75
(default)
SW67 (SOH)
120 ohms balance 120
WS input SW66 (RFCOH) 75 ohms (default) 75
SW68 (SOH) 120 ohms balance 120
WS input 75 SW26 (RFCOH) Balance (default) BAL
ohm
SW29 (SOH) Unbalance UNBAL
SW69 Factory Use

(Default = Close)
CLOSE OPEN
SW2B TOP
SW2A
CN96
SW28 SW68
SW77
SW27 SW67
SW29
SW25
SW66
SW75
SW26
SW24
CN92
SW65
BSW Unit
SW24,to27
SW65 68 SW2A,25,
SW2B, 26,28
29 SW75, 77
75 BAL
(default) (default)
120 UNBAL
75 120
(default)
Figure 4-13 - BSW STM-1 Electrical Setting
SRT 1F
4-22 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
4.3.5 OCC INTF STM-1 Elecrical Unit Setting

CMI input SW29 Balance (default) BAL
Unbalance UNBAL
TOP
SW29
CN96
CN92
OCC INTF Unit
SW29
UNBAL
BAL
(default)
Figure 4-14 - OCC INTF STM-1 Setting
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 4-23
4.3.6 STM-1 BSW Optical / OCC Optical Setting
4.3.6.1 Hardware Setting BSW STM-1 Optical

SW26 (RFCOH) 75 ohm unbalance 75 (default)
WS output
SW29 (SOH) 120 ohm balance 120
SW28 (RFCOH) 75 ohm 75 (default)
WS input
SW2A (SOH) 120 ohm balance 120
WS input SW28 (RFCOH) Balance BAL (default)
for 75 ohms SW2B (SOH) Unbalance UNBAL
SW33 ALM1 8 (default)
ALM/COND Out SW25 ALM2 9 (default)
SW24 ALM3 B (default)
CONT1/2 In SW23 CONT1 / CONT2 6 (default)
ALS Mode SW22 ALS Mode Setting 0 (default)
LED mode SW55-3 On: Green, Off: Yellow OFF (default)
Mask CMI LOSS in
ON
LINE alarm/LED
LNSEL SW55-5
Include CMI LOSS in
OFF
LINE alarm/LED
Non diagnostic module
SW32-1 Mask fake alarm Mask (default)
(Note)
(Test) SW32-2,3,4 (Factory Use) OFF (default)
(Note): SW32-1 should be set to ON when using OPT module with non diagnostic
monitor function. This function is used to prevent the fake alarm.
CN19
SW2B
SW2A
SW29
(Rear)
SW28
SW27
SW55
SW26
SW24 SW25 SW33
OPT BSW unit

SW22 SW23 SW32
SW28, SW2B SW26, SW27, SW29, SW2A SW22, SW23, SW24, SW25, SW33
UNBAL BAL 75 120

(default) (default)
SW32, SW55
O 1
F 2
F
3
4
Figure 4-15 BSW Optical Setting
SRT 1F
4-24 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
4.3.6.2 Hardware Setting OCC STM-1 Optical

SW24 ALM3 B (default)
CONT1/2 In SW23 CONT1 / CONT2 6 (default)
Non diagnostic ON: mask, OFF:
SW44-3 ON (Mask) (default)
module (Note) unmask
LED mode SW44-1 ON: Green, OFF: Yellow OFF (default)
Mask CMI LOSS in LINE
ON
alarm/LED
LNSEL SW44-2
Include CMI LOSS in
OFF (default)
LINE alarm/LED
(Test) SW44-4 (Factory Use) OFF (default)
(Note): SW32-1 should be set to ON when using OPT module with non
diagnostic monitor function. This function is used to prevent the fake alarm.
Figure 4-16 OCC INTF Optical Setting
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 4-25
4.3.6.3 Switches Settings
Figure 4-17 - Switch SW22 Setting (ALS Mode)
Figure 4-18 - Switch SW23 Setting (Control)
Figure 4-19 - Switches SW24, SW25, SW33 Setting (Alarms)
SRT 1F
4-26 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
4.3.7 OPT BSW DTI / OPT OCC DTI Setting
4.3.7.1 Hardware Setting

SW13 ALM3 C (default)
CONT1/2 Input SW23 CONT1 / CONT2 A (default)
Non diagnostic ON (MASK)

SW22-1 ON: mask, OFF: unmask
module (*) (default)
Operation SW22-2 OFF: 1+1, ON: 1+0 OFF (default)
(Test) SW22-3,4 (Factory Use) OFF (default)
Mask CMI LOSS in LINE
ON
alarm/LED
LNSEL SW22-6
Include CMI LOSS in LINE
OFF (default)
alarm/LED
(Note): SW22-1 should be set to "ON" to prevent the fake alarm when OPT
module with "non diagnostic monitor function" is applied.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 4-27
4.3.7.2 Switches Settings
ALS mode Switch (SW12)

Position ALS Function
0 Disable Disable ALS
1 Enable AR mode : AR 60s
6 Enable MR/ TR mode : AR disabled
7-F Disable Disable ALS
Control Switch (SW23)

Position CONT1 CONT2
0 RCI OPTLB
1 RCI TR
2 RCI MR
3 RCI LSO
4 OPTLB TR
5 OPTLB MR
6 OPTLB LSO
7 TR MR
8 TR LSO
9 MR LSO
A XY SEL MAINT/CONT
B-F - -
SRT 1F
4-28 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Alarm/Condition Switch
(ALM1-SW25, ALM2-SW24 and ALM3-SW13)
Position Item
0 RX LOS
1 TX FAIL
2 CMI LOS
3 CMI OUT DN
4 TX HI ALM
5 TX LO ALM
6 BIAS HI ALM
7 BIAS LO ALM
8 CARD FAIL
9 LINE FAIL
A ALSO
B SUB FAIL
C XY SEL
D No alarm
E No alarm
F No Alarm
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 4-29
4.3.8 GE BSW / GE OCC Setting
4.3.8.1 Hardware Setting

Mask CMI LOSS in LINE alarm/LED ON
LNSEL SW13-2
Include CMI LOSS in LINE alarm/LED OFF (default)
Logic OR of SFP RX LOS, Ethernet When
LINK DN, WAN LINK DN and CMI IN LOSS SW33=0,2,3
ALM2 SW33
Logic OR of Ethernet LINK DN, WAN LINK
When SW33=1
DN and CMI IN LOSS
Logic OR of SFP TX Disable and RCI Set to 0 (default)
SFP RX LOS Set to 1
ALM3 SW33 Logic AND of Ether LINK OK and
Set to 2
WAN LINK OK
Remote SHTDOWN Set to 3
CONT1: LSO, CONT2: no use Set to 0
CONT1 SW32
CONT1: LSO, CONT2: RCI Set to 1 (default)
SW12
(Test) (Factory use) OFF (default)
SW13-3, 4
SRT 1F
4-30 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
4.3.9 GE MLS Setting
Table 4.4 - Hardware Setting
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 4-31
SRT 1F
4-32 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN 5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE
5 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE

Maintenance Philosophy
During normal operation, the SRT 1F microwave radio system requires no
intrusive maintenance work by maintenance personnel. The main duties
of maintenance & operation are:
Keep tidy and clean the equipment and the environment.
Observe alarm/status information and record properly.
In case of system failure, locate the fault and rectify it.
If any unit has failed, replace with a spare unit and recover the
system.
Human Machine Interface

For maintenance & operation interface, the SRT 1F provides:
LED indications on each unit.
Rack Alarm Bus (RAB) to extend alarm/status information outside the
SRT 1F equipment.
5.1 LED Indications on SV and other units (except HK)

The SV (Supervisory) unit of SCSU (Supervisory, Control and Switching
Unit) indicates the summary of alarms/status conditions. The LEDs on SV
unit are visible through the SCSU front cover.
Each unit has LEDs for local indication of the alarm/status summary. The
LEDs on each unit will be observed by removing the front cover.
Details of alarm/status shall be observed through the LCT (Local terminal)
or Centralized SV.
Alarm indications, to be displayed or not displayed, are set by Alarm
Severity of Set Alarm Attribute, Facility, Provisioning through the LCT.
Figure 5-1 and Table 5.1 show LED indications of the SV unit.
9 9
Figure 5-2 and Table 5.2 shows LED indications of other unit.
9 9
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 5-1
5. OPERATION & MAINTENANCE UMN
SV
UNIT
LINE
MISC
ACS/SWDL
NORM
NE ALM/RCI
MAINT
CARD OUT
ACO
CALL E1
CALL E2
DEBUG
LAN 1
LAN 2
SINT2
CLK
2W E1
2W E2
LED TEST
ACO
BZ EN
Figure 5-1 - Front View of MCF/Controller unit (SNMP/IP)
SRT 1F
5-2 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Table 5.1 - LED Indication of SV unit
Group LED Color Status Description

Indication UNIT/RCI Red Steady on Unit failure of SV unit
for
SV unit Blinking RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of SV unit
Green (Y) Steady on Normal operation of SV unit
Yellow (G) Blinking Configuration mismatch of SV unit
LINE Red Steady on SINT/ RSC/DCC signal failure
Green (Y) Steady on SINT/ RSC/DCC signal normal
MISC Red Steady on Housekeeping alarm (DI) on
ACS/SWDL Green (Y) Steady on NE is logged on by user
Red Steady on Mismatch of software version
Green (Y) Blinking Software download on progress
Indication NORM Green (Y) Steady on Normal operation of NE
for
NE NE ALM/RCI Red Steady on CR/MJ/MN/WR alarm of any unit in NE
Blinking RCI (Remote Card Identifier) of any unit in
NE
MAINT Yellow (G) Steady on Maintenance condition of NE
CARD OUT Red Steady on CARD OUT alarm of NE more serious than
WR
Yellow (G) Steady on CARD OUT alarm of NE not more serious
than WR
ACO Yellow (G) Steady on Alarm cut off of NE
Orderwire CALL E1 Green (Y) Blinking E1 orderwire is being called
CALL E2 Green (Y) Blinking E2 orderwire is being called
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 5-3
UNIT/RCI
LINE
Figure 5-2 - LED Indication of other units than SV (except HK)
Table 5.2 - LED Indication of other units than SV (except HK)

Unit LED Color Status Description
All units UNIT/RCI Red Steady on Unit failure of the unit
Blinking RCI (Remote Card Identifier) is operated
Green (Y) Steady on Normal operation of the unit
Yellow (G) Blinking Configuration mismatch of the unit
All units LINE Red Steady on Loss of Main, Synch or other signal
except HK
Green (Y) Steady on Line signal (working side) is normal
SRT 1F
5-4 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
5.2 Web LCT for SNMP/IP SV

Web LT is a local terminal that is the main human machine interface for
operation, maintenance, system setup and tune-up. The SRT1F Web LT is
designed as an embedded web server using HTTP (Hyper Text Transfer
Protocol) protocol and HTML (Hyper Text Markup Language) document
format on an IP (Internet Protocol) network. An operator can manage the
SRT1F NE by accessing with ordinary web browser client software.
Table below shows outline of SRT1F Web LT major function.
Table 5.3 - SRT1F Web LT Major Functions

Provisioning Sets the system configurations, usage of SOH (Section
Overhead) facilities and optional functions, and NE
parameters.
Status Control Displays alarms and conditions. Controls RPS(Radio
Protection Switching) and maintenance functions.
Performance Monitor Displays performance monitors and analogue monitors.
5.2.1 System
To use the Web LT, the PC hardware and software should meet or exceed
the requirements listed in table below.
Table 5.4 - System Requirements

Client Requirements HTTP/1.0 or later
JavaTM script *1
Cascade Style Sheet (CSS2)
Least one working Ethernet port
supporting 10/100Base-T
1024x769 XGA Display or higher
Recommended Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer *2, (For factory test
Version 6.0 or later environment)
*1 Java is a trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., and refer to Suns Java programming language.
*2 Microsoft Internet Explorer is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United State and/or other
countries.
Connect your PC to a LAN port on the SV (Supervisory) card (unit) in

SCSU (Baseband interface and Supervisory/Control,& Switching Unit)
block of the target NE (Network Element). Normally, crossover cable
should be used for the connection, if you want to connect the PC to the
NE directly. The SV card (unit) supports both 10Base-T and 100Base-T
Ethernet connection. It is recommended to use CAT5 (Category 5) UTP
(Un-shielded Twisted Pair) crossover cable for the connection. There are
two Ethernet ports on the SV card (unit), and they are connected to a
HUB internally. Therefore, you can use whichever you like better.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 5-5
SV
UNIT
LINE
MISC
ACS/SWDL
NORM
NE ALM/RCI
MAINT
CARD OUT
ACO
CALL E1
CALL E2
LAN 1
LAN 2
CAT5 UTP
Crossover cable for
connection 2W E1
2W E2
LED TEST
ACO
BZ EN
Web LT
FLEXR
Figure 5-3 - Connection between PC and NE showing LAN Ports on the SV SNMP/IP Card
SRT 1F
5-6 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
5.3 Radio Protection Switch for SV SNMP/IP

Supervise/control of Radio Protection Switch (RPS) is carried out through
the Web LT.
Logon
Enter the appropriate IP address of the desired Network Element(NE) to
be logon to open the WebLT.To open the Radio Protection Switch(RPS)
window
Control RPS & Loopback
Figure 4.2 shows the radio protection switch window.
For detailed instruction of WebLT, please refer to Instruction Manual of
WebLT for SRT1F Radio System.
USW/BSW
The Unipolar Switch (USW) is operated uni-directionally and hitless for
manual control and most of automatic switching.
The Bipolar Switch (BSW) is operated bi-directionally and accompanying
some data error. However, the BSW provides more secure isolation for
testing and special maintenance work.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 5-7
Figure 5-4 - Radio Protection Switch Window
Table 5.5 - Detailed Description of Operate RPS Window
(1) Action Lockout Inhibits any type of RPS operation (1st priority).
Force Operates the SW forciblly (2nd priority).
Manual Operates the SW manually (4th priority) .
Release Lockout Displays the AID = RPS alarm.
Release Force Displays PSAC, PSRC, PSAD, and PSRSAD.
Release Manual Clears SW PM data above.
(2) Switch BSW Selects the SW for control (Bi-directional).
USW Selects the SW for control (Uni-directional).
(3) AID W1 to W7 Work 1 channel to Work 7 channel.
OCC Occasional traffic (option).
SRT 1F
5-8 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
5.3.1 Automatic Switching and Status Indications
Line condition displays the line condition for each AID. "Request" is
displayed when the switchover request to the protection channel is
received after a line failure. The currently active protection channel is
displayed for the protection channel.
Note that nothing is displayed for channels that are not subject to the
RPS.
5.3.2 Manual Controls
The Radio Protection Switch(RPS) can be controlled manually through

the WebLT. Functions and priority order of manual controls are as
following table below.
Table 5.6 - Manual Control Priority for Radio Protection Switch
Control Priority Functions

Lockout 1st Inhibits any type of RPS operation.
Force 2nd Switches the Work CH unless the specified Work
CH or Prot CH is locked out.
(Automatic) 3rd The Work CH will be switched over to Prot CH, if
Prot CH is free and normal.
The CH switched by Manual or OCC control will be
chased out by automatic switching from Prot CH.
Manual 4th The traffic will be switched over to Prot CH, if Prot
CH is free and normal.
To operate manual control, open "Operate RPS" in Fig3.2 and make the
appropriate setting to AID, Switch and Action then click Operate.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 5-9
5.3.3 SW PM Data
Switch Performance Monitoring(SW PM) data in Performance/Current

menu shows the stability of radio propagation condition and RPS
operation.
Following items in table below will be displayed.
Table 5.7 - Data of Switch Performance Monitor for Protection Switch Operation
PSAC-B Protection Switch Actual Count BSW/USW
PSAC-U
Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch actual operation.
PSAD-B Protection Switch Actual Duration BSW/USW
PSAD-U
The number of second which contains at least one occasion of
PSAC-B/PSAC-U.
PSC Protection Switch Count
The total number of PSAC-B and PSAC-U
PSRC-B Protection Switch Request Count BSW/USW
PSRC-U
Count of automatic Radio Protection Switch initiation including
PSAC-B/U and invalid request due to WTR and persistence.
PSRSAD-B Protection Switch Request Service Affecting Duration
PSRSAD-U BSW/USW
The number of second which contains at least one occasion of
Service Affect due to automatic Radio Protection Switch
operation.
5.3.4 Notice for RPS Operations
Operations for the Radio Protection System(RPS) are very sensitive for
the traffic transmission. Following notice should be observed.
5.3.4.1 Power off of SCSU

When you turn off the non-fuse breaker on UIA block for SV and TCU
units, change the service state of RPS to OOS (Out of Service) in
advance. Otherwise, the traffic may be interrupted a while when you turn
on the power supply.
Provisioning
Service State
Enter RPS
OOS
5.3.4.2 Lockout
WTR(Wait to Restore) affects on the LOCKOUT command also.
WTR is set to 1 minute as a fixed value, the LOCKOUT command will be
effective after the time delay of 1 minute.
SRT 1F
5-10 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
5.3.4.3 Power off for MSTU

To prevent disconnection, the traffic should be switch over to protection
channel by manual operation of BSW in advance.
Control
RPS & Loopback
Operate RPS
AID, BSW, Operate Manual
Operate
Note:
BSW operation is not hitless and interrupts the traffic for a while.
If the USW is operated on the occasion, the message of USW operated
will remain during the MSTU is power off.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 5-11
5.4 Other Functions of SV SNMP/IP
5.4.1 Loop Back
The SRT1F radio is provided with the baseband loop back function.
LINE side : From baseband input to baseband output (Facility)
RADIO side: From DEM QAM module output to MOD QAM module input
(Terminal)
The loopback is carried out at the MSTU unit.

Loop back test interrupts the traffic of the channel. For safety of traffic, the
loop back transmission, loop back operation is guarded by maintenance
state. Before carrying out loop back, you must perform Change
Maintenance State to remove the in-service state from the channel.
To carry out loop back test:

Control
RPS & Loopback
Operate Loopback
Select the AID to be looped back
Select the direction LINE or RADIO
Operate (Release is to release loopback)
MSTU
MOD TX
BSW
DEM RX
LINE side RADIO side
Figure 5-5 - Loop Back Operation
SRT 1F
5-12 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
5.4.2 TCU unit Protection (MST mode only)
For the purpose of TCU unit protection(two units of X and Y are installed),
the manual switch over of working TCU is available through the WebLT.
To change the working TCU;--
Control
Clock Source
Operate TCU
Select AID to be switched
Operate Manual , Operate Forced or Operate Freeze
5.4.3 Synch Switch (MST mode only)
The synchronous source is automatically selected to the highest quality

level currently available.
The user can select the synchronous source manually if needed.
To change the synchronous source manually;--
Control
Clock Source
Operate Sync
Select EC for Equipment clock or LC for Line clock
Select Priority1/ 2/ 3/Internal/ Holdover
INT(Internal) and HO(Holdover) are not suitable for traffic transmission.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 5-13
5.5 Unit Replacement
WARNING
Unit replacement operations may affect

the traffic transmission service.
The maintenance staff must inform these operations to the

Central Maintenance & Operation Center (CMOC) in advance.
Unit replacement shall be made in accordance with the availability of hot

swap and replacement procedure.
SRT 1F
5-14 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Table 6.1 Unit Replacement Procedure and Availability of Hot Swap

Unit Availability Unit Replace Procedure
of hot
swap
MSTU No Switchover the said System to the PRT CH by BSW
switch.
Turn power switch of the said MSTU OFF.
Replace MSTU and turn power switch of MSTU
ON. Confirm the STM-1 traffic is normal.
Switchback the said System from PROT CH.
BSW/OCC INTF Yes After confirmation of not being BSW switched
OPT BSW/ Yes After confirmation of not being BSW switched
OPT OCC
OPT BSW DTI Yes After confirmation of not being BSW switched
OPT OCC DTI
GE BSW Yes After confirmation of not being BSW switched
GE OCC
GE MLM Yes
GE MLS Yes
GE ADPT Yes
BSW INTF No Confirmation of not being BSW switched in GP2.
Turn power breaker on PRT MSTU OFF.
Replace BSW INTF unit.
Turn power breaker on PRT MSTU ON.
SV No Confirmation of not being ACS/SWDL
Turn the power switch of SV OFF
Replace SV unit.
Turn power switch of the SV unit ON
TCU No Turn power switch of the said TCU OFF
Replace TCU unit
Turn power switch of the said TCU ON
HK/HKCONV No Turn power switch of SV OFF
Replace the said HK unit.
Turn power switch of SV ON
ECU No Turn power switch of SV OFF
Replace ECU unit.
Turn power switch of SV ON
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 5-15
5.5.1 Fan Replacement
An MSTU is equipped with 4 air cooling fans. These fans should be

replaced with spares when they are worn out. Table 5.8 shows the
9
relationship of FAN alarm and equipment condition.

When FAN alarm is detected, all 4 fans should be replaced with
spares at once.
Table 5.8 - FAN Alarm and Equipment Condition

Number of Fan Equipment
Working Out Alarm Condition of MSTU
4 0 No alarm Normal operation
3 1 FAN Alarm Normal operation
2 2 FAN Alarm TX output power is 10 dB down
1 3 UNIT Failure Power supply off to MSTU.
BSW operates
How to replace FANs

Turn the rotary switch on MSTU to [ F ] to switch TX output to LOW level
and inhibit Fan alarm. See Figure 5-6.
9
Pull out the FAN PWR cable.

Remove the FAN assembly. See Figure 5-6.
9
Mount a new FAN assembly and re-connect the FAN PWR cable
securely.
Turn back the rotary switch on MSTU to [ 0 ]
Check alarm/status indications on LEDs and LCT.
If normal, switch back the traffic from the protection channel.
SRT 1F
5-16 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
Turn to [ F ] to switch TX
output to LOW level and
inhibit Fan alarm
The FAN Assembly is mounted on to the MSTU by

4 long screws (1) to (4) and
4 short screws (5) to (8).
Figure 5-6 - Replacement of FAN Assembly
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 5-17
5.5.2 MSTU and Other Units
MSTU
To replace an MSTU, the traffic should be switched over to the protection
channel by forcing the BSW in advance, and by cutting off power to the
unit. The BSW operation momentarily interrupts traffic.
Units in SCSU
Replacement of any unit other than that listed below may seriously affect
traffic:
TCU in stand-by (in case of card protection of TCU-X/Y).
HK unit.
System Setting Data

System setting data for each unit is registered in the SV unit of SCSU.
When a unit is replaced with spares, the system setting data will be
automatically transferred from the SV unit. There is no setting change
after unit replacement.
After unit replacement:
Turn on power supply and wait at least 10 minutes to complete the
system setting data download.
Check LED indication on SRT 1F equipment.
Check Alarm/status indication of Status/Control menu on the LCT.
Check Analog Monitoring of Status/Control menu on the LCT.
Check the applicable system setting of Provisioning menu on the LCT.
Check Service State is In Service of Provisioning menu on the LCT.
Leave equipment for stability check at least 30 minutes.
Check Error Performance history by Display PM of Status/Control
menu on the LCT.
Compare the above data with other channels.
Minimize setting change and re-adjustment of the replaced unit unless
performance does not meet the long term specification. If setting
change and re-adjustment is required, follow the instructions stated in
par. Acceptance and Turn up of this manual.
Removal of SCSU Protection Metal Plate

Remove the metal plate by two fixing bolts before unit replacement
Fix the metal plate by two fixing bolts after replacement
SRT 1F
5-18 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
5.5.3 SV SNMP/IP unit Replacement
The system setting data (provisioning setting data) is stored in the inner
memory on the main PCB, therefore the data should be registered to the
spare SV unit. There are two types of data uploading, one is by using
application software HOTTOOL3, the other is manual. For detailed
HOTTOOL3 information, please refer to Operating Manual.
To replace the SV unit with a spare;--
In case of HOTTOOL3 software
System setting data is downloading from failed SV unit to SRT1F WebLT
that is already installed the application software HOTTOOL3. For
details, refer to the instruction manual of HOTTOOL3.
Check the RPS is in normal condition (no protection switch operation).
Check the ASC/SWDL LED being off (no one access the NE)
Change the Service State of RPS from IS (In-Service) to OOS (Out-of-
Service).
Provisioning
Service State
Enter RPS
Select AID
State: OOS
Turn off the circuit breaker of SV on SCSU block and remove the failed
SV unit.
Set switch SW5600-bit2 and SW5602-bit2 on spare SV unit to ON
(default value)
Mount the spare SV unit on the SCSU block and turn on the circuit
breaker SV on the SCSU block.
Wait a minute for SV unit startup.
Set IP address of WebLT to 192.168.0.xx (xx: except 10) and set IP
address of spare SV unit to 192.168.0.10.
Using HOTTOOL3 software, system setting data is uploaded WebLT to
spare SV unit.
Set operation IP address to the spare SV unit.
Turn off the circuit breaker SV on SCSU block and remove the spare SV
unit.
Set switch SW5600-bit2 and SW5602-bit2 on spare SV unit to OFF
(operation mode)
Set IP address of WebLT to normal state.
Change the Service State of RPS from OOS to IS.
Provisioning
Service State
Enter RPS
Select AID
State: IS
Check the RPS operations. If the failure of SV unit extended to the RPS
total operation, you must check all functions related.
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 5-19
In case of Manual Uploading

Check the RPS is in normal condition (no protection switch operation).
Check the ASC/SWDL LED being off (no one access the NE)
Change the Service State of RPS from IS (In-Service) to OOS (Out-of-
Service).
Provisioning
Service State
Enter RPS
Select AID
State: OOS
Turn off the circuit breaker of SV on SCSU block and remove the failed
SV unit.
Set switch SW5600-bit2 and SW5602-bit2 on spare SV unit to ON
(default value)
Mount the spare SV unit on the SCSU block and turn on the non-fuse
breaker SV on the SCSU block.
Wait a minute for SV unit startup.
Set IP address of WebLT to 192.168.0.xx (xx: except 10) and set IP
address of spare SV unit to 192.168.0.10.
Set SW5602-bit2 of spare SV unit to OFF.
Using provisioning setting table provided by the Contractor, each system
setting data is set manually one by one. For provisioning setting
procedure, please refer to the instruction manual of SRT1F WebLT.
Set operation IP address to the spare SV unit.
Turn off the circuit breaker of SV on SCSU block and remove the spare
SV unit.
Set switch SW5600-bit2 on spare SV unit to OFF (operation mode).
Set IP address of WebLT to normal state.
Change the Service State of RPS from OOS to IS.
Provisioning
Service State
Enter RPS
Select AID
State: IS
Check the RPS operations. If the failure of SV unit extended to the RPS
total operation, you must check all functions related.
Figure 6.2 shows the SW5602 position.
SRT 1F
5-20 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
WARNING
This unit contains devices that may be damaged by Electrostatic

Discharge (ESD).
Observe all precautions relating to the safe handling of ESD

sensitive equipment.
SW 5602 SW 5601
ATT C
ATT D
SW 5600
ATT A
ATT B
Figure 5-7 - Switch SW5600 and SW5602 position
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 5-21
5.5.4 Returning Replaced Unit
Units for SRT 1F equipment are manufactured based on high density

assembling and require special tools, jigs and measurement equipment
for repair. Faulty unit should be returned to the manufacturer for repair.
For quick and adequate repair work, the following information must be
stated on the unit.
Unit name
Serial No.
Station name
Facing station name
Frequency band
Channel No.
System configuration
Date and time alarm/abnormality detected
Date and time the unit replaced
Detailed description of alarm/abnormality
Alarm/status log of the local station and associated stations
Error performance log of the local station and associated stations
Detailed description after unit replacement
The user shall use Nokia Siemens Networks report form. For detailed
information about repair service, please contact Nokia Siemens Networks
staff.
SRT 1F
5-22 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN A. APPENDIX
A APPENDIX
A.1 Abbreviation of Terms
Table A.1- Abbreviation of Terms

Abbreviation Description
A
A/D Analog to Digital converter
ACO Alarm Cut Off
ACTAGC Act Automatic Gain Control of Receiver
ACTALS Act Automatic Laser Shut down
ACTCW Act Carrier Wave mode
ADD Address
ADM Add Drop Multiplexer
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AID Access Identification
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
AIS REC Alarm Indication Signal Receiving
ALC Automatic Level Control
ALM Alarm
ALSMAN Automatic Laser Shut down released by Manual restart
ALSTST Automatic Laser Shut down released by Test restart
AMP Amplifier
ANS Answer
ANT Antenna
APS Automatic Protection Switch
ASCII American Standard Cord for Information Interchange
ATPC Automatic Transmitter Power Control
ATT Attenuator
AU 4 Administrative Unit 4
AUD NE ALM Audible Network Element Alarm
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 A-1
A. APPENDIX UMN
Table A1 - Abbreviation of Terms (continued)

B
B/S Bit per Second
BAL Balance
BB Base Band signal
BBC Base Band Control
BBE Background Block Error
BEF Band Eliminate Filter
BER Bit Error Ratio
BIP Bit Interleave Parity check
BPF Band Pass Filter
BR NTWK Branching Network(Radio frequency band)
BRU Branching Network Unit
BSI Bit Sequence Independence
BSW Bipolar Switch
BWB Back Wired Board
C
C/I Carrier to Interference ratio
CIR Circulator
CK Clock
CLK Clock
CMB Channel management Bus
CMI Code Mark Inversion
CN Connector
CNCT Connect
CODIRE Co-directional interface
CONTRA Contra-directional interface
CPU Central Processor Unit
CR Critical Alarm
CSESP Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds Protection Occurred
SRT 1F
A-2 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN A. APPENDIX

D
D/A Digital to Analog converter
DADE Differential Absolute Delay Equalizer
DCC Digital Communication Channel
DEF Decision Feedback
DEM Demodulator
DI Data Input
DMM Digital Multi-Meter
DO Data Output
DSC Digital Service Channel
DT Double Terminal
DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
DUP Duplexer
E
EC Equipment Clock
ECU Embedded Channel Unit/ Embedded Communication Unit/
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EPS Endless Phase Shifter
EQL Equalizer
ES Errored Second
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ETSI European Telecommunication Standard Institute
F
F LOSS Frame Loss
FEBE Far End Block Error
FEC Forward Error Correction
FEFR Far End Receive Failure
FESP Fifteen minute Error Seconds Performance
FET Field Effect Transistor
FG Frame Ground
FIL Filter
FLR Failure
FMSR Frequency Measurement
FRCDSW Switch is in Forced Switching mode
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 A-3
A. APPENDIX UMN

G
G Ground
GAAS Gallium Arsenide
GE ML Gigabit Ethernet Multi-Link
GNE Gateway Network Element
GUI Graphical User Interface
GP1 Group 1
GP2 Group 2
H
H Horizontal
HDB3 High Density Bipolar 3
HEMT High Electron Mobility Transistor
HK Housekeeping
HL Higher Layer
HL CPU Higher Layer Central Processor Unit
HPA High Power Amplifier
HYB Hybrid circuit
I
ICH In-phase Channel
ID Identification
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IF Intermediate Frequency
INI Initiator
INTF Interface
IS In Service
ITU International Telecommunication Union
SRT 1F
A-4 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN A. APPENDIX

L
LAPD Link Application Procedure D channel
LBOL Laser Bias current is too High.
LC Line Clock
L6G Lower 6 GHz band
LED Light Emitting Diode
LL CPU Lower Layer Central Processor Unit
LNA Low Noise Amplifier
LO Local
LO MON Local Monitor
LOF Loss Of Frame
LOP Loss Of Pointer
LOS Loss Of Signal
LPF Low Pass Filter
LSI Large Scale Integrated circuit
LTE Line Terminal Equipment
LVL Level
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 A-5
A. APPENDIX UMN

M
MAINT Maintenance
MANSW Manual Switch
MC Maintenance Center
MID Minimum Dispersion combiner
MISC Miscellaneous
MIX Mixer
MJ Major alarm
MLCM Multi Level Code Modulation
MN Minor alarm
MN ANT Main Antenna
MOD Modulator
MPU Micro-Processor Unit
MS Multiplex Section
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MSTU Main Signal Transmission Unit
MUX Multiplexer
N
NA Not Applicable
NC Not Connection
NE Network Element
N.E. Not Expandible
NEND Near END
NFB No Fuse Breaker
NLP Network Layer Protocol
NMS Network Management System
NORM Normal
NSA Non Service Affect
NWC Network Center
SRT 1F
A-6 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN A. APPENDIX

O
OCC Occasional
OFS Out of Frame Second
OOS Out Of Service
OP AMP Operational Amplifier
OPD Degradation in Optical Power transmitted
OPOR Optical Power transmitted is Out of Range.
OPT Optical
OS Operation Software
OSC Oscillator
OSI Open Systems Interconnection
OSSI Operation Support System Interface
OW TEL Orderwire Telephone
P
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PCM Pulse Code Multiplex
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
PI Photo coupler Interface
PJCH Pointer Justification Count High
PJCL Pointer Justification Count Low
PJCS Pointer Justification Count SEcond
PLL Phase Lock Loop
PLO Phase Lock Loop controlled Oscillator
PM Performance Monitor
PM DATA Performance Monitor Data
PPM Percent Per Million
PSC Protection Switching Second
PSFAIL Power Supply Failure
PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit
PWR Power
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 A-7
A. APPENDIX UMN

Q
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QCH Quadrature Channel
R
R CLK Receive Clock
RAB Rack Alarm Bus
RADRM Radio Route ID Mismatch
RAM Random Access Memory
RCI Remote Card Identification
RCK Receive Clock
RCLK Receive Clock
RAI Remote Alarm Indication
RCI Remote Card Identifier
RCV Receive
RD Receive Data
RDP Receiver Data Processing
RF Radio Frequency
RFCOH Radio Frame Complementary Over Head byte
RL Relay
RL-1 Receiving Level-1
RL-2 Receiving Level-2
RL-M Receiving Level of Main receiver
RL-SD Receiving Level of SD receiver
RLTS Received Level Threshold Second
RMVD Required unit is missing
RPS Radio Protection Switching
RRF Receiver Radio Frequency section
RS Regenerative Section
RSL Receive Signal Level
RST Reset
RUC Radio service Channel
RX Receiver
RX-LOS Loss of Signal in RX
RXLCINT RX Local Internal Clock
SRT 1F
A-8 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN A. APPENDIX

S
S CLK Send Clock
SA Service Affect
SC Service Channel
SCSU Switching Control, Supervision Unit
SD Space Diversity
SD-RCV-DN SD Receiver Down
SDH Synchronous Digital hierarchy
SEMF Synchronous Equipment Management Function
SES Severely Errored Second
SEV Severely Errored Threshold
SG Signal Ground
SIU Slide In Unit
SLP EQL Slope Equalizer
SR Shift Register
SS BIT Synchronous State Bit
SSMB Synchronous State Message Byte
SSU Synchronous Source Unit
STD Standard
STM-1 Synchronous Transfer Module level 1
SUE-RP Unavailable State Entered (RP)
SV Supervision/Supervisory
SVC Switched Virtual Circuit
SW Switch
SWDL Software Down Load
SWTOHO Synchronization reference is in Holdover state
SWTOINT Internal source signal is used for Synchronization
SYNC Synchronization
SYNSW Synchronization Switch
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 A-9
A. APPENDIX UMN

Abbreviation Abbreviation
T
TARP TID Address Resolution Protocol
TCA-OFS Threshold Crossing Alert-
TCA-RLTS Threshold Crossing Alert- RX Level Threshold
TCA-RP Threshold Crossing Alert-
TCA-TLTS Threshold Crossing Alert-TX Level Threshold
TCK Transmit Clock
TCLK Transmit Clock
TCU Timing Control Unit
TD Transmit Data
TD N Transmit Data Negative
TD P Transmit Data Positive
TDP Transmitter Data Processing
TEL Telephone
TESP Twenty four Hour Error Seconds
TID Target Identification
TIF Transmitter IF section
TL Transmitter output Level
TL 1 Transaction Language 1
TLTS Transmitted output Level Threshold Second
TRF Transmitter RF section
TVE Transversal Equalizer
TX Transmitter
TX-FLR Transmitter Failure
U
U6G Upper 6 GHz
U8G Upper 8 GHz
UAS Un-available Second / Un-available State
UC Users service Channel
UCH Users service Channel
UL User Level Layer
USW Unipolar Switch
UAF Un-Availability Filter
SRT 1F
A-10 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN A. APPENDIX

V
VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator
VF Voice Frequency
VIS NE ALM Visual Network Element Alarm
W
WKSWP Working unit Switched to Protection
WR Warning
WS Wayside Signal
WTR Wait To Restore
X
XPIC Cross Polarization Interference Canceller
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 A-11
A. APPENDIX UMN
A.2 Unit part numbers
Table A.2.1 Base Band Unit
Description Code
MCF CONTROLLER UNIT SNMP/IP SINGLE RPS 634-002/04 TA22779-B40X
MCF CONTROLLER UNIT SNMP/IP DOUBLE RPS 634-002/05 TA22779-B30X
BASE BAND BIPOLAR SWITCH FOR ELECTRICAL INTERFACE 612-614/09 TA21491-B60X
BSW OPTICAL 1+0 612-614/09D TA21460-B84X
BSW INTERFACE FOR RPS2 614-105/31 TA21571-B80X
BSW OPTICAL 1+1 DTI 612-614/19 TA22049-B10X
PS PROT UNIT FOR BSW DTI 614-105/30 TA22049-B12X
TIMING SOURCE UNIT 607-013/31 TA21491-B70X
RST SUBMODULE 614-105/41 TA22020-C60X
BSW GBE 1+0 1xSTM-1 612-614/17 TA21571-B40X
GE ML Master - -
GE ML Slave - -
GE ML Adapter - -
GE ML Adapter for OCC slot - -
OCCASIONAL TRAFFIC TRIBUTARY INTERFACE ELECTRICAL 612-614/10 TA21491-C80X
OCC OPTICAL 1+0 612-614/10D TA21460-B92X
OCC OPTICAL 1+1 DTI 612-614/20 TA22049-B11X
OCC GBE 1+0 1xSTM-1 612-614/18 TA21571-B41X
HOUSEKEEPING UNIT SNMP/IP 614-105/33 TA21377-B50X
HK SNMP + 120/75 OHM 614-105/36 TA22085-B20X
DCCM MANAGEMENT UNIT SNMP/IP 612-614/22 TA21246-B10X
DG CHANNEL INTERFACE SNMP/IP 530-003/84 TA21245-B90X
VF CHANNEL INTERFACE SNMP/IP 530-003/83 TA21245-B80X
V.11 RUC FOR SNMP/IP 530-003/85 TA22049-B50X
RACK ALARM BUS MODULE SNMP/IP 614-105/40 TA21571-C30X
OWBR SNMP 614-105/34 TA21377-B10X
AUX/LAN CONVERTER 612-614/30 TA21377-B20X
SRT 1F
A-12 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN A. APPENDIX
Table A.2.2 MSTU
BAND POWER XPIC DESCRIPTION CODE

4G(64QAM) without MSTU-2 4G WOXPIC HP 64QAM LOWER 602-016/01 TA02017-B791
XPIC
+32dBm MSTU-2 4G WOXPIC HP 64QAM UPPER 602-016/02 TA02017-B792
with MSTU-2 4G WXPIC HP 64QAM LOWER 602-016/03 TA02017-B793
XPIC
MSTU-2 4G WXPIC HP 64QAM UPPER 602-016/04 TA02017-B794
without MSTU-2 4G WOXPIC NP 64QAM LOWER 602-016/05 TA02017-B795
XPIC
+29dBm MSTU-2 4G WOXPIC NP 64QAM UPPER 602-016/06 TA02017-B796
with MSTU-2 4G WXPIC NP 64QAM LOWER 602-016/07 TA02017-B797
XPIC
MSTU-2 4G WXPIC NP 64QAM UPPER 602-016/08 TA02017-B798
U4G without MSTU-2 4G WOXPIC HP 128QAM LOWER 602-016/11 TA02017-B801
XPIC
(128QAM) +32dBm MSTU-2 4G WOXPIC HP 128QAM UPPER 602-016/12 TA02017-B802
with MSTU-2 4G WXPIC HP 128QAM LOWER 602-016/13 TA02017-B803
XPIC
MSTU-2 4G WXPIC HP 128QAM UPPER 602-016/14 TA02017-B804
without MSTU-2 4G WOXPIC NP 128QAM LOWER 602-016/15 TA02017-B805
XPIC
+29dBm MSTU-2 4G WOXPIC NP 128QAM UPPER 602-016/16 TA02017-B806
with MSTU-2 4G WXPIC NP 128QAM LOWER 602-016/17 TA02017-B807
XPIC
MSTU-2 4G WXPIC NP 128QAM UPPER 602-016/18 TA02017-B808
5G(64QAM) without MSTU-2 5G WOXPIC HP LOWER 602-016/21 TA02017-B811
XPIC
+32dBm MSTU-2 5G WOXPIC HP UPPER 602-016/22 TA02017-B812
with MSTU-2 5G WXPIC HP LOWER 602-016/23 TA02017-B813
XPIC
MSTU-2 5G WXPIC HP UPPER 602-016/24 TA02017-B814
without MSTU-2 5G WOXPIC NP LOWER 602-016/25 TA02017-B815
XPIC
+29dBm MSTU-2 5G WOXPIC NP UPPER 602-016/26 TA02017-B816
with MSTU-2 5G WXPIC NP LOWER 602-016/27 TA02017-B817
XPIC
MSTU-2 5G WXPIC NP UPPER 602-016/28 TA02017-B818
L6G without MSTU-2 L6G WOXPIC HP LOWER 602-016/31 TA02017-B821
XPIC
(128QAM) +32dBm MSTU-2 L6G WOXPIC HP UPPER 602-016/32 TA02017-B822
with MSTU-2 L6G WXPIC HP LOWER 602-016/33 TA02017-B823
XPIC
MSTU-2 L6G WXPIC HP UPPER 602-016/34 TA02017-B824
without MSTU-2 L6G WOXPIC NP LOWER 602-016/35 TA02017-B825
XPIC
+29dBm MSTU-2 L6G WOXPIC NP UPPER 602-016/36 TA02017-B826
with MSTU-2 L6G WXPIC NP LOWER 602-016/37 TA02017-B827
XPIC
MSTU-2 L6G WXPIC NP UPPER 602-016/38 TA02017-B828
continue
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 A-13
A. APPENDIX UMN
Table A.2.2 - MSTU (continued)

U6G MSTU-2 U6G WOXPIC HP LOWER 602-016/41 TA02017-B831
(64QAM) without MSTU-2 U6G WOXPIC HP UPPER 602-016/42 TA02017-B832
XPIC
MSTU-2 U6G INTERLEAVED WOXPIC HP LOWER 602-016/41A TA02046-B071
+32dBm MSTU-2 U6G INTERLEAVED WOXPIC HP UPPER 602-016/42A TA02046-B072
MSTU-2 U6G WXPIC HP LOWER 602-016/43 TA02017-B833
with MSTU-2 U6G WXPIC HP UPPER 602-016/44 TA02017-B834
XPIC
MSTU-2 U6G INTERLEAVED WXPIC HP LOWER 602-016/43A TA02046-B073
MSTU-2 U6G INTERLEAVED WXPIC HP UPPER 602-016/44A TA02046-B074
MSTU-2 U6G WOXPIC NP LOWER 602-016/45 TA02017-B835
without MSTU-2 U6G WOXPIC NP UPPER 602-016/46 TA02017-B836
XPIC
MSTU-2 U6G INTERLEAVED WOXPIC NP LOWER 602-016/45A TA02046-B075
+29dBm MSTU-2 U6G INTERLEAVED WOXPIC NP UPPER 602-016/46A TA02046-B076
MSTU-2 U6G WXPIC NP LOWER 602-016/47 TA02017-B837
with MSTU-2 U6G WXPIC NP UPPER 602-016/48 TA02017-B838
XPIC
MSTU-2 U6G INTERLEAVED WXPIC NP LOWER 602-016/47A TA02046-B077
MSTU-2 U6G INTERLEAVED WXPIC NP UPPER 602-016/48A TA02046-B078
L7G MSTU-2 L7G WOXPIC HP LOWER 602-016/51 TA02017-B841
(128QAM) MSTU-2 L7G WOXPIC HP UPPER 602-016/52 TA02017-B842
without MSTU-2 L7G WOXPIC HP Annex 3 7.1-7.2 602-016/51A TA02034-B335
XPIC
MSTU-2 L7G WOXPIC HP Annex 3 7.3-7.4 602-016/52A TA02034-B336
MSTU-2 L7G WOXPIC HP 3-7-11-15-19 set LOWER 602-016/51B TA02022-B071
+32dBm MSTU-2 L7G WOXPIC HP 3-7-11-15-19 set UPPER 602-016/52B TA02022-B072
MSTU-2 L7G WXPIC HP LOWER 602-016/53 TA02017-B843
with MSTU-2 L7G WXPIC HP Annex 3 7.1-7.2 602-016/53A TA02034-B331
XPIC
MSTU-2 L7G WXPIC HP Annex 3 7.3-7.4 602-016/54A TA02034-B332
MSTU-2 L7G WXPIC HP 3-7-11-15-19 set LOWER 602-016/53B TA02022-B073
MSTU-2 L7G WXPIC HP 3-7-11-15-19 set UPPER 602-016/54B TA02022-B074
MSTU-2 L7G WOXPIC NP LOWER 602-016/55 TA02017-B845
without MSTU-2 L7G WOXPIC NP UPPER 602-016/56 TA02017-B846
XPIC
MSTU-2 L7G WOXPIC NP 3-7-11-15-19 set LOWER 602-016/55B TA02022-B075
+29dBm MSTU-2 L7G WOXPIC NP 3-7-11-15-19 set UPPER 602-016/56B TA02022-B076
MSTU-2 L7G WXPIC NP LOWER 602-016/57 TA02017-B847
with MSTU-2 L7G WXPIC NP UPPER 602-016/58 TA02017-B848
XPIC
MSTU-2 L7G WXPIC NP 3-7-11-15-19 set LOWER 602-016/57B TA02022-B077
MSTU-2 L7G WXPIC NP 3-7-11-15-19 set UPPER 602-016/58B TA02022-B078
continue
SRT 1F
A-14 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN A. APPENDIX

U7G MSTU-2 U7G WOXPIC HP LOWER 602-016/61 TA02017-B851
(128QAM) MSTU-2 U7G WOXPIC HP UPPER 602-016/62 TA02017-B852
without MSTU-2 U7G WOXPIC HP Annex 3 7.6-7.7 602-016/61A TA02034-B337
XPIC
MSTU-2 U7G WOXPIC HP Annex 3 7.4-7.5 602-016/62A TA02034-B338
MSTU-2 U7G WOXPIC HP 3-7-11-15-19 set LOWER 602-016/61B TA02022-B079
+32dBm MSTU-2 U7G WOXPIC HP 3-7-11-15-19 set UPPER 602-016/62B TA02022-B080
MSTU-2 U7G WXPIC HP LOWER 602-016/63 TA02017-B853
MSTU-2 U7G WXPIC HP UPPER 602-016/64 TA02017-B854
with MSTU-2 U7G WXPIC HP Annex 3 7.6-7.7 602-016/63A TA02034-B333
XPIC
MSTU-2 U7G WXPIC HP Annex 3 7.4-7.5 602-016/64A TA02034-B334
MSTU-2 U7G WXPIC HP 3-7-11-15-19 set LOWER 602-016/63B TA02022-B081
MSTU-2 U7G WXPIC HP 3-7-11-15-19 set UPPER 602-016/64B TA02022-B082
MSTU-2 U7G WOXPIC NP LOWER 602-016/65 TA02017-B855
without MSTU-2 U7G WOXPIC NP UPPER 602-016/66 TA02017-B856
XPIC
MSTU-2 U7G WOXPIC NP 3-7-11-15-19 set LOWER 602-016/65B TA02022-B083
+29dBm MSTU-2 U7G WOXPIC NP 3-7-11-15-19 set UPPER 602-016/66B TA02022-B084
MSTU-2 U7G WXPIC NP LOWER 602-016/67 TA02017-B857
with MSTU-2 U7G WXPIC NP UPPER 602-016/68 TA02017-B858
XPIC
MSTU-2 U7G WXPIC NP 3-7-11-15-19 set LOWER 602-016/67B TA02022-B085
MSTU-2 U7G WXPIC NP 3-7-11-15-19 set UPPER 602-016/68B TA02022-B086
L8G MSTU-2 L8G WOXPIC HP LOWER 602-016/71 TA02017-B861
(128QAM) without MSTU-2 L8G WOXPIC HP OIRT LOWER 602-016/71A TA02043-B471
XPIC
MSTU-2 L8G WOXPIC HP UPPER 602-016/72 TA02017-B862
+32dBm MSTU-2 L8G WOXPIC HP OIRT UPPER 602-016/72A TA02043-B472
MSTU-2 L8G WXPIC HP LOWER 602-016/73 TA02017-B863
with MSTU-2 L8G WXPIC HP OIRT LOWER 602-016/73A TA02043-B473
XPIC
MSTU-2 L8G WXPIC HP OIRT UPPER 602-016/74A TA02043-B474
MSTU-2 L8G WOXPIC NP LOWER 602-016/75 TA02017-B865
without MSTU-2 L8G WOXPIC NP OIRT LOWER 602-016/75A TA02043-B475
XPIC
MSTU-2 L8G WOXPIC NP UPPER 602-016/76 TA02017-B866
+29dBm MSTU-2 L8G WOXPIC NP OIRT UPPER 602-016/76A TA02043-B476
MSTU-2 L8G WXPIC NP LOWER 602-016/77 TA02017-B867
with MSTU-2 L8G WXPIC NP OIRT LOWER 602-016/77A TA02043-B477
XPIC
MSTU-2 L8G WXPIC NP UPPER 602-016/78 TA02017-B868
MSTU-2 L8G WXPIC NP OIRT UPPER 602-016/78A TA02043-B478
continue
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 A-15
A. APPENDIX UMN

11G(64QAM) MSTU-2 11G WOXPIC TX:LL/RX:UL 602-016/81 TA02017-B871
without MSTU-2 11G WOXPIC Annex-2 TX:LL/RX:UL 602-016/81A TA02017-B881
XPIC L
MSTU-2 11G WOXPIC TX:UL/RX:LL 602-016/83 TA02017-B873
MSTU-2 11G WOXPIC Annex-2 TX:UL/RX:LL 602-016/83A TA02017-B883
MSTU-2 11G WOXPIC TX:LH/RX:UH 602-016/82 TA02017-B872
without MSTU-2 11G WOXPIC Annex-2 TX:LH/RX:UH 602-016/82A TA02017-B882
XPIC H
MSTU-2 11G WOXPIC TX:UH/RX:LH 602-016/84 TA02017-B874
+29dBm MSTU-2 11G WOXPIC Annex-2 TX:UH/RX:LH 602-016/84A TA02017-B884
MSTU-2 11G WXPIC TX:LL/RX:UL 602-016/85 TA02017-B875
with MSTU-2 11G WXPIC Annex-2 TX:LL/RX:UL 602-016/85A TA02017-B885
XPIC L
MSTU-2 11G WXPIC TX:UL/RX:LL 602-016/87 TA02017-B877
MSTU-2 11G WXPIC Annex-2 TX:UL/RX:LL 602-016/87A TA02017-B887
MSTU-2 11G WXPIC TX:LH/RX:UH 602-016/86 TA02017-B876
with MSTU-2 11G WXPIC Annex-2 TX:LH/RX:UH 602-016/86A TA02017-B886
XPIC H
MSTU-2 11G WXPIC TX:UH/RX:LH 602-016/88 TA02017-B878
MSTU-2 11G WXPIC Annex-2 TX:UH/RX:LH 602-016/88A TA02017-B888
13G without MSTU-2 13G WOXPIC TX:LL/RX:UL 602-016/91 TA02017-B891
XPIC L
(128QAM) MSTU-2 13G WOXPIC TX:UL/RX:LL 602-016/93 TA02017-B893
without MSTU-2 13G WOXPIC TX:LH/RX:UH 602-016/92 TA02017-B892
XPIC H
+27dBm MSTU-2 13G WOXPIC TX:UH/RX:LH 602-016/94 TA02017-B894
with MSTU-2 13G WXPIC TX:LL/RX:UL 602-016/95 TA02017-B895
XPIC L
MSTU-2 13G WXPIC TX:UL/RX:LL 602-016/97 TA02017-B897
with MSTU-2 13G WXPIC TX:LH/RX:UH 602-016/96 TA02017-B896
XPIC H
MSTU-2 13G WXPIC TX:UH/RX:LH 602-016/98 TA02017-B898
SRT 1F
A-16 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN A. APPENDIX
Table A.2.3 Delay Equalizers for 128 QAM MSTU
Description Code
Delay EQL for no adjacent channel (DLEQ-1504) 621-009/01B CA53140-0330
Delay EQL for both adjacent channels (DLEQ-1234) 621-009/02 CA53140-0263
Delay EQL for upper side adjacent channel (DLEQ- 621-009/03 CA53140-0264
1235)
Delay EQL for lower side adjacent channel (DLEQ-1236) 621-009/04 CA53140-0265
Table A.2.4 - Accessories
Code Description
443-015/07 1XSTM-1 OPTICAL MODULE SFP (S-1.1)
443-015/08 1XSTM-1 OPTICAL MODULE SFP (L-1.1)
634-901/08 TELEPHONE HANDSET
314-332/98 XPIC CABLE KIT SIEM. CONN. (1.0/2.3)
314-333/04 XPIC CABLE KIT 27CP - SIEM.CONN. HYBRID
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 A-17
A. APPENDIX UMN
A.3 Installation material part numbers
Table A.3.1 Equipment WaveGuide connection

(solution with Flex-Twist)
FLEX-TWIST TWIST FLEXIBLE

FREQUENCY
P/N ATTENUATION LENGHT FLANGE LENGHT FLANGE LENGHT Rmin Rmin
BAND (dB) (mm) (mm) (mm) P.E. P.H.
(GHz) (mm) (mm)
4
(3,6 4,2)
504-657/51 0,18 1050 UDR-UDR40 150 UDR-UDR40 900 50 80
4U
(3,8 4,2)
5
504-657/53 0,19 1050 UDR-UDR48 150 UDR-UDR48 900 50 60
(4,4 5,0)
6L
(5,925 6,425)
6U
(6,430 7,120)
504-657/55 0,20 980 UDR-UDR70 80 UDR-UDR70 900 30 50
7L
(7,125 7,425)
7U
(7,425 7,725)
8L
504-657/57 0,25 980 UDR-UDR84 80 UDR-UDR84 900 25 42
(7,725 8,275)
11
504-657/58 0,30 960 UDR-UDR100 60 UDR-UDR100 900 22 38
(10,7 11,7)
13
504-657/61 0,40 960 UDR-UDR 20 60 UDR-UDR120 900 18 34
(12,75 13,25)
SRT 1F
A-18 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN A. APPENDIX
Table A.3.2 RACK INSTALLATION MATERIALS (K-Shelf)

(31111.00940K)
P/N DESCRIPTION UNIT Q.TY
203-360/04 Screw M8 for fixing rack NR 4

223-009/16 Cable Tie NR 40
131-011/01 PVC Adhesive Tape NR 1
Used for : - VARIOUS utilisation
215-031/07 Cable-Lug 16mm NR 1

204-366/10D Screw for Cable-Lug Fixing NR 1
103-037/50 1x16mm Cable (YE-GR) M 2
165-011/38 Flying Terminal (multi-directional clamp) NR 1
Used for : - N3 RACK GROUNDING Connection
103-037/34 1x10 mm Cable (Black) M 20

103-037/35 1x10 mm Cable (Blue) M 20
215-031/18 Ring Terminal 10mm M.8 NR 4
Used for : POWER SUPPLY for SCSU Connection
422-062/86 Sub-D 15 Pin Connector NR 2

422-030/87 Metallic Shell for Sub-D 15 pin Connector NR 2
106-001/61 8x2x0.4 Double Shielded Cable M 15
Used for : - ALARMS Connection
- EOW Connection

Used for : - RUC Connection

Used for : - HOUSEKEEPING 1 (HK1) Connection
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 A-19
A. APPENDIX UMN
Table A.3.2 RACK INSTALLATION MATERIALS (K-Shelf) (continued)

(31111.00940K)

Used for : - HOUSEKEEPING 2 and 3 / HOUSEKEEPING 4 and 5 Connection
Order these q.ty for each equipped HOUSEKEEPING Card (item 00150)
421-015/60 Self-Locking Coaxial Plug Series 1.0/2.3 75 Ohm NR 3

Used for : - SYNCHRONISM Connection (CN1..6)
Order these q.ty for each equipped Timing Source Card (item 00130)
Table A.3.3 RACK INSTALLATION MATERIALS (Expansion K-Shelf)

(31111.00941K)
223-009/16 Cable Tie NR 40

131-011/01 PVC Adhesive Tape NR 1
Used for : - VARIOUS utilisation
103-037/34 1x10 mm Cable (Black) M 20

103-037/35 1x10 mm Cable (Blue) M 20
215-031/18 Ring Terminal 10mm M.8 NR 4
Used for : POWER SUPPLY for SCSU Connection
SRT 1F
A-20 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
UMN A. APPENDIX
Table A.3.4 TRANSCEIVER INSTALLATION MATERIALS (K-Shelf)

(31111.00942K)
421-015/60 Self-Locking Coaxial Plug Series 1.0/2.3 75 Ohm NR 6

Used for : - STM-1 and WS 75 Ohm Connections
104-104/04 75 Ohm Coaxial Cable TCE 2H2HH2 1(0.4/1.9)/M1 M 60

Used for : - STM-1, WS 75 Ohm and SYNCHRONISM Connections

Used for : - WS 120 Ohm Connection
Table A.3.5 INSTALLATION TOOLS
USE FOR CONNECTORS

RJ45
Item Code DESCRIPTION Coaxial Plug
Connector
(421-015/60)
(422-053/63)
1 236-100/40 Crimping tool X -
2 236-100/28 Extractor tool X -
3 236-100/17 Crimping tool - X
SRT 1F
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010 A-21
A. APPENDIX UMN
SRT 1F
A-22 911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
SRT 1F SRT 1F
Synchronous Radio for Trunk
Synchronous Radio for Trunk Applications
Applications
User Manual (UMN)
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January 2010
User Manual (UMN)
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January SRT 1F

2010 Synchronous Radio for Trunk
Applications
User Manual (UMN)
911-362/02C0000 Issue 6, January

User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Manual

Issue 6, January 2010

- Current Issue 6, January 2010

- Previous Issue 5, April 2008

In Issue 6, January 2010, as to the previous issue:

This page intentionally left blank

1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION......................................................................................... 1-1

1.5.1 SRT 1F K-shelf....................................................................................... 1-44

1.9.2.5 Upper 6 GHz band (ITU-R Rec. F.384-10) ............................................ 1-84

2.4.7.4 Master/Slave setting............................................................................... 2-21

2.11.7 Occasional Traffic Interface (OCC INTF) ............................................... 2-65

3.2 Optical Fiber Cables and Jumpers........................................................... 3-5

3.4.2.3 Antenna Port Position ............................................................................ 3-22

4.1.2 Check Incoming Power Supply at SRT 1F Rack...................................... 4-3

5.3.2 Manual Controls ....................................................................................... 5-9

1.1 Introduction to the SRT 1F Radio Equipment

1.2 Equipment Features

High spectral efficiency of 8.5 bits/sec/Hz using 64 QAM Multi-Level

Second), number of pointer change and number of MSP and RPS

Tributary Tributary Tributary

Note: MS : Multiplex Section LTE : Line Terminal Equipment

Figure 1-1 - Linear Configuration

SDH MUX SDH MUX SDH MUX

Network feature: Network protection switching with media diversity

Figure 1-2 - Media Diversity Configuration

SDH MUX SDH MUX

Network feature: Network protection switching with ring operation

Figure 1-3 - Standard Ring Configuration

1.3 Equipment Details

1.3.1 Ordering Guide

Assembling an SRT 1F terminal means to select the proper equipment

Table 1.1 - Classification of available configurations for SRT 1F

Branching configuration No. of DUP No. of ADPT

Figure 1-4 shows the configuration of SRT 1F (N+1) terminal equipment.

: RF Branching Network Unit Block :

MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit Block :

SCSU : BaseBand Interface, Supervisory/Control & Switching Unit Block :

BSW : BaseBand Switch Unit: x N, N < 8 (STM-1 Electrical or

HK : Housekeeping Unit (option): x 2 max

OWBR : Order Wire Branching (option): x 2 max

OCC : Occasional Traffic Interface Unit (option): x 1 max (STM-1

RAB : sub-module for RAB on SV unit (option): x 1 max

RST : sub-module for RST enhanced synchronization mode (option):

Figure 1-4 - SRT 1F N+1 (N < 8) Terminal Radio Equipment

Figure 1-5 shows the configuration of SRT 1F 2(N+1) Single Terminal

on one rack equipment (N < 4).

: RF Branching Network Unit Block :

MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit Block :

SCSU : BaseBand Interface, Supervisory/Control & Switching Unit Block :

BSW : BaseBand Switch Unit: x 2*N, N < 4 (STM-1 Electrical or

TCU : Timing Control Unit: x 1 ( + 1 max as option)

HK : Housekeeping Unit (option): x 2 max

ECU : Embedded Communication Unit (option): x 1 max

OWBR : Order Wire Branching (option): x 2 max

OCC : Occasional Traffic Interface Unit (option): x 2 max (STM-1

VF : VF module for RUC on SV unit (option): x 2 max

RAB : sub-module for RAB on SV unit (option): x 1 max

RST : sub-module for RST enhanced synchronization mode (option):

Figure 1-6 shows the configuration of SRT 1F 2(N+1) Single Terminal

on one rack equipment (3 < N < 8).

: RF Branching Network Unit Block :

MSTU : Main Signal Transmission Unit Block :

SCSU : BaseBand Interface, Supervisory/Control & Switching Unit Block :

BSW : BaseBand Switch Unit: x 2*N, N < 8 (STM-1 Electrical or